Ceragon - IP10G - Advanced - Course Handbook - V4.2

IP-10G Advanced
Version 4.2
Visit our Customer Training Portal at Training.Ceragon.Com

or contact us at training@ceragon.com
Trainee Name:
Table of Contents
Theme
Page
Introduction
Case Studies
Ceragon in a Nutshell
3
29
Introduction to MW Radio
41
Introduction to Mean Square Error
57
Introduction Adaptive Coding & Modulation

Introduction to 802.1p, 802.1q
69
IP-10G Front Panel Description
80
94
IP-10G Installation
104
Introduction to RFU-C
120
Basic Configuration:
Setting IP to Chassis (CLI)

Performance Monitoring
General Parameters (In-Band, OOB, License, NTP, Versions & more)
L2 Switch Configuration: Single Pipe, Managed Mode, VLANs
L2 Switch Configuration: Trunk Port VS. Access Port

L2 Switch Configuration: Metro Mode
127
133
158
181
190
197
Advanced Features
RING RSTP
Introduction to Quality of Service
Configuring Quality of Service (Part 1 - Basic)

Configuring Quality of Service (Part 2 - Advanced)
Commissioning the Radio Link
Green Mode
Interface Configuration (ETH, TDM, STM, Auxiliary, SyncE, AIS)

Cross Connection (XC) Trail Configuration
Automatic State Propagation (ASP)
205
220
233
247
Interfaces
254
271
276
288
305
Network Resiliency
Introduction to Link Aggregation
Configuring Link Aggregation

XPIC
1+1 HSB Protection
Service Operation, Administration & Maintenance (CFM)
315
329
337
353
370
Maintenance
Loopbacks (IF, Radio, Line)

Configuration File Backup
Software Upgrade
EMS Security
Annexes
392
400
414
424
433
PAGE 2
6/9/2010
Ceragon - Company Presentation

June 2010
Ceragon Networks
Leaders in High-Capacity Wireless Backhaul
Incorporation: 1996
Personnel: 500
Revenues in 2009: $184M
NASDAQ: CRNT
Proprietary and Confidential
PAGE 3
6/9/2010
Global Sales
(Reflecting FY2009 results)
EMEA: 38%
NA: 16%
APAC: 37%
CALA: 9%
Success factors:
Superior technology and professional services offering
Better cost position
Global Sales footprint with 19 offices worldwide
Strong partnerships with OEMs, distributors and VARs
Segment Breakdown H1 2009
Service
Providers
87%
Private
Networks
13%
Short Haul Links: Rapid Growth

Ceragon
Links
CeragonMarketShare
7.0%
35000
6.3%
6.0%
617427
507249
25000
4.3%
4.0%
35000 650000
554189 550000
30000
5.0%
Total
Links
TotalShortHaulvs.Ceragon
26698
450000
387020
20000
350000
300509
15000
3.0%
2.6%
10000
2.1%
2.0%
250000
13175
150000
8132
5000
1.0%
50000
2380
0.8%
0.0%
50000
2005
2005
2006
2007
2008
2006
2007
2008
2009
2009
PTPRadioShipments
TotalShortHaul NextGenerationHybridTDM/Packet&
Ceragonlinksshipments
LegacyTDM
Growthdrivers:
Highcapacity
AllIP
Totalmarket
Totalshorthaulmarket
From 0.8% market share in 2005 to 6.3% market share in 2009

4,800 links to 35,000
Grew in 2009 in shipments terms by 30%
Global short haul shipment dropped by 11%.
Source: SLR, EJL, Ceragon

4
PAGE 4
6/9/2010
Where We Play
LTE-Ready Mobile Backhaul
Mobile Operators
Backhaul Providers
Rural and WiMAX Backhaul

Alternative Carriers
Mobile Operators
Private Networks
Enterprise Networks
Governments: Local and State
Utilities
We Focus on Backhaul
High Capacity LTE/4G-Ready Wireless Backhaul Networks
Mobile Backhaul
WiMAX Backhaul
Private, Utility, State &

Local Government
Rural Broadband
Any access technology: Wire line or wireless, GSM, CDMA, HSPA, LTE or WiMAX
Access
Backhaul / Metro
Any service: Voice, data, personal broadband

6
Core
PAGE 5
6/9/2010
Strategic Partnerships for Growth
Opportunity to participate in large network deployments

Target Tier 1 carriers
Geographical spread
Maximize complete solution offering
OEM
Solution reselling
Per project
Vertical reselling
OEM 2
OEM 3
Global, Diversified Customer Base
Service
Providers
WiMAX Carriers
Private Networks
Over 200 Service Provider and hundreds of Private Networks in more than 130 Countries:*
8
PAGE 6
6/9/2010
Ceragon Product Portfolio
Capacity optimisation
Cost Efficiency
Aggregation
Access
First Mile
Backbone
Aggregated links
PDH & Ethernet Access
PDH/SONET & Ethernet
SONET& Ethernet
Trunk (Long Haul, High Power)
SDH Aggregation
Metro IP Migration
GbE rings
OC-3 Aggregation (N+1)

N x GbE Aggregation
FibeAir Trunk
SDH
FibeAir IP-10 G
Comprehensive mounting Portfolio

FibeAir Family
SplitMount
AllIndoor
Compactandmodular
Allindoorsolutions
RadioUnits:Fromcompacttohighpower
Radio
Units: From compact to high power
From1+0/1+1toN+1/N+0Trunk solutions
CarrierEthernet/Native2
FullOutdoor
FulloutdoorNodalsite,
N+0toN+N,fullyredundant,
AllRFunitsapplicable
IP10
CarrierEthernet/
Native2
IP10
TDM
Trunk
TDM
1500R
3200T
IP10
CarrierEthernet/Native2
10
PAGE 7
6/9/2010
PolyView:
Network Management System for Wireless Backhaul Networks
Reduced operational costs
End-to-end provisioning, Group
configuration
Faster & easier network

maintenance
Network View, User-friendly GUI
Quick and easy network

troubleshooting
Comprehensive FCAPS support,
easier root analysis
Greater network availability

Complete redundancy & backup
functionality
Smooth platform integration

Field proven, interoperable, multiplatform
Ceragon's Architecture Management Concept

11
Ceragon Complete Offering

Plan :
Network design, Service design, Radio

g , Synchronization
y
design,
g , Power
Design,
Consumption, Rack Layout, Project
deployment plan
Build:
Project Management, Site Survey,

Installation and Commissioning,
Documentation - As Built Site folder
Operate :
Full Training Program, Expert on Site

throughout initial operation, Managed
Services - Take part in Network operation
Maintain:
12
Remote Technical Support 24/7, S/W Repair,

H/W Repair , Advanced Replacements, Stock
Management, On Site Support, S/W Updates,
Review and Preventive Activities
PAGE 8
6/9/2010
Why Ceragon
Company:
Market leadership in migration of radio to packet
Widely deployed with top 3 position in high capacity radios
Global reach and breadth of portfolio
Culture of innovation
Financially sound
Products:
Risk free migration path from TDM to Ethernet
True packet microwave, MEF certified
Integrated networking functions, TDM and Ethernet
Highest possible capacities
Exceptional system gain and spectral efficiency
13
Mobile Backhaul Case Studies
14
PAGE 9
6/9/2010
Tata Indicom:
14K Links serving access and aggregation. All IP ready
Installing 700 links a month, from planning to commissioning

8 planners, 13 engineers, 14 project managers/directors
15
Telcel:
2600+ links migration to packet with LTE in mind
Optimize :
Tree to Rings
helpingTelceltooptimizetheradioportionofthenetwork:
Design,install.Maintain.HugeSDHinstallbase
16
PAGE 10
6/9/2010
Digitel:
1350+ links Delivering high capacity, anywhere.
Converged, 3G and Rural Broadband IP backhaul

All indoor and split trunks
17
Rogers :
850 Links long haul Enable 3G in rural
BTS/NB
A
Ethernet
TDM
FibeAir IP-10
BSC/RNC
BTS/NB
B
FibeAir IP-10
BTS/NB
Ceragon
packet/Hybrid
MW Network set
in a physical
FibeAir IP-10
B
BSC/RNC
A
FibeAir IP-10
FibeAir IP-10
BTS/NB
For network simplicity

reasons this part has
reasons,
being abstracted
ignoring transport, PW
and locations
B
FibeAir IP-10
5 layers of protection to sustain high capacity mobile

broadband services in remote locations
18
PAGE 11
6/9/2010
Long haul Case Studies
19
SDH & IP Trunk Backbone for Mobile and ISP

Converged Migration (Philippines)
Challenge:
Build a mix SDH and high

capacity
Solutions
2G
BTS
n x E1
TDM
Mix of all indoor and split TDM +
PDH
Microwav
e
Ethernet 1+1
Why Trunk?
7+0 4STM-1 and 3 GbE

Advanced Carrier Ethernet
20
features
Both interfaces use the same
radio equipment. Smooth
migration from all TDM to all
packet
Both type operate concurrently
on the same antenna and radio
branching - Native2
ECI
2G
n x E1 XDM-100
nxSTM-1
TDM
nx STM-1
Rings
3G
Node B
Cerago
n
FibeAir
Ceragon
FibeAir
E1
ECI
XDM-1000
63 E1
TDM
2G
BSC
STM-1c
STM-1
3G
RNC
Ceragon
FibeAir
Ethernet
PDH
Microwav
e
Ethernet
+
1*E1
IP MAX2
Ethernet
Ethernet
2xGbE
Ceragon
FibeAir
Huawei
Switch
Ceragon
FibeAir 2xGbE
PAGE 12
10
6/9/2010
Full IP Backbone for an ISP (Uruguay)
Challenge:
Native
Ethernet
Native
Ethernet
Native
Ethernet
Establishing a GbE link between sites

nxFE / GbE
200km apart spanning over jungles

and lakes
Cisco
7600
nxFE / GbE
Ceragon
FibeAir
Solutions
Ceragon
FibeAir
Ceragon
FibeAir
Cisco
7600
Ceragon
FibeAir
Service Aware Radio Link
Split, all packet 3X(2+0) multi radio

6 hopes
Abstraction layer at both ends. (Cisco
nxFE / GbE
nxFE /
GbE
routers)
31.94 km
Why Ceragon?
High Capacity and flexibility

Modularity and upgradeability
High capacity all, indoor, all packet
Cisco partnership (CTDP)
Multi layered availbilaity
8
.6
49
CANO
34 25 02.00 S
057 51 41.00 W
km
32.81 km CESP
ARTI
34 22 37.00 S
057 31 03
03.00
00 W
36
.53
km
34 21 02.00 S
057 09 44.00 W
RIPI
34 30 58.00 S
056 49 07.00 W
Quilmes
34 43 41.00 S
058 15 04.00 W
37
.5
5
km
RIBO
34 42 58.00 S
056 29 18.00 W
33
.7
7
km
VPLA
34 54 21.00 S
056 11 59.00 W
0'
58
40'
20'
57
40'
20'
Radio level, System level, e-t-e
21
All Indoor & Split Configurations LTE Ready

Backhaul (NA)
Challenge:
Ubiquitous network concept for
wireless backhaul serving remote

base station sites
Migration from 2G/3G UMTS to
HSPA and LTE
Native2
1+1
Tail site #1
Native2
1+1
Tail site #2
Ethernet 1+1
1+1
1
1
Native2
1+1
Hub/Aggregation site
Solutions
Mix of all indoor and split TDM +
Native2
Fiber site
Native Ethernet service ("Ethernet VC")

Native E1/E1 service ("E1/E1 VC")
Why Trunk
Highest possible capacities

Risk free migration for both all in
door and split
Advanced Carrier Ethernet

features
Native2 for native legacy and

packet support during the
migration path to all packet
22
PAGE 13
11
6/9/2010
An army network backbone (Philippines)

15 0'
AGUINALDO
Challenge:
Build an army military grade long microwave
Antipolo
CAPINPIN
Malacanang
10'
LUCBAN
TAGAYTAY
backbone
Connecting
g the Philippines
pp
islands with manyy
over the water links with distances of up to
100km
Cost-effective voice, data, and video
conferencing services to satisfy command
and control requirements
GUINYANGAN
PASACAO
PILI
IRIGA
20'
CAMALIG
MATNOG
30'
CALBAYOG
CATBALOGAN
40'
TACLOBAN
ORMOC
50'
Solutions
CAMOTES
CEBU
MACTAN
hops of 1+1 all indoor

7 GHz
Li k IInterface:
t f
STM
1
Link
STM-1
10 0'
BOHOL
10'
CAMIGUIN
CDO
MANTICAO
20'
Why Ceragon?
OZAMIZ
PAGADIAN
GANYANGAN
LACAUAN
High power split configuration 1+1

Integrated offering through a channel with
LINUGWAYAN
TAGUITE
networking, terminal and support
PULACAN
BALABAGAN
30'
ZAMBOANGA
6 40'
120 50'
40'
PC HILL
AWANG
UPI
MERCEDES
30'
20'
10'
125
WiMAX Case Studies
24
PAGE 14
12
6/9/2010
Case Study
Adam Internet - Australia
Broadband services to Businesses and Residential subscriber

Filling Broadband holes in Adelaide metro region (5,000 km2)
Australian government partially subsidizes the network & service
Up to 12Mbps/1Mbps service per subscriber
WiMAX RAN equipment vendor : Alvarion
Backhaul Solution: Ceragons FibeAir IP-10
25
Case Study
Adam Internet - Australia
Gaw ler
5 .0
7 km
79
0.
2.98 km
Gaw ler South

km
Kudla
4.31 km
Angle Vale Vf 2 .3 5
Why did Adam Internet choose

Ceragon?
Best solution for All-IP network
(native Ethernet)
Advanced protection schemes
(Ring)
Built in Carrier Ethernet Switch
Flexible & Scalable roll out
capabilities
Smithfield (Sa)
km
Smithfield
Uley Reserv e
k
4.12 km
Elizabeth m
6k
6 .3
6 00
6.
kkm
Burton
ELIZABETH VALE
48 York Terrace
Parafield Gardens
3.09 k
4 .1
km
4.04
5.66 km
m
7k
7 .1
7.45 km
km
3.06 km
5.2 1 km
9 km
3.1
5 km
Greenw ith Vf
Salisbury East
Salisbury South
Fairv iew Park
km
8.6 9 km
4. 48
Modbury North
Pooraka Vf
Gepps Cross
Gilles Plains
4. 32 km
Hope Valley West
km
5 .8 7
7.49
West Lakes
km
Ottow ay
GREENACRE
ATHELSTONE
km
Bev erley km
.0 6
New ton
Dudley Park
Glynde3
OSBOURNEGreenfields
4.14
5
3.0
km
3.09
km
4. 40
4
4.2
km
4.6
9k
Unley
Plympton
3.
62
km
2.9
2 .53 km
4.20
km
Wattle Park
GLENSIDE
BELAIR
Daw Park
Eden Hills
2.9 4
Warradale
km
4.14 km
3.3
Flagstaff
O'HALLORAN
HILL Hill
Coromandel Valley Vf
2.6
km
3
3.59
km
km
Somerton Park Vf
Marion East
4. 32
Haw thorn
8 km
2. 5
7 km
GLANDORE
3.29 k m
2.6 7 km
Adelaide Airport
3.23 km
27
4.
km
Henley Beach
ST PETERS
4. 72
km
Mile End
2.6
km
2.9
3.0 3
3.1
6 km
km
5 km
67
3.39 km
4 km
6.1 8 km
Aberfoyle Park Cherry Gardens
3.
HAPPY VALLEY
LONSDALE
4 km 4 km
Onkaparinga Hills
REYNELLA
VF
9.8
3
O'Sulliv an Beach
SHEIDOW PARK
4.
km
3.88
km
Woodcroft
Hackham West
Seaford Meadow s
3.90
Seaford
km
2.9 8 km
McLaren Vale
73 km
1 1.1
4
MOANA VF
km
26
PAGE 15
13
6/9/2010
Case Study
Allegro: Business services for Queenslands
outer metro areas
Services: All wireless 2Mbps to 200Mbps
PtP Ethernet microwave: 8Mbps to 200Mbps
WiMAX: 1Mbps to 6Mbps

Backhaul: All wireless 200-400Mbps
Service aware PtP Ethernet microwave
IP/MPLS based Ring topology

Allegro Value proposition:
Rapid delivery times
Competitive pricing scheme based on carefully designed

network to meet low TCO (Total Cost of Ownership)
27
Case Study
PtP Ethernet microwave for Backhaul and high
capacity services
Business Access :
Service aware Ethernet microwave
enhanced with Adaptive Modulation
Or PtMP WiMAX
PtP
Backhaul:
IP/MPLS based ring topology service
aware Ethernet microwave enhanced
with Adaptive Modulation
IP/MPLS
router
IP/MPLS
router
PtMP WiMAX
WiMAX
Base
Station
IP/MPLS
router
PAGE 16
14
6/9/2010
Case Study
South East Asia: National broaband based on
WiMAX
WiMAX Fi
Fixed/Mobile
d/M bil applications
li ti
Broadband Access
VoIP Fixed and VoIP handset
IP TV
Backhaul: All wireless 10-400Mbps
Service aware PtP Ethernet microwave
Carrier Ethernet based aggregation
Value proposition:
Access to a true Broadband service
Coverage and mobility
29
Ceragon IP Solution: Urban/Rural Link

planning
E-t-E delay <6msec
E-t-E delay <7msec
Challenges:
1. Multi hops (up
to 8)
2 Low delay for
2.
VoIP
3. Extremely
high capacity
4. Rapid
deployment
5. High
availability
6. Upgradable
from tree to
ring topology
7. Service aware
transport
* Latency figure are based on a 64Byte
30
PAGE 17
15
6/9/2010
Case Study
Aerea/WorldMAX: 1st Mobile WiMAX launch
already live in Amsterdam
Services: 512Kbps-8Mbps
USB WiMAX Dongle
10-40Euro
Aggregation: All wireless 200-400Mbps
High capacity service aware Ethernet radio at the

aggregation
Low capacity for Access

Aerea Value proposition:
Hotspot the size of Amsterdam.
Rapid, online order. Mail delivery within 2 days pending

on coverage
31
Low Cost, High Capacity

Carrier Ethernet Aggregation for WiMAX Backhaul
Low Capacity Link
1+1
Aggregation Site
BS site
Switch
Router
Ceragon
FibeAir
Ethernet Aggregation
Low Capacity Link

1+1
Core Site
XC
XC
Ceragon
FibeAir
BS site
PSN
Switch
Router
BS site
32
Ceragon
FibeAir
Ethernet
Microwave Link
Aggregation
Site
PAGE 18
16
6/9/2010
Verticals Case Studies
33
Simon says there are 9 distinct verticals
Municipality
Utility
Health
34
Defense
OPG
Education
Public Security
Broadcast
Finance
PAGE 19
17
6/9/2010
Case Study
Australia: Police, Fire & Emergency Services
Public Safety
Challenge:
Provide reliable digital voice communications and
data traffic
99.997% monthly average availability. (Equipment
reliability and propagation performance)
Low latency (275 m/s)
Small antenna to reduce wind load
Cost effective 1+0 space diversity configuration in
ring topology
Solution
FibeAir 1500R in ring topology
Management and VoIP EOW via 2Mb/s Ethernet
wayside channel
Why Ceragon?
High power split radio with integrated space diversity
Performance in ring topologies
Extremely reliable hardware
Versatile auxiliary channels
35
Police
HQ
Local
Police
Station
Local Police
Station
fiber
Case Study
Australia: South Australian Forestry
Municipality
Challenge:
Create a robust high capacity video
surveillance network for , bush fire
monitoring
Low visual foot print to reduce
vandalism and impact scenery
enjoyment
Solutions
6 hops 1+0 split (IP-10)
Link Interface: Ethernet
Some of the links are tree mounted
Why Ceragon?
Cost efficient high capacity native
Ethernet in a 1+0 configuration
Adaptive Coding and Modulation (ACM)
Integrated offering through a channel
(MIMP) with networking, services and
support
36
South Australian Forest

Photo: Forestry SA
PAGE 20
18
6/9/2010
Case Study
Australia: Housing Commission, Melbourne
Municipality
Challenge:
Create a high capacity network between 8
campuses in the city
Need to support closed circuit TV and
Telemetry monitoring for public housing
Solutions
8 link 1+0 ring
400Mbps all IP
unlicensed
53 u
ce sed spurs
spu s
Why Ceragon?
Cost efficient high capacity native Ethernet in
a 2+0 ready configuration
Upgradeable and modular
(Integrators Australia) with networking,
services and support
37
Case Study
Philippines: An army network backbone
15 0'
AGUINALDO
Defense
Antipolo
CAPINPIN
Malacanang
10'
LUCBAN
TAGAYTAY
Challenge:
Build an army military grade long microwave
backbone
Connecting the Philippines islands with many over
the water links with distances of up to 100km
Cost-effective voice, data, and video conferencing
services to satisfy command and control
requirements
Solutions
36 hops 1+1 all indoor
7 GHz
Link Interface: STM-1
Why Ceragon?
High power split configuration 1+1
networking, terminal and support
GUINYANGAN
PASACAO
PILI
IRIGA
20'
CAMALIG
MATNOG
30'
CALBAYOG
CATBALOGAN
40'
TACLOBAN
ORMOC
50'
CAMOTES
CEBU
MACTAN
10 0'
BOHOL
10'
CAMIGUIN
CDO
MANTICAO
20'
OZAMIZ
PAGADIAN
GANYANGAN
LACAUAN
PULACAN
BALABAGAN
30'
LINUGWAYAN
TAGUITE
ZAMBOANGA
6 40'
120 50'
40'
PC HILL
AWANG
UPI
MERCEDES
30'
20'
10'
125
PAGE 21
19
6/9/2010
Case Study
Australia: Wireless connectivity to SCADA for
Water Management solutions
Utility
Challenge:
Connect rural fully automated water gates
wirelessly to a SCADA (Supervisory Control
And Data Acquisition)
Provide reliability in extreme weather conations
where systems is required the most to open or
close the water gates
Rural and rough terrain
Solutions
7 hops 1+1
Why Ceragon?
Cost efficient high power radio units
Highly available radio link
SlipGateTM
39
Case Study
Spain: Water UTelco
Utility
Challenge:
Create a reliable high capacity multi service
network
Provide both internal data requirements such
as intra-communication voice, data, SCADA,
and surveillance systems while serving the
local government telecom needs
Solutions
60 hops 1+0/1+1/2+0 split
Multiple topology schemes
Why Ceragon?
Cost efficient high capacity native Ethernet in a
2+0 configuration
Adaptive Coding and Modulation (ACM)
networking, services and support
40
PAGE 22
20
6/9/2010
Case Study
Australia: Power utility data protection
Utility
Challenge:
g
Create an completely reliable low capacity
backbone for power surges monitoring and
protection serving rural power substation
Leverage highly available excessive capacity
to up sell telecom services: Voice and Data
Solutions
16 hops 2+1 all indoor
Serves as a Main link
Why Ceragon?
Cost efficient high power all indoor 2+1
configuration (upgradeable to 4+1)
41
Case Study
USA: Rural electrical cooperative
Utility
Challenge:
Create a reliable backbone to connect SCIs
20 substations and metering points
Serving SCADA, Land Mobile Radio, Video
Advanced Metering Infrastructure traffic.
Solutions
8 hops all indoor
Serves as a Main link
g topology
opo ogy
Ring
Why Ceragon?
Cost efficient, Upgradeable split Native2
solution.
Maplenet Wireless with networking, services
and support
42
South Central Indiana REMC (SCI)
PAGE 23
21
6/9/2010
Case Study
Australia: Alinta Gas pipeline
OPG
Challenge:
A long mission critical communication link
for a SCADA system
Solutions
43 hops 1+1
Why Ceragon?
Cost efficient high power radio units
Highly available radio link
43
1,300km
Case Study
France: Broadcast TV
Broadcast
Challenge:
Build a robust backup for a fiber
installation for the distribution of high
quality live video content along Nice
coast line
Solutions
All indoor, all packet 1+1
Alternate path for fiber
Why Ceragon?
High Capacity Ethernet in all indoor
configuration
Modularity and upgradability
MONTAGEL
LA BRAGUE
ST RAPHAEL
44
PAGE 24
22
6/9/2010
Case Study
Australia: TV network Intra-studio
communication
Broadcast
Challenge:
Broadcast
Create a reliable high capacity contribution site
network
Leverage highly available excessive capacity to
up sell telecom services: Voice and Data
Solutions
4 hops 1+0 split space diversity
Alternate path with links up to 70km with
Why Ceragon?
Cost efficient high power highly available native
Ethernet in a 1+0 configuration
Service protection support
45
XC
XC
Studio Site B
Ceragon
FibeAir
Native Ethernet
Microwave as an
alternate path
Ethernet switch
Fiber as a
primary
path
XC
XC
Ceragon
FibeAir
Studio Site A
Ethernet switch
Case Study
US: Operation Green Light - Kansas
Municipality
Challenge:
Intelligent Traffic Systems (ITS) where the
stoplights are connected to a wireless network
with IP video cameras and backhauled
wirelessly to their Traffic Management center.
Create a reliable high capacity packet
aggregation network
Low impact and integration with last mile
technologies such as WiMAX
Solutions
2+0
2 0 split
li
Link Interface: Ethernet in rings
Why Ceragon?
The highest possible capacities
Service protection support
46
PAGE 25
23
6/9/2010
Case Study
US: Intermountain Health Care - Utah
Health
Challenge:
Develop a high capacity network that fits
into their disaster recovery plan (mainly
earthquakes)
Needed control over network with back
using local Telco leased lines
Solutions
1+0 in Ring topology
Why Ceragon?
Cost efficient high power, high capacity
radio units
Modular and upgradable
47
WSA - North Germany Water Authority

Broadcast
Public
Safety
Utility
Challenge:
Connecting radar stations and light towers on the shore
Long haul over water
Solutions:
70 packet links
7Ghz high power with Space diversity
Why Ceragon?
High capacity long haul packet radio
Built in Space Diversity
Single turnkey supplier (Telent) for the compete network (offered by two of the bidders)
48
PAGE 26
24
6/9/2010
Australia: SP AusNet Smart metering

Broadcast
Public
Safety
Utility
Challenge:
Carrier grade radio backhaul to suit smart grid requirements (IP based) but also supports
traditional TDM based services i.e SCADA
Solutions:
80 links IP-10 1+1 radios over 4 years
Polyview NMS
Native2: Ethernet and E1
Why Ceragon?
Advanced Native Ethernet capabilities for smart grid & Native E1 for SCADA (Native2)
Outdoor cabinet installations with WIMAX requirement
Flexible, future proof solution
Single turnkey supplier (Motorola) for the compete network
49
Case study (Municipality)

Australia: Housing Commission, Melbourne
Municipality
Challenge:
Create a high capacity network between 75 campuses in the city
Support closed circuit TV, Voice and Telemetry monitoring for public
housing
Solutions:
8 link 1+0 ring

400Mbps all IP
53 unlicensed spurs
Why Ceragon?
Cost efficient high capacity native Ethernet
Upgradeable and modular, 2+0 ready configuration
Integrated offering through a channel (Integrators Australia)
50
PAGE 27
25
6/9/2010
Thank You
51
PAGE 28
26
10/5/2010
Ceragon in a Nutshell
Ceragon FibeAir Family
OA&M
Service Management
Carrier Ethernet Switch

ACM
Gigabit
Ethernet
Fast
Ethernet
Native2
Security
TDM Cross Connect

XPIC
Radio
Ethernet + TDM
Multi
Radio
10-500Mbps, 7-56MHz
SD/FD
E1/T1
Ch-STM1/
OC3
Terminal
Mux
RFU (6-38GHz)
2
PAGE 29
10/5/2010
RFUs
FibeAir RFU-HP
FibeAir RFU-HS
FibeAir RFU-P
FibeAir RFU-C
FibeAir RFU-D
Standard power
High power
(e.g. Smaller antennas reduced cost)
Where we are
ISPs
Fixed
Networks
Cable
TV
CellularBackhaul
RuralAccess
PDH
xDSL
Subscribers
IPDSLAM
IP/ETH
Customer
Network
SDH/SONETRING
PSTN
4
PAGE 30
10/5/2010
Main features
Unique Adaptive Coding & Modulation (ACM)

Enhanced radio efficiency and capacity for Ethernet traffic
Integrated Carrier Ethernet switching functionality
Enhanced QoS for differentiated services
Supported configurations
1+0
1+1 HSB Fully-redundant!
Nodal solution with ring
Extensive and secure management solution
5
Integrated Carrier Ethernet switch

3 modes for Ethernet switching:
Metro switch Carrier Ethernet switching is enabled

Managed Switch 802.1 L2 switch
Smart pipe Carrier Ethernet switching is disabled
Only a single Ethernet interface is enabled for user traffic
The unit operates as a point-to-point Ethernet MW radio
IP-10
IP-10
Ethernet
User
Interfaces
Radio
interface
Ethernet
User
Interface
Radio
interface
Carrier Ethernet
Switch
Smart pipe mode
Metro/Managed switch mode
Extensive Carrier Ethernet feature-set

6
eliminates the need for external switches

PAGE 31
10/5/2010
Radio capacity - ETSI

7MHz
ACM
Point
Modulation
14MHz
# of
E1s
Ethernet
Capacity
(Mbps)
ACM
Point
Modulation
# of
E1s
Ethernet
Capacity
(Mbps)
20 - 29
QPSK
9.5 13.5
QPSK
8 PSK
14 20
8 PSK
12
29 - 41
16 QAM
19 28
16 QAM
16
42 - 60
32 QAM
10
24 34
32 QAM
16
49 70
64 QAM
12
28 40
64 QAM
16
57 82
128 QAM
13
32 46
128 QAM
16
69 - 98
256 QAM
16
38 54
256 QAM
16
81 - 115
256 QAM
16
42 60
256 QAM
16
87 - 125
28MHz
ACM
Point
56MHz
40MHz
Modulation
# of
E1s
Ethernet
Capacity
(Mbps)
ACM
Point
Modulation
# of
E1s
Ethernet
Capacity
(Mbps)
ACM
Point
Modulation
# of
E1s
Ethernet
Capacity
(Mbps)
76 - 109
QPSK
16
38 - 54
QPSK
16
56 - 80
QPSK
16
8 PSK
16
53 - 76
8 PSK
16
82 - 117
8 PSK
16
114 - 163
16 QAM
16
77 - 110
16 QAM
16
122 - 174
16 QAM
16
151 - 217
32 QAM
16
103 - 148
32 QAM
16
153 - 219
32 QAM
16
202 - 288
64 QAM
16
127 - 182
64 QAM
16
188 - 269
64 QAM
16
251 - 358
128 QAM
16
156 - 223
128 QAM
16
214 - 305
128 QAM
16
301 - 430
256 QAM
16
167 - 239
256 QAM
16
239 - 342
256 QAM
16
350 - 501
256 QAM
16
183 - 262
256 QAM
16
262 - 374
256 QAM
16
372 - 531
7
Wireless Carrier Ethernet Ring

Example configuration (1+0 ring)
N x GE/FE
N x GE/FE
N x GE/FE
Wireless
Carrier Ethernet
Ring
(up to 500Mbps)
Integrated Ethernet
Switching
8
N x GE/FE
PAGE 32
10/5/2010
Native2 Microwave Radio Technology

At the heart of the IP-10 solution is Ceragon's market-leading Native2
microwave technology.
With this technology, the microwave carrier supports native IP/Ethernet

traffic together with optional native PDH
PDH.
Neither traffic type is mapped over the other, while both dynamically share
the same overall bandwidth.
This unique approach allows you to plan and build optimal all-IP or hybrid
TDM-IP backhaul networks which make it ideal for any RAN (Radio Access
Network)
In addition, Native2 ensures:

Very low link latency of <0.15 msecs @ 400 Mbps.
Very low overhead mapping for both ETH & TDM traffic
High precision native TDM synchronization distribution
9
NG-SDH/SONET complementary solution

Carrier Ethernet at the access, NG-SDH/SONET at the aggregation
Carrier Ethernet (MW links)
SDH/SONET (Hybrid Fiber/MW)
Native Ethernet
Ethernet over SDH/SONET
Hub
Site
GE
FE/GE
RNC
GE
Tail site
FibeAir
IP-10
FibeAir
IP-10
NG-SDH
MSPP
NG-SDH
MSPP
Core
Site
Ethernet services are

transported natively
over Carrier Ethernet
based MW radio links.
NG-SDH/SONET MSPP
node acts as gateway
between the Carrier
Ethernet and NGSDH/SONET based
networks.
Ethernet services
are mapped over
SDH/SONET
SDH/SONET MW
links are used where
fiber connections not
available
10
PAGE 33
10/5/2010
IP/MPLS complementary solution

Carrier Ethernet at the access, IP/MPLS at the aggregation
Carrier Ethernet (MW links)
IP/MPLS (Hybrid Fiber/MW)
Native Ethernet
Ethernet PWs or IP routing
Hub
Site
GE
FE/GE
RNC
GE
FibeAir
IP-10
Tail site
FibeAir
IP-10
MPLS
Router
MPLS
Router
Core
Site
Ethernet services are

transported natively
over Carrier Ethernet
based MW radio links.
IP/MPLS edge router acts

as gateway between the
Carrier Ethernet and
IP/MPLS based networks.
Both Ethernet and

E1/T1 services are
mapped over MPLS
using pseudo-wires
or routed using IP
High-capacity IP/MPLSaware" Ethernet MW

radio is used where fiber
connections not available
11
integrated QoS support - overview

4 CoS/priority queues per switch port
Advanced CoS/priority classification based
on L2/L3 header fields:
Priority Queues
Source Port
VLAN 802.1p
802 1
VLAN ID
IPv4 DSCP/TOS, IPv6 TC
Highest priority to BPDUs
W1 - Highest
Hi h t priority
i it
Classify
Arrivals
Advanced ingress traffic rate-limiting
Scheduling
departures
W3
per CoS/priority
Flexible scheduling scheme per port
Strict priority (SP)

Weighted Round Robin (WRR)
Hybrid any combination of SP & WRR
W2
W4 lowest priority
Shaping per port

Support differentiated Ethernet services
with SLA assurance
12
PAGE 34
10/5/2010
IEEE 802.1ag CFM (Connectivity Fault Management)
A Nodal Solution
Cellulartraffic
(TDM)
STM
Rings
14
PAGE 35
10/5/2010
A Nodal Solution
15
IP-10G VS. IP-10R1

Feature
Supported radio configurations
XPIC option
Max radio capacity
Multi-radio support
# of Ethernet interfaces
Full Carrier Ethernet switching
feature-set including ring protection
# of E1/T1 integrated IDU interfaces option
1+0, 1+1 HSB, 1+1 SD
G-Series
1+0, 1+1 HSB, 1+1 SD, 2+0 with XPIC
2+2 HSB with XPIC
NO
Yes
500Mbps
500Mbps
1Gbps using 2+0/XPIC
NO
Yes
5 x FE RJ-45+
1 x GE RJ-45 + 1 GbE SFP
5 x FE RJ-45+
2 x GE combo (RJ-45/SFP)
Yes
Yes
16 E1, 16 T1, None
16 E1, 16T1, None
# of E1/T1s per radio carrier
16
84
T-Card slot (additional 16 E1/T1 interfaces or

STM1/OC3 Mux)
NO
Yes
Nodal/XC/SNCP support
NO
Yes
SyncU
NO
V.11/RS232 User Channel option

Link Aggregation
16
IP-10R1
Single channel
(Asynchronous RS-232 / V.11.)
NO
Yes
2 x Async V.11/RS232 or
1 x Sync V.11
Yes
PAGE 36
10/5/2010
IP-10G VS. IP-10R1

IP-10R1
G-Series
RSTP (RING) with QinQ
Feature
NO
Yes
Dual Power Feed
NO
Yes
Floating IP
NO
Yes
MAC Aging Timer
Yes
Yes
ACM Low Latency Scripts
Yes
Yes
3.5 MHZ scripts
Yes
Yes
Radio Disabling
NO
Yes
QoS
Yes
Enhanced
17
Outdoor Enclosures Solution Benefits

Full Outdoor solution:
18
Dust and weather proof

Compact size reduces the cost of leasing or
purchasing rack space.
Ideal for Greenfield areas, at solar-powered sites,
and at repeater sites adjacent to highways.
One-man installation and shorter cabling reduce
installation costs.
Environment-friendly: Greener deployments, saving
on power and air-conditioning costs.
PAGE 37
10/5/2010
Higher Spectral-Efficiency
Whats in it for The Operator?
Typical
IP10
Microwave Radio
MicrowaveRadio
RequiredCapacity
155200Mbps
TWOradio links
or
56MHz channelbandwidth
ONE radiolink
using
28MHzchannelbandwidth
RequiredCapacity
70100Mbps
28MHz
ChannelBandwidth
14MHz
ChannelBandwidth
TheoperatorsavesCAPEX
andfreeupvaluablefrequencyresources
19
Higher Spectral-Efficiency is not enough

RadioType
Ant.Diameter
Length
Modulation
Capacity
TypicalSystemGain
1.80m
30Km
16QAM
32xE1s
TypicalSystemGain
1.80m
21Km
128QAM
STM1/OC3
TypicalSystemGain
3.00m
30Km
128QAM
STM1/OC3
HighSystemGain
HighSystemGain
1.80m
30km
128QAM
STM1/OC3
SpectralEfficiency
shouldalwaysbecoupledwith
SystemGain
20
PAGE 38
10
10/5/2010
Ceragons Management Overview
IP-10
21
FibeAir
Tree Topology
22
PAGE 39
11
10/5/2010
Thank You!
training@ceragon.com
PAGE 40
12
IntroductiontoRadio
Agenda
RF Principals
Parameters Affecting Propagation
Atmospheric Refraction
Multipath
Duct
Rain Fading
Fresnel
kB
i C
RF Li
Link
Basic
Components
Link Calculation
Modulation
Advanced Operation & Maintenance Course
PAGE 41
RF Principals
A Radio Link requires two end stations

A line of sight (LOS) or nLOS (near LOS) is required
Microwave Radio Link frequencies occupy 1-80GHz
Local
Remote
Why Radio?
Advantages (compared to alternative cable/fiber infrastructure) :

Easier installation
Faster installation
Cheaper installation
Easier maintenance
PAGE 42
RF Principals
RF - System of communication employing electromagnetic waves (EMW)

propagated through space
EMW travel at the speed of light (300,000 km/sec)
The wave length is determined by the frequency as follows -
Wave Length = c where c is the propagation velocity of electromagnetic
waves in vacuum (3x10^8 m/s)
Microwave refers to very short waves (millimeters) and typically relates to

frequencies above 1GHz:
300 MHz ~ 1 meter
10 GHz ~ 3 cm
RF Principals
We can see the relationship between colour, wavelength and amplitude using
this animation
PAGE 43
Radio spectrum
Dispersion
Humidity/gas
H midit /gas absorption
Multipath/ducting
Atmospheric conditions (refraction)
Terrain (flatness, type, Fresnel zone clearance, diffraction)
Climatic conditions (rain zone, temperature)
Rain attenuation
8
PAGE 44

Dispersion
Electromagnetic signal propagating in a physical medium is degraded
because the various wave components (i.e., frequencies, wavelengths) have
different propagation velocities within the physical medium:
Low frequencies have longer wavelength and refract less

High frequencies have shorter wavelength and refract more

Atmospheric Refraction
Deflection of the beam towards the ground due to different electrical
characteristics of the atmospheres
atmosphere s is called Dielectric Constant.
The dielectric constant depends on pressure, temperature & humidity in the
atmosphere, parameters that are normally decrease with altitude
Since waves travel faster through thinner medium, the upper part of the wave
will travel faster than the lower part, causing the beam to bend downwards,
following the curve of earth
With Atmosphere
No Atmosphere
10
PAGE 45

Multipath
Multipath occurs when there is more then one beam reaching the receiver
with
ith different amplit
amplitude
de or phase
Multipath transmission is the main cause of fading in low frequencies
Direct beam
Delayed beam
11

Duct
Atmospheric duct refers to a horizontal layer in the lower atmosphere with vertical refractive
index gradients causing radio signals:
Remain within the duct
Follow the curvature of the Earth
Experience less attenuation in the ducts than they would if the ducts were not present
D tL
Duct
Layer
Duct Layer
Terrain
12
PAGE 46

Rain Fading
Refers to scenarios where signal is absorbed by rain, snow, ice
Absorption becomes significant factor above 11GHz
Signal quality degrades
Represented by dB/km parameter which is related the rain density
which represented mm/hr
Rain drops falls as flattened droplet
V better than H (more immune to rain fading)
13

Rain Fading
Heavier rain >> Heavier Atten.

Hi h FQ >> Higher
Higher
Hi h Attenuation
Att
ti
14
PAGE 47

Fresnel Zone
3rd
2nd
TX
1st
RX
1. EMW propagate in beams

2. Some beams widen therefore, their path is longer
3. A p
phase shift is introduced between the direct and indirect
beam
4. Thus, ring zones around the direct line are created
Duct Layer0
Terrain
15

Fresnel Zone
Obstacles in the first Fresnel zone will create signals that will be 0 to 90 degrees
out of phasein the 2nd zone they will be 90 to 270 degrees out of phasein 3rd
zone, they will be 270 to 450 degrees out of phase and so on
Odd numbered zones are constructive and even numbered zones are destructive.
16
PAGE 48

Fresnel Zone
Note that there are many possible Fresnel zones, but we are chiefly concerned
with zone 1.
If this area were blocked by an obstruction, e.g. a tree or a building, the signal
arriving at the far end would be diminished.
When building wireless links, we therefore need to be sure that these zones be
kept free of obstructions.
In wireless networking we should check that that the area containing about 40-60
percent of the first Fresnel zone should be kept free.
3rd
2nd
1st
TX
17
RX
RF Link Basic Components

Antennas
Antennas are devices used to radiate electromagnetic energy into space.
OMNI-DIRECTIONAL antennas radiate & receive energy from all directions
at once (seldom used)
DIRECTIONAL antennas radiate energy in LOBES (or BEAMS) that extend
outward from the antenna.
The radiation pattern contains small minor lobes (weak with little effect on
the main radiation pattern)
18
PAGE 49
RF Link Basic Components

Parabolic Reflector Radiation (antenna)
Microwaves travel in straight lines - it can be focused and reflected just as
light rays.
rays
A feeder receives the microwaves from the WG and then transmits them
towards a parabolic dish (reflecting surface)
The wave-front reaches the reflecting surface of the antenna, and then it
leaves the antenna in parallel paths
Because of the special
shape
p
p of a parabolic
p
surface, all paths from source to the reflector and
back to end user are the same length
19
Link Calculation Basic Example

Link Calculation
+Gant1
+Gant2
+Lfsf
TX
IDU
TX Losses
RX Losses
IDU
RSL ReceivedSignalLevel
TSL TransmittedSignalLevel
Lfs Freespaceloss=92.45+20logx(distanceinkmxfrequencyinGHz)
RSL=TX TX+Gain
L+Gain RX
Losses
Ant. 1
Ant. 2
fs
Losses
10
PAGE 50
RSL
Digital Modulation
Modulation
Modulation is used to transfer a message (voice, image, data, etc.) on to a
carrier wave for transmission
transmission.
A low frequency that comprises the message (baseband) is translated to a
higher range of frequencies
Modulation allows higher data rate transmissions
The process of modulation is reversible.
A device that performs modulation is known as a modulator and a device that
performs the inverse operation of modulation is known as a demodulator
Digital Modulation
Modulation
Low fq. Signal (up) +

high fq. Carrier (down)
11
PAGE 51
QPSK Modulation
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying is a phase modulation algorithm

The phase of the carrier wave is modulated to encode bits of digital
information in each phase change
Because QPSK has 4 possible states, QPSK is able to encode two bits per
symbol
QPSK is more tolerant of link degradation than 8PSK, but does not provide as
much data capacity
45degrees
Binary00
135degrees
Binary01
225degrees
Binary11
315degrees
Binary10
23
QAM Modulation
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation employs both phase modulation (PM) and

p
modulation ((AM))
amplitude
The input stream is divided into groups of bits based on the number of
modulation states used.
In 8QAM, each three bits of input, which provides eight values (0-7) alters
the phase and amplitude of the carrier to derive eight unique modulation states
In 64QAM, each six bits generates 64 modulation states; in 128QAM, each
bi generate 128 states, and
d so on
seven bits
24
12
PAGE 52
QPSK VS. QAM Modulation
The various flavors of QAM offer higher data rates then 8 PSK
ThevariousflavorsofQAMofferhigherdataratesthen8PSK
ThisisbecauseQAMachievesagreaterdistancebetweenadjacentpointsintheIQ
planebydistributingthepointsmoreevenly
Thepointsontheconstellationaremoredistinctanddataerrorsarereduced
Higherorder>>morebitspersymbol
Constellationpointsarecloser>>TXismoresusceptibletonoise
25
SNR and RSL Constellation

The higher the SNR, the better the received signal !
26
13
PAGE 53
4QAM VS. QPSK
The symbols are determined by modulating

the Phase, and Amplitude of the carrier
signal.
27
The symbols are determined by modulating

the Phase of the carrier signal.
8QAM
Diagram for 8QAM: 3bit represent 8 different states
28
28
Bitsequence
Amplitude
Phase(degrees)
000
1/2
0(0 )
000
0(0 )
010
1/2
pi/2(90 )
011
pi/2(90 )
100
1/2
pi(180 )
101
pi(180 )
110
1/2
3pi/2(270 )
111
3pi/2(270 )
14
PAGE 54
16QAM
Constellation diagram for 16QAM:
4bit represent 16 different states
29
29
128QAM Modulation
Constellation diagram for 128QAM:

7bit represent
128 different states
p
Higher QAM order results in a higher
data rate
This is why we modulate
30
15
PAGE 55
256QAM Modulation
Constellation of 256QAM with noise added
Constellation of 256QAM
31
ThankYou!
training@ceragon com
16
PAGE 56
Mean Square Error
Agenda
Definition
E
Example
l
MSE & ACM
MSE values at 56MHz (case study)
MSE values at 28MHz (case study)
Troubleshooting examples
2
PAGE 57
Introduction
Definition | Example
3
MSE - Definition
MSE is used to quantify the difference between an estimated (expected)

value and the true value of the quantity being estimated
MSE measures the average of the squared errors:
MSE is a sort of aggregated error by which the expected value differs
from the quantity to be estimated.
The difference occurs because of randomness or because the receiver
does not account for information that could produce a more accurate
estimated RSL
4
PAGE 58
To simplify.
Imagine a production line where a machine needs to insert one part

into the other
Both devices must perfectly match
Let us assume the width has to be 10mm wide
We took a few of parts and measured them to see how many can
fit in.
5
The Errors Histogram

(Gaussian probability distribution function)
9
Quantity
Expected value
3
3
width
6mm 7mm 10mm 12mm
16mm
To evaluate how accurate our machine is, we need to know how many parts differ
from the expected value
9 parts were perfectly OK
6
PAGE 59
The difference from Expected value

Quantity
Error = 0 mm
Error = + 2 mm
Error = - 3 mm
Error = + 6 mm
Error = - 4 mm
width
6mm 7mm
10mm 12mm
16mm
To evaluate the inaccuracy (how sever the situation is) we measure how much the
errors differ from expected value
7
Giving bigger differences more weight than

smaller differences
Quantity
Error = 0 mm
+ 2 mm = 4
-3 mm = 9
- 4 mm = 16
+ 6 mm = 36
width
6mm 7mm 10mm 12mm
16mm
We convert all errors to absolute values and then we square them

The squared values give bigger differences more weight than smaller differences,
resulting in a more powerful statistics tool:
16cm parts are 36 units away than 2cm parts which are only 4 units away
8
PAGE 60
Calculating MSE
Error = 0 mm
Quantity
+ 2 mm = 4
-3 mm = 9
- 4 mm = 16
+ 6 mm = 36
width
To evaluate the total errors, we sum all the squared errors and take the average:
16 + 9 + 0 + 4 + 36 = 65, Average (MSE) = 13
The bigger the errors (differences) >> the bigger MSE becomes
9
Calculating MSE
MSE determines how narrow / wide the Bell is
Quantity
width
10mm
When MSE is very small the Bell shaped histogram is closer to perfect
condition (straight line): errors = ~ 0
10
PAGE 61
MSE in digital modulation (Radios)

Let us use QPSK (4QAM) as an
example:
QPSK = 2 bits per symbol
01
00
2 possible states for I signal
2 possible states for Q signal
11
= 4 possible states for the

combined signal
The graph shows the expected

values (constellation) of the
received signal (RSL)
10
11

The black dots represent the
expected values (constellation)
of the received signal (RSL)
Q
01
00
The blue dots represent the
actual RSL
11
10
Similarly to the previous

example we can say that the
example,
bigger the errors are the
harder it becomes for the
receiver to detect & recover the
transmitted signal
12
PAGE 62
Q
01
00
MSE would be the average

errors of e1 + e2 + e3 + e4.
e1
e2
I
4
e4
When MSE is very small the

actual signal is very close to
the expected signal
e3
11
10
13
Q
01
00
When MSE is too big, the

actual signal (amplitude &
phase) is too far from the
expected signal
e1
e2
I
4
e4
11
e3
10
14
PAGE 63
Using MSE
Commissioning | Troubleshooting
15
Commissioning with MSE in EMS
When you commission your

radio link
link, make sure your MSE
is small (-37dB)
Actual values may be read

-34dB to -35dB
Bigger values (-18dB) will

result in loss of signal
16
PAGE 64
MSE and ACM

When the errors become too big,
we need a stronger error correction
(
)
mechanism (FEC)
Therefore, we reduce the number
of bits per symbol allocated for data
and re-assign the extra bits for
correction instead
For example
h greatt capacity
it but
b t
256QAM has
poor immune to noise
64QAM has less capacity but much
better immune for noise
ACM Adaptive Code Modulation
17
Triggering ACM with MSE

When ACM is enabled, MSE values are analyzed on each side of the link
When MSE degrades or improves, the system applies the required
modulation per radio to maintain service
ACM 28MHz, MSE [-dB]:

Profile
Mod
QPSK
8PSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
256QAM
Downgrade ACM Profile

10-6 Threshold when MSE reaches
6.9
11
13 3
13.3
18
20
24.4
25
28
10.4
14.5
16 8
16.8
21.5
23.5
27.9
28.5
31.5
18
PAGE 65
Upgrade ACM Profile

when MSE reaches
11.9
16
18 3
18.3
23
25
29.4
30
33
Optimal
>30
>30
>30
>30
>30
>33
>35
>35

When ACM is enabled, MSE values are analyzed on each side of the link
When MSE degrades or improves, the system applies the required
modulation per radio to maintain service
ACM 56MHz, MSE [-dB]:

Profile
Mod
QPSK
8PSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
256QAM

10-6 Threshold when MSE reaches
6.7
12
13 1
13.1
17.3
19.6
22.6
25
27.5
Upgrade ACM Profile

when MSE reaches
10.2
15.5
16 6
16.6
20.8
23.1
26.1
28.5
31
11.7
17
18 1
18.1
22.3
24.6
27.6
30
32.5
Optimal
>30
>30
>30
>30
>30
>33
>35
>35
19

Lets analyze the figures in the table below (we shall focus on the last line):
1.
2.
3
3.
4.
When the radio is in optimal conditions, MSE is near -35dB

When MSE drops below -27.5dB, we will experience high BER
To avoid High BER we change the profile when MSE reaches -31dB
Now that the radio is @ profile 6, the MSE must improve to -32.5 to recover
high capacity (profile 7)
Profile

Modulation 10-6 Threshold when MSE reaches
QPSK
8PSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
256QAM
6.7
12
13.1
17.3
19.6
22.6
25
27.5
Upgrade ACM Profile

when MSE reaches
10.2
15.5
16.6
20.8
23.1
26.1
28.5
31
5 dB security window
20
10
PAGE 66
11.7
17
18.1
22.3
24.6
27.6
30
32.5
Optimal
>30
>30
>30
>30
>30
>33
>35
>35
ACM & MSE: Another approach

In this graph we refer to a 56MHz channel. It is easier to observe the
hysteresis of changing the ACM profile with respect to measured MSE.
As you can see,
see the radio remains @ profile 6 till MSE improves to -32.5dB:
32 5dB:
ACM
Profile
32.5
30
Profile7
Profile6
Profile5
Profile4Profile3Profile2Profile1Profile0
MSE
3128.526.123.120.816.6 15.510.2
21
ACM & MSE: Another approach

When RF signal degrades and MSE passes the upgrade point (MSE @ red point), ACM will
switch back FASTER to a higher profile (closer to an upgrade point) when MSE improves.
When RF signal degrades and MSE does not pass the upgrade point (green point) ACM
waits
it till MSE improves
i
to
t the
th point
i t off nextt available
il bl upgrade
d point
i t (takes
(t k longer
l
time
ti
to
t
switch back to the higher profile).
ACM
Profile
32.5
Profile7
30
Profile6
Profile5
3128.526.1
22
11
PAGE 67
MSE
Troubleshooting wrong modulation

When different settings of Modulation are set, MSE will be showing 99.99dB (Modulation Mismatch):
RSL = ~ (-45) dBm

MSE = -99.99 dB
RSL = ~ (-45) dBm

MSE = -99.99 dB
23
ThankYou!
t i i @
24
12
PAGE 68
9/13/2010
ACM - Adaptive Code Modulation
FibeAir IP-10s Key Feature

IP-10 utilizes a unique Adaptive Coding & Modulation (ACM)
odu at o range:
a ge Q
QPSK
S - 256QAM
56Q
Modulation
Modulation changes to maintain link when radio signal degrades

Mechanism automatically recovers to max. configured modulation when
received signal improves
Optimized for mobile backhaul all-IP and TDM-to-IP migration

2
PAGE 69
9/13/2010
Adaptive Coding and Modulation

Utilize highest possible modulation considering the changing environmental
conditions
Hitless & errorless switchover between modulation schemes

Maximize spectrum usage - Increased capacity over given bandwidth
Service differentiation with improved SLA
Increased capacity and availability
Adaptive Coding and Modulation
Voice & real time

services
Non-real time
services
Weak
FEC
Strong
FEC
When we engineer our services, we may assign certain services to

highest priority
PAGE 70
9/13/2010
ACM & SLA

When ACM is enabled and link degrades, highest priority services are
maintained
200Mbps
256QAM
Premium
112Mbps
32QAM
Silvver
128QAM
BestEffort
170Mbps
The above diagram shows an example when 28MHz is used

5
IP-10 Enhanced ACM Support

8 modulation/coding working points (~3db system gain for each point
change)
Hit-less and Error-less modulation/coding changes based on signal

quality
li
Throughput per radio carrier:

10 to 50 Mbps @ 7MHz Channel
25 to 100 Mbps @ 14MHz Channel
45 to 220 Mbps @ 28 MHz Channel
90 to 500 Mbps
p @ 56 MHz Channel
MSE is analyzed to trigger

ACM modulation changes
Zero downtime - A must for mission-critical services
6
PAGE 71
9/13/2010
IP-10 Enhanced radio capacity for Ethernet traffic

Intelligent Ethernet header compression mechanism (patent pending)
Improved effective Ethernet throughput by up to 45%
No affect on user traffic
Ethernet
packet size (bytes)
Capacity increase by
compression
64
45%
96
29%
128
22%
256
11%
512
5%
IP-10 Native2 radio dynamic capacity allocation

Example: 28MHz channel bandwidth
Example
Modulation
32QAM
128QAM
256QAM
All Ethernet
112Mbps
170Mbps
200Mbps
20 E1s + Ethernet
20 E1s + 66Mbps
20 E1s + 123Mbps 20 E1s + 154Mbps
44 E1s + Ethernet
44 E1s + 10Mbps
44 E1s + 67Mbps
44 E1s + 98Mbps
66 E1s + Ethernet
66 E1s + 15Mbps
66 E1s + 47Mbps
75 E1s + Ethernet
Example
traffic mix
75 E1s + 25Mbps
PAGE 72
9/13/2010
Adaptive Coding & Modulation (ACM)

Its all about handling data...
Current Microwave systems are designed with

Availability Equal for all Services
nXT1/E1
?
99.99 %
Less availability can be accepted for many data services

Need for Services Classification :
Microwave systems shall treat services in different ways
9
Fewer Hops
1.28km fix rate

200Mbps at 99
99.999%
999%
2.5km adaptive rate

200Mbps at 99.99% and 40Mbps at 99.999%
1km
2km
3km
Assuming: 18GHz link, 28MHz channel, 1 ft antenna, Rain zone K (42mm/hr)
Optional solution for several planning constrains

Example - Reducing Hops count until reaching fiber site
10
PAGE 73
9/13/2010
Decreased tower loads: Wind, Space, Weight

4.5km/2.8 miles path, 56MHz channel, 400Mbps, 256QAM, 99.999% availability
Without Adaptive Modulation: requires 4 ft antennas

Modulation
Throughput (Mbps)
Availability (%)
Unavailability of
modulation
Outage 5 minutes and 15 seconds

256QAM (2)
400
99.999
4min, 28sec
With Adaptive Modulation: requires 1 ft antennas

Modulation
Throughput (Mbps)
Availability (%)
Unavailability of
modulation
Outage 5 minutes and 15 seconds

5min,, 3sec
QPSK
80
99.999
8PSK
120
99.998
9min, 3sec
16QAM
160
99.997
11min, 4sec
32QAM
210
99.996
16min, 42sec
64QAM
260
99.995
24min, 35sec
37min, 35sec
128QAM
320
99.992
256QAM (1)
360
99.989
55min, 33sec
256QAM (2)
400
99.985
1hr,18min, 13sec
Assumed rain zone K, 23 [GHz] band

Source: Ceragon Networks
ACM Benefit in TDM to IP migration scenario

SMOOTH Migration
12
Typical 4E1 radio

QPSK
7MHz channel
99.999% availability
4xE1
7MHz channel
Upgrade to 4E1 + 40Mbps Ethernet

5 TIMES THE CAPACITY
SAME ANTENNAS
Same 7MHz channel
QPSK 256QAM with ACM
99.999% availability for the E1s
Low cost, scalable, pay as you grow
4xE1 + 40Mbps
Ethernet
7MHz channel
PAGE 74
9/13/2010
Traffic Prioritization
When ACM is enabled and link degrades, highest priority services are
maintained while low services are dropped
When link capacity is recovered, low services are recovered as well
QoS is applied first to drop ETH low services
(e.g. Customer is advised to assign configure QoS to maintain In-Band
Management when link capacity degrades)
E1/T1 traffic has higher priority over Ethernet traffic
Each E1/T1 can be configured as High/Low priority
TDM Low priority is dropped first
TDM High priority is dropped according to order of configuration
13
ACM Working Boundaries

Link capacity is determined according to License and applied script
ACM Script consists of Channel BW, max. Capacity and Modulation
Highest modem script is applied using MRMC configuration window
When Automatic State Propagation is enabled, GbE (SFP) port can be
configured to shutdown when ACM is below a pre-defined script
14
PAGE 75
9/13/2010
Radio Capacity Calculation
Radio & PDH Capacity VS. Channel

Ethernet capacity (a.k.a. Ethernet L1 capacity) - Total bit rate from an
Ethernet user port. Taking into account the full Ethernet frame including the
IFG and
d preamble
bl fifields.
ld Eth
Ethernett capacity
it iis sometimes
ti
referred
f
d tto as ""portt
utilization rate".
Ethernet L2 capacity - Total bit rate of net Ethernet frames running over
the Ethernet user port. Taking into account the Ethernet frame without the
IFG and preamble fields.
Radio throughput
g p - Total bit rate supported
pp
by
y the radio link running
g in a
specific channel/modulation including radio frame overhead, etc.
16
PAGE 76
9/13/2010

(figures refer to ETSI + MAC Header Compression Enabled)
3.5 MHz
P fil
Profile
M d l ti
Modulation
Mi i
Minimum
M # off Ethernet
Max
Eth
t capacity
it
Eth
Ethernet
t L2
required capacity supported
(Mbps)
capacity (Mbps)
license
E1s
10
4
13.60
10.36
25
6
20.14
15.35
Frames per
F
seconds
2
4
16 QAM
64 QAM
Minimum
Max # of Ethernet capacity Ethernet L2
(Mbps)
capacity (Mbps)
license
E1s
13 42
10 23
QPSK
10
4
13.42
10.23
8 PSK
25
6
20.18
15.38
16 QAM
25
8
27.87
21.24
32 QAM
25
10
34.48
26.27
64 QAM
25
12
40.44
30.81
128 QAM
50
13
46.60
35.50
256 QAM
50
16
54.53
41.55
256 QAM
50
17
57.38
43.72
Frames per
seconds
20233.77
29974.03
R di
Radio
Throughput
(Mbps)
10.50
15.00
7 MHz
Profile
Modulation
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
19976 45
19976.45
30034.94
41475.26
51304.87
60175.21
69339.64
81151.77
85389.21
Radio
Throughput
(Mbps)
10 38
10.38
15.03
20.31
24.85
28.95
33.19
38.64
40.60
17

14 MHz
Profile
Modulation
Minimum
Number of Ethernet capacity
Ethernet L2
required capacity support E1s
(Mbps)
capacity (Mbps)
license
25
8
28.90
22.02
25
12
40.90
31.16
50
18
60.36
45.99
50
20
70.35
53.60
50
24
81.78
62.31
100
29
98.43
74.99
100
34
115.15
87.73
100
37
124.52
94.87
Frames per
seconds
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
QPSK
8 PSK
16 QAM
32 QAM
64 QAM
128 QAM
256 QAM
256 QAM
Modulation Minimum required Number of Ethernet capacity

Ethernet L2
capacity
it lilicense supportt E1s
E1
(Mb )
(Mbps)
capacity
it (Mb
(Mbps))
Frames per
seconds
d
43001.18
60857.98
89823.89
104693.80
121693.09
146471.17
171347.98
185297.74
Radio
Throughput
(Mbps)
21.02
29.27
42.65
49.52
57.37
68.82
80.31
86.76
28 MHz
Profile
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
18
QPSK
8 PSK
16 QAM
32 QAM
64 QAM
128 QAM
256 QAM
256 QAM
50
50
100
100
150
150
200
200
17
23
33
44
55
68
76
80
57.86
77.86
111.32
150.76
187.55
228.81
254.71
268.45
44.08
59.32
84.81
114.87
142.90
174.33
194.07
204.53
86099.43
115860.75
165648.63
224346.79
279093.55
340488.46
379034.79
399476.94
Radio
Throughput
Th
h t
(Mbps)
40.93
54.68
77.68
104.80
130.09
158.46
176.27
185.71
PAGE 77
9/13/2010

40 MHz
Profile
Modulation
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
QPSK
8 PSK
16 QAM
32 QAM
64 QAM
128 QAM
256 QAM
256 QAM
Minimum
Number of Ethernet capacity Ethernet L2
(Mbps)
capacity (Mbps)
license
50
23
79 64
79.64
60 68
60.68
100
35
119.11
90.75
100
51
174.14
132.68
150
65
218.49
166.47
150
81
273.67
208.51
200
84
305.49
232.76
200
84
346.84
264.26
300
84
369.96
281.87
Frames per
seconds
Minimum
i d capacity
it supportt E1s
E1
(Mb )
it (Mb
required
(Mbps)
capacity
(Mbps))
license
100
32
108.86
82.94
100
48
163.37
124.48
150
64
216.60
165.03
200
84
288.50
219.81
300
84
358.49
273.14
300
84
430.43
327.95
400
84
489.77
373.16
400
84
531.82
405.20
Frames per
d
seconds
Radio
Throughput
(Mbps)
55 90
55.90
83.04
120.87
151.36
189.30
211.18
239.61
255.50
118506 13
118506.13
177239.65
259136.72
325132.27
407254.05
454605.63
516135.41
550529.12
56 MHz
Profile
Modulation
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
QPSK
8 PSK
16 QAM
32 QAM
64 QAM
128 QAM
256 QAM
256 QAM
19
Radio
Th
h t
Throughput
(Mbps)
75.99
113.47
150.06
199.50
247.62
297.08
337.87
366.78
161994.37
243116.10
322318.52
429314.58
533473.73
640527.34
728824.51
791403.86
Radio & PDH Capacity VS. Channel - FCC

10MHz
ACM
Point
Modulation
# of
E1s
Ethernet
Capacity
(Mbps)
ACM
Point
Modulation
# of
E1s
Ethernet
Capacity
(Mbps)
QPSK
13 18
QPSK
16
28 - 40
8 PSK
10
19 27
8 PSK
22
39 - 56
57 - 81
16 QAM
16
28 40
16 QAM
32
32 QAM
18
32 46
32 QAM
38
67 - 96
64 QAM
24
42 61
64 QAM
52
93 - 133
128 QAM
28
50 71
128 QAM
58
102 - 146
256 QAM
30
54 78
256 QAM
67
118 - 169
256 QAM
33
60 85
256 QAM
73
129 - 185
30MHz
ACM
Point
20MHz
40MHz
Modulation
# of
E1s
Ethernet
Capacity
(Mbps)
ACM
Point
50MHz
Modulatio
n
# of
E1s
Ethernet
Capacity
(Mbps)
ACM
Point
Modulation
# of
E1s
Ethernet
Capacity
(Mbps)
QPSK
Q
22
39 - 55
QPSK
31
56 - 80
QPSK
37
3
65 - 93
8 PSK
35
62 - 89
8 PSK
46
82 - 117
8 PSK
59
105 - 150
16 QAM
52
93 - 133
16 QAM
69
122 - 174
16 QAM
74
131 - 188
32 QAM
68
120 - 171
32 QAM
84
153 - 219
32 QAM
84
167 - 239
64 QAM
80
142 - 202
64 QAM
84
188 - 269
64 QAM
84
221 - 315
128 QAM
84
164 - 235
128 QAM
84
214 - 305
128 QAM
84
264 - 377
256 QAM
84
185 - 264
256 QAM
84
239 - 342
256 QAM
84
313 - 448
256 QAM
84
204 - 292
256 QAM
84
262 - 374
256 QAM
84
337 - 482
Ethernet capacity depends on average packet size

20
PAGE 78
10
9/13/2010
ThankYou!
training@ceragon
com
21
PAGE 79
11
Introductionto802.1P/Q
Prerequisites
Prior to taking this module, trainee should be familiar with the

following:
Ethernet Topologies
OSI 7 Layers model
PAGE 80
Agenda
Agenda
What is VLAN?
Advantages for using VLAN
Regular Ethernet frame
Tagged frame structure
Types of VLAN
Types of connections
802.1P implementations
What is VLAN?
A Layer 2 Protocol which enables enhanced

traffic maneuvers :
Prioritization
Filtering
Provisioning
Mapping (e.g. - ATM to/from ETH)
PAGE 81
What is VLAN?
Regular ETH networks forward broadcast frames to all endpoints
What is VLAN?
VLAN networks forward broadcast frames only to pre-defined ports
(Profile Membership)
VLAN 1
Switch ports
VLAN 547
PAGE 82
Advantages of VLAN
Breaking large networks into smaller parts (Formation of virtual workgroups)

Simplified Administration (no need for re-cabling when user moves)
Improving Broadcast & Multicast traffic utilization
Mapping expensive backbones (ATM) to simpler & cheaper ETH backbones
Security establishing tunnels / trunks through the network for dedicated
users ((traffic
ff between VLANs is restricted).
)
Before we start explaining bit by bit, what is VLAN

and how does it work, let us review first the
structure of a regular ETH frame
PAGE 83
Untagged Ethernet Frame
FCS is created by the sender and recalculated by the receiver
Preamble+SFD
DA
8 Bytes
SA
6 Bytes
Length/Type
6 Bytes
2 Bytes
DATA+PAD
FCS
46 - 1500 Bytes
4 Bytes
(32-bit
CRC)
Minimum 64 Bytes < FRAME SIZE < Maximum 1518 Bytes
Length / Type < 1500 - Parameter indicates number of Data Bytes

Length / Type > 1536 - Parameter indicates Protocol Type (PPPoE, PPPoA, ARP etc.)
Tagged Ethernet Frame

Additional information is inserted
Frame size increases to 1522 Bytes
4 Bytes
Preamble+SFD
DA
SA
VLANTAG
TPID=0x8100
Length/Type
TCI
PTAG
TPID = Tag protocol ID
TCI = Tag Control Information
CFI = 1 bit canonical Format Indicator
10
DATA+PAD
3 Bit
CFI
1 Bit
PAGE 84
VLANID
12 Bit
FCS
Tagging a Frame
VLAN ID uses 12 bits, therefore the number of maximum VLANs is 4096:

2^12 = 4096
VID 0 = reserved
VID 4090-4096 = reserved (dedicated for IP-10s internal purposes such as MNG etc.)
VID 1 = default
After tagging a frame, FCS is recalculated

CFI is set to 0 for ETH frames, 1 for Token Ring to allow TR frames over
ETH backbones (some vendors may use CFI for internal purposes)
11
TPID / ETHER-Type / Protocol Type

TPID in tagged frames in always set to
0x8100
p
that yyou understand the
It is important
meaning and usage of this parameter
Later when we discuss QoS, we shall

demonstrate how & why the system
audits this parameter
12
Protocoltype
Value
TaggedFrame
0x8100
ARP
0x0806
Q i Q (CISCO)
QinQ(CISCO)
0 8100
0x8100
QinQ(othervendors)
0x88A8
QinQ(othervendors)
0x9100
QinQ(othervendors)
0x9200
RARP
0x8035
IP
0x0800
IPv6
0x86DD
PPPoE
0x8863/0x8864
MPLS
0x8847/0x8848
ISIS
0x8000
LACP
0x8809
802.1x
0x888E
PAGE 85
VLAN Membership: By Port

Every switch port is associated with specific VLAN membership
PRO easy configured
CON no user mobility
13
8
VLAN 100
VLAN 1
VLAN 9
VLAN 333
VLAN 22
VLAN 5
For example ports 1,2 & # can see each other but cannot PING
other ports (different VLAN membership)
VLAN Membership: By MAC

PRO user mobility, no
reconfiguration when PC
moves
CON needs to be assigned
initially, not an easy task
with thousands of
endpoints
00:20:8f:40:15:31
00:20:8f:40:15:ef
00:20:8f:40:15:30
VLAN 44
00:33:ef:38:01:23
00:33:ef:38:01:a0
00:33:ef:38:01:25
VLAN 5
14
PAGE 86
VLAN Membership: By Subnet (L3 VLAN)

Membership is based on the Layer 3 header
No process of IP address is done
Main disadvantage longer overall throughput
10.10.10.12
10.10.10.122
10.10.10.13
VLAN 44
11.1.1.10.12
11.1.1.10
11.1.1.10.23
VLAN 5
15
Port Types
Access Port a port which is not aware of VLANs
(Cannot tag outgoing frames or un-tag incoming frames)
A
Device unaware of VLANs
transmits untagged
(regular) ETH frames
16
VLANawareSwitch
Switch tags the ingress

frames with VID according
to specific Tagging
mechanism
PAGE 87
Port Types
Trunk Port a port which is aware of VLANs
(Can tag or un-tag incoming frames)
A
Device unaware of VLANs
transmits untagged
(regular) ETH frames
VLANawareSwitch
Switch tags the ingress frames with VID according to

specific Tagging mechanism
Switch un-tags frames with VID received from network
and delivers untagged frames to Access ports
17
Port Types
Trunk Port can carry tagged frames with different VIDs.
This requires Port Membership configuration.
VLANawareSwitch
T
A
ThisportisnotamemberoftheTrunk
portmembershiplist,hence,trafficis
discarded
18
PAGE 88
Q-in-Q
Additional VLAN (S-VLAN) is inserted
Frame size increases to 1526 Bytes
Preamble+SFD
DA
TPID 0 88A8
TPID=0x88A8
PTAG
3 Bit
SA
4 Bytes
4 Bytes
S VLAN
C VLAN
TCI
Length/Type
TPID 0 8100
TPID=0x8100
CFI VLANID
1 Bit
12 Bit
19
DATA+PAD
TCI
PTAG
CFI
VLANID
3 Bit
1 Bit
12 Bit
Port Types
Q-in-Q (A.K.A. Double TaggingVLAN Encapsulation)
+
VLAN
CN
awareSwitch
PN
E h
Enhanced
d security
it nott exposing
i original
i i l VID
Improved flexibility of VID in the network
(Ingress VID was already assigned in the network)
20
10
PAGE 89
FCS
Introduction to QoS / CoS
21
Mapping ATM QoS over ETH CoS (RFC 1483)

We can extend the benefits of ATM QoS into Ethernet LANs to guarantee Ethernet priorities
across the ATM backbone. A L2 switch or L3 router reads incoming 802.1p or IP ToS priority
bits, and classifies traffic accordingly.
To match the priority level with the appropriate ATM service class and other parameters, the
switch then consults a mapping table with pre-defined settings.
P-Tag 6
CBR
P-Tag 4
VBR
P-Tag 0
UBR
Hub
Site
GE
FE/GE
RNC
GE
n x T1/E1
Tail site
22
FibeAir
IP-10
IP-10
STM1/
OC3
ATM
Router
11
PAGE 90
MPLS
Router
Core
Site
BSC/MSC
Mapping ETH to MPLS and vice versa

IP-10s L2 switch can take part in the process of transporting
services through MPLS core
Frames/services are mapped to MPLS FECs according to:

VLAN ID mapped to MPLS EXP bits
VLAN P-Bit mapped to MPLS EXP bits
Hub
Site
GE
FE/GE
RNC
GE
n x T1/E1
Tail site
FibeAir
IP-10
STM1/
OC3
IP-10
STM1/
OC3
MPLS
Router
MPLS
Router
Core
Site
23
BSC/MSC
VLAN P-Bit Remap (Traffic Classes)

IEEE Recommendation
The following
Th
f ll i table
t bl shows
h
IEEE definition of traffic
classes
It shows the ingress options
for P-Tag VS. egress P-tag
The number of egress
priorities (classes) depend
on the number of assigned
queues
Ingress
PTags
NumberofAvailableTrafficClasses
1
0(default)
EgressPTag
24
12
PAGE 91
VLAN P-Bit Remap (Traffic Classes)

The default priority used for transmission by end stations is 0
With a single queue, there are no choices. All traffic is Best Effort
Multiple queues are needed to isolate Network Control from the user data traffic
25
Acronyms
26
ETH Ethernet
NIC Network Internet Card
VID Vlan
Vl ID
VLAN Virtual LAN
P-TAG Priority Tag, Priority Bits
CFI Canonical Format Indicator
TPID Tag Protocol Identifier
FCS Frame Check Sequence
DA Destination Address
SA Source Address
QoS Quality of Service
13
PAGE 92
Associated IEEE Standards
IEEE802.3:Ethernet(Max.framesize=1518bytes)
IEEE802.3ac:Ethernet(Max. frame size = 1522 bytes)
IEEE802.1d:MACBridgefirstintroducedtheconceptofFiltering
Servicesinabridgedlocalnetwork
IEEE802.1q:VLANTagging
IEEE802.1p:PriorityTagging/Mapping
IEEE802.1ag:OAM(CFM)
27
ThankYou!
28
14
PAGE 93
FibeAir IP-10 G-Series

Front Panel Description
Front Panel Overview
GUI Example)
Lets go over the front panel connections of the IP-10 G-Series

We shall explain them one by one, left to right
2
PAGE 94
CLI Serial Connection
DB9 Craft Line Interface (CLI)

Baud: 115200
Data bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop bits: 1
Flow Control: None
3
EOW Easy Comm. Via Radio
Engineering Order Wire

To communicate with your colleague on the
other side of the radio link, simply connect
here your headset
PAGE 95
External Alarms
DB9 Dry Contact External Alarms

The IP-10 supports 5 input alarms and a single output alarm
The input alarms are configurable according to:
1) Intermediate, 2) Critical, 3) Major, 4) Minor and 5) Warning
The output alarm is configured according to predefined categories

5
LED Indications
LINK:
GREEN radio link is operational

ORANGE - minor BER alarm on radio
RED Loss of signal, major BER alarm on radio
IDU:
GREEN IDU functions ok

ORANGE - fan failure
RED Alarm on IDU (all severities)
RFU:
GREEN RFU functions ok

ORANGE Loss of communication (IDU-RFU)
RED ODU Failure
PAGE 96
LED Indications
PROT:
Main unit GREEN (when there no alarms)

STBY unit: YELLOW (when there no alarms)
ORANGE Forced switch, Protection lock
RED physical errors (no cable, cable failure)
OFF Protection is disabled, or not supported on
device
RMT:
GREEN remote unit OK (no alarms)

ORANGE minor alarm on remote unit
RED major alarm on remote unit
User Channels (1)
Two software-selectable user channels (RJ-45):

A single synchronous channel OR two asynchronous channels
Each asynchronous channel will make use of its own RJ-45 external
interface
The synchronous channel mode will make use of both interfaces
(acting as a single interface)
8
PAGE 97
User Channels (2)
Modes of operation:
V.11 Asynchronous (9600bps)
RS-232 Asynchronous (9600bps)
V.11 Synchronous Co-Directional (64Kbps)
V.11 Synchronous Contra Directional (64Kbps)
9
User Channels (3)
Allowed configurations:
Two RS-232 Asynchronous UCs (default)
Two V.11 Asynchronous UCs
One RS-232 Asynchronous UC, and one V.11 Asynchronous UC
One V.11 Synchronous Co-Directional
One V.11 Synchronous Contra Directional UC
> All settings are copied to Mate when working in Protected mode
10
PAGE 98
Protection Port
Protection Port (only for standalone units)

Protect your Main unit with a STBY unit
Protection ports on both units deliver the proprietary protocol to
support automatic or manual switchover
The FE protection port is static (only used for protection, not traffic). Its switching is performed
electrically. If the unit is a stand-alone, an external connection is made through the front panel. If the
unit is connected to a backplane, the connection is through the backplane, while the front panel port
is unused.
11
T-Cards (Add-on Mezzanines)
Field upgradeable modules (T-Cards):

16 x E1 T-Card (32 total per unit)
DS1 T-Card
STM1/OC3 MUX T-Card
12
PAGE 99
T-Cards (Add-on Mezzanines)
An optional STM-1 interface card can be inserted in a dedicated slot in the

system; the card can transmit and receive up to 63 E1s in a channelized
STM-1 signal.
The supported mapping is VC4 only:
VC-12->TU-12->TUG-2->TUG-3->VC-4->AU-4->AUG
The STM-1 T-card is only supported in unprotected main units or in
unprotected stand-alone IDUs
13
GbE Ports
Two GbE ports, each port with 2 physical interfaces:

Port #1: optical (SFP transceiver) or electrical
Port #2: optical (SFP transceiver) or electrical
GbE ports support QoS as in IP-10 (scheduler, policers, shaper, classifiers)
Port #2
14
Port #1
PAGE 100
FE Ports
5 FE ports:
Port 3:
Port 4:
Port 5,6 &7:
Data
Data or WSC (2 Mbps Wayside Channel)
Data or local management
All ports support QoS as in IP-10 (scheduler, policers, shaper, classifiers)
15
Radio and misc.
The Radio port is the switchs 8th port (same as in IP-10)
In addition
Grounding
-48vdc Power Connector
Fan Drawer
16
PAGE 101
XC using a Shelf Configuration
XC operation is implemented using two-unit backplanes, which

provide the interconnectivity.
Up to three backplanes, consisting of six IDUs, can be stacked to
provide an expandable system
17
XC using a Shelf Configuration

All IDUs that operate within
the XC system have
identical hardware, and act
as stand-alone units.
The 2 lower units can be configured as Main units.

The role an IDU plays is determined during installation by its position in the
traffic interconnection topology
18
PAGE 102
Thank You !
10
PAGE 103

FibeAirIP10GSeries
Installation
General
If installation requires CFG file upload & download and / or SW file
upload & down -
1.
2.
3.
Make sure FTP Server is installed on your PC

FTP is configured (RD/WR permissions)
Latest SW version is available (FTP root directory)
FTPinstallationguide
isavailableat
Training.Ceragon.Com:
seeModules/
Installation
PAGE 104
Agenda
Site Requirements
Packing & Transportation
Unpacking
Required
q
Tools
IDU Dimensions
Installing standalone IDU in a 19 Rack
Installing Nodal Enclosures in a 19 Rack
Preparing the IDU for a Shelf installation
Installing the IDU in a Shelf
Installing a Blank Panel IDU in a Shelf
Installing a T-Card into an IDU
Grounding the IDU
Lightning Protection
Power General Requirements
Installing the IDU-ODU IF cable
Site Requirements
IDU must be located indoors
The environment temperature must be between -5 C and +45 C.
Easily accessible, but only by authorized personnel.
Available power source of -48 VDC, and the site must comply with
National Electric Code (NEC) standards.
Available management connection (Ethernet or dial-up).
IDU-ODU connection (IF cable): no more than 300m
PAGE 105
Site Requirements
Heat Dissipation:
The IP-10 IDU overall heat dissipation is 25W max (~85 BTU/h).
The ODU heat dissipation
p
is 100W max.
Antenna Location:
As with any type of construction, a local permit may be required before installing
an antenna. It is the owners responsibility to obtain any and all permits.
Packing & Transportation

The equipment is packed at the factory, and sealed moisture-absorbing bags
are inserted.
The equipment is prepared for public transportation. The cargo must be kept dry
during transportation.
Keep items in their original boxes till they reach their final destination.
If intermediate storage is required, the packed equipment must be stored in dry
and cool conditions and out of direct sunlight
When unpacking
Wh
ki
Check the packing lists, and ensure that the
correct part numbers and quantities of
components arrived.
PAGE 106
Unpacking
A single FibeAir system (1+0) is shipped in 5 crates.
Upon delivery, make sure that the following items are included:
Two indoor units and accessories
Two outdoor units
For 13-38 GHz systems, verify that there is a high RFU and low RFU.
One CD with a management user guide.
Unpack the contents and check for damaged or missing parts.

If any part is damaged or missing, contact your local distributor.
Required Tools
The following tools are required to install the IDU:
Philips screwdriver #2 (for mounting the IDU to the rack and grounding screw)
Flathead small screwdriver (for PSU connector)
Sharp cutting knife (for wire stripping)
Crimping tool for ground cable lug crimping
(optional: if alternative grounding cable is used)
Setting up Management will require ETH cable (for setting management)

Serial Cable (for setting management)
8
PAGE 107
Specifications
Connector spec, cable spec & interface pin layout can be found in our complete
PDF installation guide
installation guides available

at Training.Ceragon.Com:
see Modules
M d l / Installation
I t ll ti
IDU Dimensions
42.60mm
10
PAGE 108
Installing standalone IDU in a 19 Rack
As shown in the illustration, four screws, supplied with the

installation kit,
kit are used to secure the IDU to the rack
rack.
11
12
PAGE 109

Before you install the
enclosures
Plan carefully the required
space within the rack !
Should you need to install 3
enclosures prepare at least
10Us (6Us for enclosures + 2Us free
space for maneuvering above and below
shelves)
Main Enclosure
Start the installation process

from bottom to top, e.g. Main
enclosure should be installed
first at the bottom of your rack
space
13

Step #1:
Install the IP-10 Main enclosure
in the 19 inch rack using 4
screws.
14
PAGE 110

Step #1:
screws.
Step #2:
Slide down the 2nd extension
enclosure. Male connector
should plug in smoothly into the
Main enclosure.
15

Step #1:
screws.
Step #2:
should plug in smoothly into the
Main enclosure.
Step #3:
should be plugged in smoothly
into the Main enclosure.
16
PAGE 111

Step #4:
Secure the 2nd extension into
the Main enclosure. Use the
built-in screw.
Mount the 2nd extension into the
rack using the 4 screws
17

Step #4:
Secure the 2nd extension
into the Main enclosure.
Use the built-in screw.
Mount the 2nd extension
into the rack using the 4
screws
Step #5:
Add the 3rd extension
when needed
18
PAGE 112
Preparing the IDU for a Shelf installation

Remove the two 19" brackets mounted on the IP-10 IDU by unscrewing the 3
screws at each side.
19
Installing the IDU in a Shelf

Slide the IP-10 IDU into the enclosure and tighten it using 2 screws. Repeat
this step in accordance with the configuration.
IDU insertion & extraction

should NOT be under power
20
10
PAGE 113
Installing a Blank Panel IDU in a Shelf

Slide the IP-10 blank panel into the enclosure, and tighten it using 2 screws.
21

Remove the IP-10 T-Card blank panel from the IDU, by releasing the 2 side
screws.
22
11
PAGE 114

Insert the IP-10 T-Card panel and tighten it using the 2 side screws.
23
Grounding the IDU
Single Point Stud

Grounding Wire
24
12
PAGE 115
Grounding the IDU

The IDU is suitable for installation in a Common Bonding Network (CBN).
Only copper wire should be used.
The wire must be at least 14 AWG.
Connector and connection surfaces must be plated. Bare conductors must be
coated with antioxidant before crimp connections are made to the screws.
FibeAir provides a ground for each IDU, via a one-hole mounted lug onto a
single-point stud.
Th stud
t d mustt b
t ll d using
i a UL
li t d ring
i ttongue tterminal,
i l and
d ttwo star
t
The
be iinstalled
UL-listed
washers for anti-rotation.
25
Lightning Protection
For antenna ports, lightning protection is used
that does not permit transients of a greater
magnitude than the following:
Open Circuit: 1.2-50us 600V
Short Circuit: 8-20us 300A
The ampacity of the conductor connecting the
IDU frame to the DC return conductor is equal to
or greater than, the ampacity of the associated DC return conductor.
26
13
PAGE 116
Power General Requirements

1. A readily accessible Listed branch circuit over-current protective device,
rated 15 A, must be incorporated in the building wiring.
2. This equipment is designed to permit connection between the earthed
conductor of the DC supply circuit and the earthing conductor at the
equipment.
3. The equipment shall be connected to a properly grounded supply system
4. The DC supply system is to be local, i.e. within the same premises as the
equipment
5. A disconnect device is not allowed in the grounded circuit between the DC
supply source and the frame/grounded circuit connection.
27
Power Requirements
When selecting a power source, the following must be considered:
DC power can be from -40.5 VDC to -60 VDC.
Recommended: Availability of a UPS (Uninterrupted Power Source),
battery backup, and emergency power generator.
Whether or not the power source provides constant power (i.e., power is
secured on weekends or is shut off frequently and consistently).
The power supply must have grounding points on the AC and DC sides.
The
Th user power supply
l GND mustt be
b connected
t d to
t the
th positive
iti pole
l iin th
the IDU
power supply.
Any other connection may cause damage to the system!
28
14
PAGE 117
Power Requirements
Important
Make sure to use a circuit breaker to protect the circuit from damage by
short or overload.
29
Dual DC Feed
In boards with dual DC feed hardware, the system will indicate whether received
voltage in each connector is above or below the threshold power (40.5v
approximately).
This will
Thi
ill b
be shown
h
iin ttwo ways:
1. The LED (and its WEB representation) will only be ON if the voltage is above
the threshold
2. If voltage is below the threshold an alarm will be raised
User may configure the system not to raise an alarm in case of under-voltage
for any of the supplies.
This is used for cases where the dual feed hardware is used
used, but in the
installation only one of them is actually connected, so that no alarm is
permanently raised.
30
15
PAGE 118
Installing the IDU-ODU IF cable

Route the IF Coax Cable from the IDU to the ODU/RFU and terminate it
with N-type male connectors.
Note: Make sure you fasten the cable along the ladder!
Make sure that the inner pin of the connector does not exceed the
edge of the connector.
The cable should have a maximum attenuation of 30 dB at 350 MHz.
31
ThankYou!
16
PAGE 119
6/16/2010
RFUC&MediationDevices
The Most Comprehensive Portfolio

FibeAir Family
RFUs
6-38 GHz
Carrier Ethernet
IP-MAX2
IP-10
3200T
EMS & NMS

PolyView (NMS)
RFU-C
Multi-Service
RFU-HP
IP-10
IP-MAX2
640P
CeraView (EMS)
TDM
RFU-P, RFU-SP
1500R/1500P
3200T
2
PAGE 120
6/16/2010
IDU RFU Compatibility
IP-10
RFU-C
1500R
RFU-P, RFU-SP
RFU-HP
IP-IP-MAX2
RFU-SP
640P
1500P
3
IDU IDU Compatibility Across Link

1500R
1500R
IP-10
IP 10
IP-10
1500P
1500R
IP-MAX/IP-MAX2
IP-10
1500P chassis Cannot House 1500R IDC and IDMs

1500R chassis Cannot House 1500P IDC and IDMs
Must Match IDU Type Across a Link
4
PAGE 121
6/16/2010
RFU-C direct mount configurations
1+0 direct
5
RFU-C direct mount configurations

1+1 direct
6
PAGE 122
6/16/2010
RFU-C remote mount configurations
1+0 remote
7
RFU-C remote mount configurations

1+1 remote
8
PAGE 123
6/16/2010
RFU-C antenna adaptors
Adaptors for RFU-P direct antenna mount

Adaptors for NSN Flexi Hopper direct antenna mount
Adaptors for Ericsson R1A 23GHz direct antenna mount
Remote adaptors and configurations
9
RFU-C to NSN antenna
10
PAGE 124
6/16/2010
RFU-C to Ericsson antenna
(R1A 23GHz)
11
Antenna Alignment (1)
Connect Digital Volt Meter (DVM) to the AGC BNC connector

Align the antenna until
ntil voltage
oltage reading is achie
achieved
ed (1
(1.2
2 to 1.7Vdc)
1 7Vdc)
Repeat antenna alignment at each end until the minimum dc voltage is
achieved
1.30vdc = -30dBm
1.45vdc = -45dBm
1.60vdc = -60dBm
etc
12
PAGE 125
6/16/2010
Antenna Alignment (2)
Compare achieved RX level to

calculated RX level
Keep aligning until the achieved
level is up to 4 dB away from the
calculated received signal level
If voltage reading is more than 4
dB away or higher than 1.7vdc,
re-align antenna to remote site
13
g@ You
g !
Thank
ThankYou!
14
PAGE 126

FibeAirIP10GSeries
Setting Management
Agenda
Getting started
General notes
General commands
Command historyy
Reading current IP
Setting new IP
Connecting PC to IDU
Troubleshooting
Factory Defaults
2
PAGE 127
Getting started
Verify that physical installation is successfully completed:
IDU is properly mounted in a shelf / rack
Power + GND
IF Cable between IDU and ODU
Connect a PC to the Terminal connector and launch a serial application
Baud: 115200
YoumayuseanySerial
ApplicationsuchasHyper
Terminal PuTTY TeraTerm
Terminal,PuTTY,TeraTerm
etc
Data bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop
St bits:
bit 1
Flow Control: None
Log on using (admin/admin) for user name and password.

Now, you should be able to see the IP-10 CLI Prompt
3
General notes on CLI
IP-10:/>
Note that the
> sign indicates your current directory in the CLI tree
Most of the CLI commands are based on GET/SET concept

Some commands may require a different syntax
Ceragon strongly recommends to use CLI only for setting management IP
address when current IP is unknown
All functions & features can be configured faster and easier using the WEB
based EMS
4
PAGE 128
General Commands
IP-10:/ >?
IP-10:/ls
IP-10:/lsp
IP-10:// > exit
IP-10:/ > cd
IP-10:/ > cd ..
Type ? (question mark) to list helpful commands

Type ls to list your current directory
Type lsp to available commands of current directory
Type exit to terminate the session
Type cd to change directory
Type cd .. to return to root directory
5
Command History
Use the arrow keys to navigate through recent

commands
Use the TAB key to auto-complete a syntax
6
PAGE 129
Reading current IP
To read current IP type the following:
IP-10:/>cd management/networking/ip-address/
IP-10:/ management/networking/ip-address>
Note that the prompt has changed. Now, type get ip-address:
IP-10:/ management/networking/ip-address>get ip-address

completion the current IP will be displayed
Upon completion,
displayed, followed by the new
prompt:
IP-10:/ management/networking/ip-address>get ip-address

192.168.1.1
IP-10:/ management/networking/ip-address>
7
Setting new IP
Now, let us set a new IP for the MNG:
We assume the required IP is 192.168.1.144
Type set ip-address 192.168.1.144
IP-10:/ management/networking/ip-address>set ip-address 192.168.1.144
Upon completion, you will be prompt:
You may lose remote management connection to the unit if this value
is changed incorrectly.
Are you sure? (yes/no):
Type yes and connect the IDU to your network / PC
8
PAGE 130
Connecting IDU to EMS

1. Connect your EMS/NMS to the IDU (port 7) with ETH CAT.5 cable
2. Verify that your PCs IP is in the same subnet
3 Make sure Link is up
3.
4. PING the IDU
5. Launch a WEB browser with the URL set as the IDUs IP
9
Management Troubleshooting
In case PC cannot PING IDU
1. Check your ETH cable it might not be inserted properly (broken PIN)
2. Verify the management port is enabled in the EMS General/Management
configuration
3. Make sure you connect to a management-enabled port (7, 6 or 5)
4. Verify right LED is ON (see below)
5. Verify your PC is in the same subnet as the IDU
6. In case your IDU is connected to a router: set the IDUs Default GW = Router IP
7. In case your PC is connected to several IDUs (through switch/hub) make sure
every IDU has a unique IP
When ON (Green) = Port is set to Management
When OFF = Port is set to Data
10
PAGE 131
Back to factory defaults

Going back to factory defaults can be done with EMS or CLI
In case you need to set factory defaults with CLI type the following -
IP-10:/> cd management/mng-services/cfg-service
In the new directory type the following:
IP-10:/management/mng-services/cfg-service>set-to-default
11
ThankYou!
PAGE 132
10/5/2010

EMS Performance Monitoring
Agenda
EMS General Information
Faults:
Current Alarms
Event Log
PM & Counters:
Remote Monitoring
TDM Trails
TDM interfaces
Radio (RSL, TSL, MRMC and MSE)
Radio TDM
Radio ETH
XPI
PAGE 133
10/5/2010
EMS - General
Easy, user friendly GUI

No need to install an application WEB Based software
No need to upgrade your EMS application embedded in the IDU SW
No need for strong working station simple PC is sufficient
(For maintenance issues FTP Server is required)
Easy access simply type the IP address of the IDU on your web page
Supports all IDU versions and configurations
EMS Main View

Access application via IP address
User friendly navigation menu
PAGE 134
10/5/2010
EMS Main View

Graphical MENU: Click to configure
EMS Main View
Protection Status Display &

Quick Access Icons
PAGE 135
10/5/2010
EMS Main View

In this example slot #1 and slot #2 are configured to support 1+1 Protection
Slot #1 is selected and in Active mode.
Black Rectangular to indicate

selected slot for configuration
EMS Main View

When the user selects Slot 2 the GUI updates automatically
PAGE 136
10/5/2010
Faults - CAS
The CAS window shows collapsed list of alarms
By expanding a line we can see additional information:
Probable cause
Corrective Actions
Faults Event Log

The Event Log shows max. 200 lines of events
When Event #201 occurs, Event #1 is erased and #201
is logged as #200.
PAGE 137
10/5/2010
Available PM Statistics - Radio

TDM PM
(allocated E1/T1 VCs)
TDM
(E1/T1)
ETH PM (Data + In-Band):

1. Aggregated Errors
2. Throughput
3. Capacity
4. Radio Link Utilization
5. RMON standard is
implemented
as well to
p
provide detailed data
ETH BW is a function of
available radio capacity as TDM
and STM-1 have higher priority
11
STM1
STM-1 PM
When STM-1 T-Card
is inserted in front
panel)
p
)
Radio Signal PM:

1. RSL
2. MSE
3. MRMC (ACM)
4. Aggregate
Available PM Statistics Line Interfaces
STM-1 interface facing customer equipment

g customer equipment
q p
TDM interfaces facing
End-to-End Trails
12
PAGE 138
10/5/2010
Clearing previous data

To erase all IDU PM data, click the CLEAR button -
13
ETH PM RMON
The system supports Ethernet statistics counters (RMON) display (depends on
port availability). The counters are designed to support:
RFC 2819 RMON MIB.
RFC 2665 Ethernet-like MIB.
RFC 2233 MIB II.
RFC 1493 Bridge MIB.
14
PAGE 139
10/5/2010
ETH PM RMON
15
PM RMON Special Registers

RMONregister /Counter
Description
Undersizeframesreceived
Framesshorterthan64bytes
Oversize frames received

Oversizeframesreceived
Frames longer than 1632 bytes

Frameslongerthan1632bytes
Jabberframesreceived
Totalframesreceivedwithalengthofmorethan1632bytes,
butwithaninvalidFCS
Fragmentsframesreceived
Totalframesreceivedwithalengthoflessthan64
bytes,andaninvalidFCS
Rxerrorframesreceived
TotalframesreceivedwithPhyerror
FCSframesreceived
TotalframesreceivedwithCRCerror,notcounteredin
"Fragments",
Fragments ,"Jabber"
Jabber or
or "Rx
Rxerror
error"counters
counters
InDiscardFrames
Countsgoodframesthatcannotbeforwardeddueto
lackofbuffermemory
InFilteredFrames
Countsgoodframesthatwerefilteredduetoegress
switchVLANpolicyrules
Pauseframesreceived
Numberofflowcontrolpauseframesreceived
16
PAGE 140
10/5/2010
Troubleshooting with RMON: Filtering Example
Radio port is a
member of VID 100
Radio port is a
member of VID 100
Site A
Tagging
Untagged Frames
Tagged with default
VID 100
Site B
No membership
Access port with

default VID = 300
Site B Ingress port (Radio) receives the frame and checks the Egress port VID
membership
Egress port default VID is 300, therefore frame is filtered by the remote Radio port
17
Troubleshooting with RMON: Oversized frames

Site A
T
Site B
T
Tagged Frames with

frame size > 1632 bytes
When ingress frames exceed the maximum frame size, RMON counter Oversized frames
received is updated accordingly
18
PAGE 141
10/5/2010
Troubleshooting with RMON: Discarding Example

Site A
Site B
Ingress traffic does not

comply to Policer rules
Discarding Examples:
Ingress rate > Rate Limiter
Ingress frames do not qualify to Policer rules
19
Troubleshooting with RMON: Monitoring specific

traffic types
Site A
Site B
Rate Limiter
Monitor
Video streams are generally transmitted over UDP

with multicast addresses
To monitor traffic, check out the Multicast Frames
Received register
To limit MC traffic, assign a Policer with a UDP & MC
CIR rules
20
PAGE 142
10
10/5/2010
PM TDM Trails
Trails can only be configured in the Main

IDU/Slot #1
Extension Trails (trails via extension IDU)
are also configured in the Main IDU
TDM Trail PM can only be viewed in the
Main IDU menu
The number of trails that can be
configured is a function of available radio
BW (license + script)
21
PM TDM Trails
22
PAGE 143
11
10/5/2010
PM TDM Trails In Detail

Errored Second (ES):
A one-second period with one or more errored blocks or at least one defect
23

Severely Errored Second (SES):
A one-second period, which contains 30% errored blocks or at least one
defect.
defect
SES is a subset of ES.
24
PAGE 144
12
10/5/2010

A period of unavailable time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive Severely
Errored Second (SES) events. These 10 seconds are considered to be part of
unavailable time.
A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES
events. These 10 seconds are considered to be part of available time.
25

Background Block Error (BBE):
An errored block not occurring as part of a SES.
26
PAGE 145
13
10/5/2010

Number of Switches (only relevant for Protected SNCP Trails):
The number of times the IP-10 switched from Primary Path to Secondary Path
and vice versa (per 15min or 24hrs interval)

Active Path Seconds (only relevant for Protected SNCP Trails):
The number of times seconds the Active Path was available
PAGE 146
14
10/5/2010

Integrity:
Indicates whether information is reliable for analysis (ticked) or not
For example if clock was changed or system was restarted during this interval
then information is not reliable
29
PM TDM Trails through Radio
30
PAGE 147
15
10/5/2010
PM E1 / DS-1 (PM received from customer)

This PM data
relates to the
TDM Line
Interfaces.
Interfaces
31
PM STM-1 (Slot #2)
32
PAGE 148
16
10/5/2010
PM Radio - RF
Signal Level RSL & TSL analysis
Allows setting RSL & TSL thresholds
EMS will notify when signal exceeds THSLD
>> Easier maintenance
Aggregated radio traffic analysis

MRMC PM related to ACM:
Associated Script
Available Bit rate
Available Radio VCs
MSE analysis (quality of received signal)
XPI analysis (when XPIC enabled)
33
PM Radio Signal Level Using Threshold
- 40dBm = Nominal RSL for an operational Link

Level 1: 25 sec
Level 2: 15 sec
900 sec = 15min Interval
34
PAGE 149
17
10/5/2010
PM Radio Signal Level - Using Threshold

Using graphical display of the THSLD analysis allows us easier
examination of the RSL & TSL state throughout certain period of time
RSL
-40
-50
-68
T [sec]
-99
10
35
10
PM Radio - Aggregate
Aggregated radio
traffic analysis
36
PAGE 150
18
10/5/2010
PM Radio - MRMC
The information displayed in this page is derived from the license and script
assigned to the radio.
When ACM is enabled and active,
active as link quality degrades or improves
improves, the
information is updated accordingly.
37
PM Radio - MRMC
38
PAGE 151
19
10/5/2010
PM Radio - MSE
The information
displayed in this page
is derived from the
license and script
assigned to the radio.
When link quality
degrades or
improves, the MSE
reading is updated
accordingly.
Differences of 3dB
trigger
gg ACM
modulation changing.
Threshold can be
configured as well for
easier maintenance.
39
PM Radio - XPI
Use this report to evaluate the cross-polarization

interference
Apply a threshold to establish a better notification
40
PAGE 152
20
10/5/2010
PM Radio - Ethernet
Frame Error Rate (%) measured on radio-Ethernet
interface (port 8)
Ethernet Capacity (a.k.a. Ethernet L1 capacity) - Total
bit rate from an Ethernet user port. Taking into account
the full Ethernet frame including the IFG and preamble
fields. Ethernet capacity is sometimes referred to as
"port utilization rate".
Radio Throughput - Total bit rate supported by the
radio link running in a specific channel/modulation
including radio frame overhead, etc.
Utilization (%) is displayed as one of five bins:
0 20% 20-40%,
0-20%,
20 40% 40-60%,
40 60% 60-80%,
60 80% 80-100%
80 100%
Ethernet throughput & Capacity PMs are measured by
accumulating the number of Ethernet octets every
second
Accurate analysis requires accumulating a full interval
(15min/24hrs)
41
PM Ethernet Frame Error Rate
42
PAGE 153
21
10/5/2010
PM Ethernet Throughput
43
PM Ethernet Capacity
44
PAGE 154
22
10/5/2010
PM Ethernet Utilization
45
Throughput / Capacity / Utilization

To better understand these terms, we shall examine the Ethernet tagged frame full
structure:
A frame viewed on the actual physical wire would show Preamble and Start Frame
Delimiter,, in addition to the other data (required
( q
by
y the p
physical
y
hardware).
)
However, these bits are stripped away at OSI Layer 1 by the Ethernet adapter before
being passed on to the OSI Layer 2 which is where data is detected.
Pre.
7octets
SFD
1octet
DA
6octets
VLAN
ETH Type
/Length
Payload+
Padding
6octets 4octets
2octets
461500 4octets
octets
SA
CRC
Interframe
Gap
12octets
DataRate:min.64 octets max.1522octets

Physicalwirerate:min.84octets max.1542octets
46
PAGE 155
23
10/5/2010

Pre.
7octets
SFD
1octet
DA
6octets
VLAN
ETH Type
/Length
Payload+
Padding
6octets 4octets
2octets
461500 4octets
octets
SA
CRC
Interframe
Gap
12octets
DataRate:min.64 octets max.1522octets

Physicalwirerate:min.84octets max.1542octets
In case we use a 64 bytes frame:

Throughput (Data rate) = ~ 77% of physical transmitted rate
Stripped bits = ~ 23% of physical transmitted rate
(64/84=0.77)
(20/84=0.23)
Hence, when we transmit 100Mbps, the actual throughput would be 77 Mbps

47

Throughput = 77 Mbps
Radio Capacity =
(license) = 400Mbps
Transmitted rate =
100 Mbps
Capacity = Received frame rate

= 100 Mbps
Utilization = Throughput = 77 = 20 %
Radio Capacity 400
48
PAGE 156
24
10/5/2010
ThankYou!
training@ceragon
com
PAGE 157
25
10/5/2010

EMS General Configuration
Agenda
In this module we shall explain the following

features as they appear on the EMS
navigation Menu
PAGE 158
10/5/2010
Menus
Menu of a Main unit
Menu of an Extension
Unit Parameters Step # 1
Configure specific
information that may
assist you later
Such info will help you
locate your site easier
and faster
4
PAGE 159
10/5/2010
VDC reading
Celsius (metric) or
Fahrenheit (Imperial)
6
PAGE 160
10/5/2010

By default the time &
date are derived from
the operating system
clock
User may set new
values
These settings are also
used for NTP
connection (later
explained)

IDU Serial number is
important when you
submit your request
for a License upgrade
When you complete
configuring all
settings, click Apply.
PAGE 161
10/5/2010
External Alarms Collapsed Input Alarm Config.
Dry Contact Alarms (DB-9):

5 Inputs
1 Output
9
External Alarms Expended Input Alarm Config.
10
PAGE 162
10/5/2010
External Alarms Configuring the Output Alarm

Group of alarms will trigger the external alarm Output.
Communication Alarms related to traffic: Radio / Ethernet line / TDM line
Q lit off Service
Quality
S i We
W do
d nott h
have specific
ifi alarms
l
off QoS
Q S
Processing Alarms related to SW: Configuration / Resets / corrupted files
Equipment Alarms related to: HW / FAN / RFU mute / Power Supply / Inventory.
Environmental Alarms of extreme temperature.
All Groups.
Test mode manual switch.
11
Management Menu of Extension Slots
This is the switch MAC address
Here you can set/review the IP

address of the remote site
You can also access the EMS of the
remote site (assuming both IDUs are
configured identically in terms of
MNG)
12
PAGE 163
10/5/2010
Management Main IDU: Setting IP Address

Here you can set the IP address of
the IDU
Let us examine the following
examples to understand how and
when we use each one of these
parameters
13

Node / standalone, no protection:
Connect your PC to any one of the MNG ports (7,6,5)
IP: 192.168.1.10
SM: 255.255.255.0
D.GW: 0.0.0.0
14
ETH Cross Cable
IP: 192.168.1.100
SM: 255.255.255.0
PAGE 164
10/5/2010

Node, Standalone, no protection, going through a Router:
Set the Default GW address
10.10.2.10
DCN
IP: 192.168.1.10
SM: 255.255.255.0
255 255 255 0
D.GW: 192.168.1.12
192.168.1.12
IP: 10.10.2.100
SM: 255.255.255.0
15

Node/Standalone, 1+1 Protection:
Set a Floating IP
The floating
g IP address p
provides a
single IP address that will always give
direct access to the current active
main unit.
IP Slot #1: 192.168.1.10

IP Slot #2: 192.168.1.11
SM: 255.255.255.0
D.GW: 0.0.0.0
Floating IP: 192.168.1.22
ETH Y-Cable
IP: 192.168.1.100
SM: 255.255.255.0
See 1+1 Protection PPS for further info
16
PAGE 165
10/5/2010

Node/Standalone, 1+1 Protection, going through a Router:
Set a Floating IP + D. GW
192.168.1.100
IP Slot #1: 192.168.1.10

IP Slot #2: 192.168.1.11
SM: 255.255.255.0
D.GW: 192.168.1.100
Floating IP: 192.168.1.22
ETH Y-Cable
IP: 10.10.2.100
SM: 255.255.255.0
See 1+1 Protection PPS for further info
17
Management Main IDU: Setting No. of MNG Ports
This is the switch MAC address

If your link is up you should be
able to see the other ends IP
The IDU has 3 ports for local management:

Port 7,, Port 6 and Port 5.
You may enable none or up to 3 ports:
Number of ports =3
Number of ports =2
Number of ports =1
Number of ports =0
18
Port 7, Port 6, Port 5

Port 7, Port 6
Port 7
NO LOCAL MANAGEMENT !!!
PAGE 166
10/5/2010
Management Main IDU: In Band Properties
In Band Management
g
requires unique VLAN ID
This helps separating
MNG traffic from other
services
In Band MNG packets are
transferred via the radio
link
When the link is down,
management is down as
well.
19
Management Main IDU: Port Properties
These parameters allow

you setting the
management capacity and
ports physical properties
20
PAGE 167
10
10/5/2010
Trap Configuration (OSS / NMS / Northbound)
To manage the IDU with OSS / NMS, you will need to configure the IP address
of the OSS Server
You may configure up to 4 Servers (Trap Destinations)
See next slide for more info.
21
Trap Configuration T. Destination Configuration
22
PAGE 168
11
10/5/2010
Licensing Copy, Paste, Ready to start

Licenses are generated per IDU S/N (capacity / ACM / switch mode)
License upgrade requires system reset.
23
Licensing the IDU according to ACM
Adaptive Coding & Modulation:

Allowed / Not Allowed
When allowed, the radios assign
scripts dynamically and
automatically to maintain service
while link degrades
(bit per symbol / order of modulation changes)
24
PAGE 169
12
10/5/2010
Licensing the IDU according to Switch Mode
Ethernet switch license:

allows using the L2 switch in the
following
g modes1. Single Pipe (Default no license
required)
2. Managed switch
3. Metro switch
25
Licensing the IDU according to Capacity
Capacity license:
Limits the total amount of radio
capacity available:
This is sum of ETH + TDM BW
The radio modem script is a
function of this license value
This license applies only if the
TDM-only license is disabled
26
PAGE 170
13
10/5/2010
Licensing the IDU according to Capacity (no TDM)
TDM-only license:
Limits the amount of TDM trails
that can be mapped to a radio.
Allows minimal ETH traffic for
network management only.
If this license is allowed, any radio
script can be loaded, but the
number of trails is limited.
27
Licensing the IDU according to Network Resiliency
Network resiliency license:

Allows configuration of features
that make use of loop network
topologies:
o Ring RSTP
o TDM trails p
protection ((SNCP))
Note that for systems in which
these features were enabled in
previous versions, the features will
be allowed even if no resiliency
license is purchased.
28
PAGE 171
14
10/5/2010
Licensing the IDU according to Synchronization
Synchronization unit license:

Allows configuration of external
source as a clock source for
synchronous Ethernet output
(assuming the IDUs
IDU s hardware
supports synchronization).
If this license is not installed,
Ethernet clock source can only be
a local (internal) clock.
29
Per Usage License
Per-usage license:
Allows unlimited usage of all
features in the system, and
generates reports of current
usage, used
d ffor usage-based
b
d
billing.
In addition, system will warn user
when a chargeable feature is
enabled.
30
PAGE 172
15
10/5/2010
License Types: Default / Normal / Demo

"Default"
Factory default license.
No License has been purchased or
loaded.
Total 10Mbps radio traffic
No ACM
No switch capabilities (single
pipe only).
No RSTP
SNCP trails are allowed
Synch. sources for Sync ETH are
blocked
All IDUs are manufactured with
"default" license.
31

"Normal"
Once license is loaded
successfully to the system, it is
considered to have "normal"
license.
Normal license allows access to
features and capacities according
to the loaded "license key".
32
PAGE 173
16
10/5/2010

"Demo"
Temporary license that allows
access to maximum capacity and
all features.
This option is limited only to 60
days (see next slide for further
details).
An event will be raised 10 days
y
before expiration.
33
Licensing: General
The License key is generated per IDU serial number (S/N)
In order to upgrade license, license-key must be entered to the system
(requires cold-reset)
When system is up, its license key is checked, allowing access to new
capacities and/or features
If license key itself is not legal (typing mistake, illegal S/N) specific alarm will
be raised
When "License Violation" alarm is raised,, Radio port
p capacity
p
y is automatically
y
limited to ~3Mbps, allowing only management channels to remote end
To clear the violation alarm, user must configure the system to comply with the
loaded license, and then, issue cold-reset (radio resumes full operational status
if the violation is no longer relevant)
34
PAGE 174
17
10/5/2010
Licensing: Demo License

Demo license is allowed for 60 days per IDU, expanding the time is not feasible
The function can be enabled and disabled from the license menu
When the function is disabled or when the 60 days are up, the system shall
perform a reset and automatically change the radio-script to the last radio-script
that was used before the demo license was enabled
An alarm is raised and a timer of the remained hours is shown on the license
menu while demo is enabled
The timer does not run when the unit is down
48 hours before the license period is completed, an alarm will be raised to
notify that the demo license is about to be ended within 48 hours
When demo is enabled, all the radio scripts are available and the user can
choose any wanted script
35
NTP Client Properties

Enable / Disable
Type NTP Server IP address
Expect IDU to lock on NTP Servers clock
Expected Status:
1. If locked, it returns the IP address of the server it is locked on.
2. Local if the NTP client is locked to the local elements real-time clock
3. NA - if not synchronized with any clock (valid only when Admin is set to
Disable).
The feature supports Time Offset and Daylight Saving Time.
Time Offset and Daylight Saving Time can be configured via WEB (Unit Information
page) or via CLI: /management/mng-services/time-service>
36
PAGE 175
18
10/5/2010
NTP Properties
37
NTP Properties
When using NTP with external protection 1+1, both Active and Standby
units
nits sho
should
ld be locked independentl
independently on the NTP ser
server,
er and report
independently their Sync status.
Time & Date are not copied from the Active unit to the Standby unit
When using NTP in a shelf configuration
configuration, all units in the shelf (including
standby main units) are automatically synchronized to the active main units
clock.
38
PAGE 176
19
10/5/2010
IP Table
Here you can manually set your neighbors network properties

39
SNMP
V1
V2c
V3
No security
Authentication
Authentication privacy
SHA
MD5
No Authentication
40
PAGE 177
20
10/5/2010
All ODU
This feature is used to feed the integrated fans of the All Outdoor Enclosure
(standalone outdoor rack)
When Enabled, the All ODU enclosure interface is activated, and the enclosure
controller can then be powered to monitor fan failure alarms.
The External Alarm Input #1 becomes an output, which together with 3.3V is
used to drive the enclosures electronic board.
External Alarm Input #2 is set with a specific text & severity, and is used to
monitor any enclosure fan failure, and to raise an alarm for it (polarity change
was required to adapt it to the enclosure behavior).
All ODU Disabled

41
All ODU Enabled
All ODU - External Alarms Status

All ODU = Disabled
All ODU = Enabled
42
PAGE 178
21
10/5/2010
Versions - IDU
43
Versions - ODU
44
PAGE 179
22
10/5/2010
Versions Running / Installed / Upgrade / Downgrade
Lets explore this example:

3 0 92
The IDU running SW is displayed in the aidu line and currently it is 3.0.92
A new SW was downloaded sometime in the past (3.0.97)
The IDU was not upgraded yet
45
ThankYou!
46
PAGE 180
23
3/7/2010

EMS Switch Configuration
Agenda
1. Switch mode review

2. Guidelines
3. Single Pipe Configuration
4. Managed Mode Configuration
5. Managed Mode Common Applications
PAGE 181
3/7/2010
Switch Modes
1. Single (Smart) Pipe (default mode, does not require license)
This application allows only single GbE interface as traffic interface (Optical
GbE-SFP or Electrical GbE - 10/100/1000).
Any traffic coming from any GbE interface will be sent directly to the radio and
vice versa.
This application allows QoS configuration.
Other FE (10/100) interfaces can be configured to be "functional" interfaces
(WSC, Protection, Management), otherwise they are shut down.
Note: (CQ20473): Single pipe discards PAUSE PDU (01-80-C2-00-00-01)
and Slow protocols PDU (01-80-C2-00-00-02).
Switch Modes
2. Managed Mode (license depended)
This application is 802.1Q VLAN aware bridge, allowing L2 switching based
on VLANs. This application also allows QoS configuration.
All Ethernet ports are allowed for traffic. Each traffic port can be configured to
be "access" port or "trunk" port:
Type
VLANs
Allowed Ingress Frames
Allowed Egress
Frames
Access
Specific VLAN should be

assigned to access the port
Only Untagged frames

(or Tagged with VID=0
"Priority Tagged )
Untagged frames
Trunk
A range of VLANs should be

assigned to access the Port
Only Tagged frames
Tagged frames
PAGE 182
3/7/2010
Switch Modes
3.
Metro Mode (license depended)
This application is 802.1Q VLAN aware bridge, allowing Q-in-Q (A.K.A.

VLAN Stacking). This mode allows the configuration of a PE port and CE port.
Allowed Ingress
Frames
Type
VLANs
CustomerNetwork
Specific S-VLAN should be Untagged frames, or

assigned to "Customerframes with C-tag
Network" port
(ether-type=0x8100).
ProviderNetwork
A range of S-VLANs, or
"all" S-VLANs should be
assigned to "ProviderNetwork" port
Configurable S-tag.
(ether-type)
0x88a8
0x8100
0x9100
0x9200
Allowed Egress
Frames
Untagged or C-tag
(ether-type= 0x8100)
frames.
Configurable S-tag.
(ether-type)
0x88a8
0x8100
0x9100
0x9200
Guidelines
Changing switch modes requires a reset

Resets do not change the IP-10G settings (radio,
configuration, etc.)
VLANs need to be created in the switch DB before assigned
to a port
PAGE 183
3/7/2010
Single Pipe
Configuration
7
Single Pipe Configuration
Untagged
VID 4
45
VID 51
IP-10 Switch
VID 100
Port 1: GbE (Optical or Electrical)

Port 3: FE (RJ45)
Port 8 (Radio)
PAGE 184
3/7/2010
Configuration Single Pipe
This is the default setting
Configuration Single Pipe
Only one ingress port

can be used:
Port 1 (Opt. or Elec.)

Port 3 (RJ45)
When one is enabled

the other is disabled
No need to configure
VID membership
10
PAGE 185
3/7/2010
Managed Mode
Configuration
11
Configuration Managed Mode

Lets use this diagram as an example Port #2 as Trunk (VID 200)
IDU-B
IDU-A
Port #3 as Trunk
(VID 300)
12
Radios as Trunk by
default
Port #2 as Trunk
(VID 200, VID 300)
PAGE 186
3/7/2010

Make sure both IDUs are aware of
the required VIDs
You need to create the VIDs before
you assign them to a certain port
(Set # & Apply)
13

Next steps:
1. Go to Interfaces page
2. Enable the required port (Ingress ports)
3. Configure the port type as Trunk or Access
4. Assign allowed VLAN IDs (port membership)
5. Radio port is automatically configured as Trunk, all VLANs are
allowed by default
14
PAGE 187
3/7/2010
4
15

Common Applications
Tagging / untangling
IP-10
Radio = Trunk Port
Access Port
Transmits and
receives
Untagged
frames
Transmits and
receives
Untagged
frames
PC
PC
192.168.1.200
192.168.1.100
16
PAGE 188
3/7/2010

Common Applications
Radio = Trunk Port
IP-10
Trunk Port
Multiple L2
streams, each
identified with
unique VID
Traffic
Generator
Trunk Port
17
Thank You !
18
PAGE 189
4/17/2010
FibeAir IP-10
Trunk VS. Access
Agenda
1. VLAN TAG Attributes

2. Access Port
3. Trunk Port
4. Extracting frames out of a trunk
5. General Guidelines
6. EMS Trunk Configuration
PAGE 190
4/17/2010
VLAN TAG Attributes

1.
In L2 ETH switching, L2 traffic can be engineered using the VLAN TAG

attributes
2.
L2 traffic is controlled by defining port membership: Access or Trunk
3.
Together, port membership + L2 traffic engineering convert

connectionless to connection-oriented network
4.
In such networks, services are better deployed and maintained
5.
VLAN TAG attributes include:

VLAN ID (12 bits)
Priority Bits (3 bits)
5.
Additional attributes may be used to engineer traffic:

MAC DA
Port number
Access Port
Access Port is a port which is aware of a single VLAN only
Ingress
g
traffic is expected to be Untagged,
gg
e.g.
g no VLAN
information exists within the received Ethernet frame
All frames that are received through this port are tagged with
default VLAN (VID + P bits)
All frames that exit through this port towards customer devices are
untagged (VLAN is removed)
Users can configure the L2 switch to assign different tagging

scenarios to different ports
PAGE 191
4/17/2010
Access Port
Let us examine the Tagging / Untagging process of a L2 switch
L2 ETH SW
DA
SA
Type
Payload
FCS
Access Port Tagging ingress frames
Let us examine the Tagging / Untagging process of Port #1
Tagging
Port #8
Port #1
DA
SA
VLAN TAG
Type
Payload
FCS
Tagged frame
DA
SA
Type
Payload
FCS
Access Port:Untagged frame

6
PAGE 192
4/17/2010
Access Port
Utagging frames towards customer interfacing ports
When Tagged frame from Network is forwarded to Access port, the

VLAN Tag is removed
Untagging
Port #8
Port #1
DA
SA
VLAN TAG
Type
Payload
FCS
Tagged frame
DA
SA
Type
Payload
FCS
Access Port: Untagged frame

7
Access Port Tagging multiple ports
The switch can individually tag multiple Access ports with same VID or
unique VID
Tagging
Port #8
Port #1
Port #2
DA
DA
DA SA Type Payload FCS

SA Type Payload FCS
DA
SA
SA
VLAN TAG = 10
VLAN TAG = 33
Type
Type
Payload
Payload
FCS
FCS
Access Ports: Untagged frames

8
PAGE 193
4/17/2010
Trunk Port multiple VIDs awareness
To be able to transmit & receive multiple VLANs, the common port has to
be configured as a Trunk Port
Trunk Port
Port #8
Port #1
Port #2
DA
DA
DA SA Type Payload FCS

SA Type Payload FCS
DA
SA
SA
VLAN TAG = 10
Type
VLAN TAG = 33
Type
Payload
Payload
FCS
FCS
Access ports: Untagged frames

9
Trunk Port multiple VIDs awareness
Any port can be configured as Trunk

In this example, port #2 is facing customer device to forward all the
network VLANs (TX&RX)
Trunk Port
Port #8
Port #2
DA
DA
DA
SA
VLAN TAG = 10
SA VLAN
TAG = 33
DA Untagged
frames
10
Type
Type
Payload
Payload
SA
SA
VLAN TAG = 10
VLAN TAG = 33
Type
Type
Payload
Payload
FCS
FCS
FCS
FCS
PAGE 194
4/17/2010
Trunk & Access Extracting frames out of a Trunk
DA
A certain VLAN can be extracted out of a Trunk via Access port assigned
with specific VLAN membership (Default VID)
SA
Type
Payload
FCS
DA
SA
VLAN TAG = 33
Type
Payload
FCS
Port #5: Access
Port #8: Trunk

DA
Port #2:
Trunk
SA
DA
VLAN TAG = 10
SA
VLAN TAG = 33
DA Untagged
frames
Type
Type
DA
Payload
Payload
11
SA
SA
VLAN TAG = 10
VLAN TAG = 33
Type
Type
Payload
Payload
FCS
FCS
FCS
FCS
General guidelines
Access port can only receive untagged frames from customer device
Access port can only transmit untagged frames towards customer device
Access port supports single VLAN
Access port can be connected to an Access port only
Trunk port can only receive / transmit tagged frames
Trunk port supports multiple VLANs
Trunk port can be connected to a Trunk port only
When configuring Access or Trunk port, membership needs to be defined

next (which VLANs are supported)
12
PAGE 195
4/17/2010
EMS Trunk Configuration
4
13
ThankYou!
training@ceragon
com
14
PAGE 196
10/5/2010

EMS Metro Switch Configuration
Agenda
Metromodereview
Configuration Guidelines
ConfigurationGuidelines
SimplifiedFlow
CommonApplications:CN PN PN CN
CommonApplications:CN PN PN PN
SwitchModeConfiguration
CNPortConfiguration
PNPortConfiguration
PAGE 197
10/5/2010
Metro Mode (license depended)

This application is 802.1Q VLAN aware bridge, allowing Q-in-Q
(A.K.A. VLAN Stacking).
This mode allows the configuration of a PE port and CE port.
Allowed Ingress
Frames
Allowed Egress
Frames
Type
VLANs
CustomerNetwork
Specific S-VLAN should be Untagged frames, or

assigned to "Customerframes with C-tag
Network" port
(ether-type=0x8100).
ProviderNetwork
A range of S-VLANs, or
"all" S-VLANs should be
assigned to "ProviderNetwork" port
Configurable S-tag.
(ether-type)
0x88a8
0x8100
0x9100
0x9200
Untagged or C-tag
(ether-type= 0x8100)
frames.
Configurable S-tag.
(ether-type)
0x88a8
0x8100
0x9100
0x9200
Configuration guidelines
Customer Network frames are encapsulated with a 2nd VLAN (S-VLAN)

and forwarded to a PN port
PN ports transport multiple encapsulated networks,

networks each associated with
a unique S-VLAN
CN ports remove the S-VLAN towards a Customer interface
Network #1
S-VLAN 9
Radio
R
di
Network 1
Ports
S-VLAN 8
(PN)
Network 2
CVLAN100
CVLAN101
CVLAN102
CVLAN103
CVLAN100
CVLAN101
CVLAN102
CVLAN103
Network #2
4
PAGE 198
10/5/2010
Simplified Flow
IP-10
S-VLAN 1000
S-VLAN 222
S-VLAN 1000
S-VLAN 222
PN
CN
CN
ISP / BTS #1
ISP / BTS #2
C-VLAN 100
C-VLAN 101
C-VLAN 102
C-VLANs unknown
Radio Port
CN-PN-PN-CN
CVLAN100
CVLAN101
CVLAN102
CVLAN103
S-VLAN 9
Radio BTS 2
Ports
S-VLAN 8
(PN)
BTS 1
BTS#2:
CVLAN100
CVLAN101
CVLAN102
CVLAN103
CVLAN100
CVLAN101
CVLAN102
CVLAN103
CN
CN
CN
BTS#1:
CVLAN100
CVLAN101
CVLAN102
CVLAN103
6
CN
PAGE 199
10/5/2010
CN-PN-PN-PN
CVLAN100
CVLAN101
CVLAN102
CVLAN103
S-VLAN 9
BTS 2
Radio
Ports
S-VLAN 8
(PN)
BTS 1
BTS#2:
CVLAN100
CVLAN101
CVLAN102
CVLAN103
CVLAN100
CVLAN101
CVLAN102
CVLAN103
CN
CN
BTS#1:
CVLAN100
CVLAN101
CVLAN102
CVLAN103
7
PN
CustomerNetwork
ProviderNetwork
Switch Mode Configuration
1. Set mode to Metro (requires reset)

2. Add the S-VLAN ID (set & apply)
PAGE 200
10/5/2010
CN Port Configuration
1. Go to Interfaces / Ethernet Ports page
2. Enable the port
3. Set the type to Customer Network
4. Type the port ID (EVC name, free string)
5. Type the S-VLAN ID
6 Enable
E bl P
i
6.
Portt L
Learning
7. Apply & Refresh
8. See screen capture next slide
9
CN Port Configuration
3
4
5
7
10
PAGE 201
10/5/2010
PN Port Configuration
1. Go to Interfaces / Ethernet Ports page
2. Enable the port
3. Set the type to Provider Network
4. Enable Port Learning
5. Edit (if needed) the allowed S-VLANs
6 Apply
A l &R
f h
6.
Refresh
7. Set the required S-Tag (Ether-Type)
8. See screen capture next slide
11
PN Port Configuration
2
6
5
12
PAGE 202
10/5/2010
PN Port Configuration Setting the S-Tag

This is the bottom of the
Interfaces/ETH ports
configuration page
13
0x88A8
0x8100
0 8100
0x9100
0x9200
Additional Information
QoS with Metro mode:
CN ports only audits the P-Bit of C-VLANs:
Ingress frames through CN ports can be classified by applying a VLAN P-Bit Classifier.
Link Configuration:
Metro switch can work with a remote Metro switch or remote Single Pipe switch
Metro switch cannot work with a remote Managed switch
RSTP with Metro mode:

RSTP is supported in Metro mode
14
PAGE 203
10/5/2010
ThankYou!
training@ceragon
com
15
PAGE 204
10/17/2010

EMS RSTP Configuration
Agenda
Student Perquisites
General Overview
Limitations
Site / Node Types
Switchover Criteria
In Band Management
Out of band Management
Configuration Example
2
PAGE 205
1
10/17/2010
Student Perquisites
Viewers / end-user are required to have previous experience prior to
practicing this module:
1. End users should be familiar

f
with Switch
S
configuration
f
2. Be End users should be familiar with setting port membership
3. End users should be familiar with management mode configuration
4. End users should be familiar with configuring Automatic State Propagation
General Overview
Ceragon Networks ring solution enhances the RSTP algorithm for ring
topologies, accelerating the failure propagation relative to the regular
RSTP:
Relations between Root and Designated bridges when ring is converged in the
first time is the same as defined in the standard RSTP. Ring-RSTP itself is
different than classic RSTP, as it exploits the topology of the ring, in order to
accelerate convergence.
Ethernet-Fast-Ring-RSTP will use the standard RSTP BPDUs:
01-80-C2-00-00-00.
The ring is revertible
revertible. When the ring is set up
up, it is converged according to
RSTP definitions. When a failure appears (e.g. LOF is raised), the ring is
converged. When the failure is removed (e.g. LOF is cleared) the ring reverts
back to its original state, still maintaining service disruption limitations.
RSTP PDUs coming from Edge ports are discarded (and not processed or
broadcasted).
4
PAGE 206
2
10/17/2010
Ring RSTP Limitations

1. Ring RSTP is a proprietary implementation of Ceragon Networks, and
cannot interwork with other Ring RSTP implementations of other 3rd party
vendors.
2. Ring RSTP
S
can be activated only in Managed
Switch
S
application, and is not
available in any other switch application (Single Pipe or Metro).
3. Ring RSTP should NOT be running with protection 1+1.
Site / Node Types

The ring can be constructed by two types of nodes/sites:
1. Node/Site Type A:
The site is connected to the ring with one Radio interface (e.g. East) and one
Line interface (e.g. West).
The site contains only one IP-10 IDU. The Radio interface towards one
direction (e.g. East), and one of the Gigabit (Copper or Optical) interfaces,
towards the second direction (e.g. West).
Other line interfaces are in edge mode, meaning, they are user interfaces,
and are not part of the ring itself
itself.
PAGE 207
3
10/17/2010
Site / Node Types

The ring can be constructed by two types of nodes/sites:
2. Node/Site Type B:
The site is connected with Radios to both directions of the ring (e.g. East &
West).
Site contains two IDUs. Each IDU support the Radio in one direction
One IDU runs with the Ring RSTP, and the second
runs in Single pipe mode.
Both IDUs are connected via Gigabit interface
(either optical or electrical).
Other line interfaces are in edge mode.
Switchover / Convergence Criteria

The following failures will initiate convergence:
Radio LOF
Link ID mismatch.
Radio Excessive BER (optional)
ACM profile is below pre-determined threshold (optional).
Line LOC
Node
N d cold
ld resett (Pi
(Pipe and/or
d/ S
Switch).
it h)
Node power down (Pipe and/or Switch)
xSTP port disable / enable
PAGE 208
4
10/17/2010
In-Band Management (1)

In this scenario, management is part of the data traffic, thus, management is
protected with the traffic when the ring is re-converged as a result of a ring
failure.
Managed
S
Switch IDUs will be configured
f
to In-Band, while Single
S
Pipe
IDUs will be configured to Out-of-Band.
Single Pipe nodes will be connected with external Ethernet cable to the
Managed Switch for management.
The reason for that requirement is the automatic state propagation
behavior of the Single Pipe that shuts down its GbE traffic port upon failure,
thus management might be lost to itit.
thus,
Note When using a node (Outdoor Enclosure), there is no need to configure

Management mode for the 2nd slot
In-Band Management (2)
10
PAGE 209
5
10/17/2010
Out of band Management (1)

In this scenario, all elements (Single pipe and Managed Switch IDUs)
should be configured to Out-of-band, with WSC enabled. Management will
be delivered over WSC.
External xSTP switch should be used in order to gain resilient management,

and resolve the management loops.
The following picture demonstrates 4 sites ring, with out-of-band management:
11
Out of band Management (2)
12
PAGE 210
6
10/17/2010
EMS
Configuration
13
Setup Configuration
Site#1
Site#2
1
Pipe(slot#2)
1 1
MNG(slot#1)
MNG
(slot #1)
1
Pipe(slot#2)
1 1
MNG(slot#1)
Site#3
1
Pipe(slot#2)
1 1
MNG(slot#1)
EMS
1. You may start with out of band configuration to avoid physical loops
2. Establish the Radio links according to the setup scheme
14
PAGE 211
7
10/17/2010
Setup Configuration
Site#1
Site#2
1
Pipe(slot#2)
1 1
MNG(slot#1)
MNG
( l t #1)
1
Pipe(slot#2)
1 1
MNG(slot#1)
Site#3
1
Pipe(slot#2)
1 1
MNG(slot#1)
EMS
3. Connect between slot 2 and slot 1 using ports number 1 and fibers
4. Enable RSTP in all Managed Switch IDUs (see next slide)
15
Setup Configuration Enabling RSTP
16
PAGE 212
8
10/17/2010
Setup Configuration Configuring In Band MNG

Site#1
Site#2
1
Pipe(slot#2)
1 1
MNG(slot#1)
MNG
( l t #1)
1
Pipe(slot#2)
1 1
MNG(slot#1)
Site#3
1
Pipe(slot#2)
1 1
MNG(slot#1)
5. Enable In Band Management + VID 200

6. Connect the EMS PC to one of the IDUs (MNG port #7), disconnect other
connections
7. Verify all GbE ports 1 of Slots #1 are Trunk & members of VID 200 (next slide)
17
GbE Port #1 Configuration

Add Services of other VLANs as
well if the RING is required to pass
ETH data as well (see example
below, VID 1000)
Please note the VIDs need to be
created first in the Switch
Configuration page
18
PAGE 213
9
10/17/2010
RSTP Verification
Site#1
Site#2
1
Pipe(slot#2)
1 1
MNG(slot#1)
MNG
( l t #1)
1
Pipe(slot#2)
1 1
MNG(slot#1)
Site#3
1
Pipe(slot#2)
1 1
MNG(slot#1)
8. PING EMS to all Sites at the same time (multiple PING sessions)
19
RSTP Verification
9. Examine which switch is the Root Bridge and which ports are the Root Ports
10. Verify that the ring is set up properly (one Root)
20
PAGE 214
10
10/17/2010
RSTP Verification
11.Identify the Edge Ports and Non-Edge ports in your setup and make sure
they are configured correctly
21
Enabling ASP
Make sure that all RING IDUs (Pipe & Managed) support Automatic State
Propagation (enabled).
Enabling
g ASP allows RSTP Ring
g to converge
g faster by
yp
propagating
p g
g radio
alarms into the Line and thus, accelerating port state changes.
Configure the ASP Criteria as required.
22
PAGE 215
11
10/17/2010
Triggering a Switchover
Disconnect a radio link and make sure PING to all Main units is maintained
Restore connectivity.
Disconnect a different radio link and make sure PING to all Main units is
maintained
Repeat the same tests with traffic and trails (SNCP).
23
Prioritizing RSTP ports & topologies
PAGE 216
12
10/17/2010
Prioritization Criteria
1. Bridge Priority (User configurable)

2. MAC Address (unique per IDU)
3. Port Priority (User configurable)
4 Path
4.
P th C
Costt (User
(U
configurable)
fi
bl )
25
Reading the Aggregated Path Cost

This value shows the time it takes for
the bridge to get to the Root Bridge
(in terms of interface capacity).
The lower this value is, the better.
Root Bridges will show this value = 0
This value indicates the aggregated

cost a bridge has to go through to get
to the Root bridge.
26
PAGE 217
13
10/17/2010
Setting the Bridge Priority

All bridges are given the same Bridge
Priority (32768) by default.
A bridge with lower priority are more

likely to become the Root Bridge
27
Setting the Port Priority

All ports are given the same priority
128
Should you wish to manually select
the Root Port, you may set a lower
value
Ports with lower priority are more
likely to be chosen as the Root Port
28
PAGE 218
14
10/17/2010
Setting the Path Cost

The bigger the port capacity is, the
lower this value becomes
For example:
1GbE is given lower path cost than
FE port
The bridge assigns a Root Port with
the lowest Path Cost to the Root
Bridge
29
ThankYou!
training@ceragon
com
30
PAGE 219
15
10/17/2010

QoS Concept & Implementation
Agenda
Introduction
Why do we need QoS?
Not all Traffic are the same
Traffic Engineering as a solution
QoS in IP-10
PAGE 220
1
10/17/2010
Introduction (1)
IP-10 is more than a Radio:
High capacity MW Radio

Up to 500Mbps @ 56MHz
ADM Add & Drop Multiplexer:

It enables a matrix of cross-connections
between TDM E1/T1,SDH VCs and
Radio channels
ADM
L2ETH
SW
L2 ETH Switch:
802.1p/q
P-Bit remap
Policers
Shaping
Scheduler
IPv4 / IPv6 Classification
MW
Radio
Introduction (2)
In this presentation we shall focus on the QoS implemented with the
integrated L2 ETH switch
But first, let us understand

what does Quality Of Service
stands for
ADM
L2ETH
SW
MW
Radio
4
PAGE 221
2
10/17/2010
Understanding QoS
Why do we need QoS? (1)

Without controlling our Backbone /Core infrastructure High cost of non-responsiveness: devices are deployed but not properly
allocated to transport customer traffic
On the other hand bad resource design results in congestion which will lead
to network downtime costs due to degradation of performance
QoS (e.g. - Traffic Engineering) optimizes
network resources
PAGE 222
3
10/17/2010
Why do we need QoS? (2)

Mobile operators focus on reducing costs:
Mobile Broadband growth requires Backhaul expansions, hence:
p
are stretching
g their cost-saving
g initiatives
Operators
Operators will look for new ways to drive further Backhaul savings
Operators must reduce their cost per Mbit
QoS (e.g. - Traffic Engineering) optimizes network resources
Wireless Carrier Ethernet

Backhaul Network
Business center
GE
WiMAX / 4G / LTE
Cellular site
WiMAX
STM-1 / OC-3
Ceragon
TDM
E1/T1
Ceragon
Hub / Aggregation site
2G/3G base station
Fundamental Fact
Dynamic
WWW
Static
WWW
Multimedia
FTP
Not all traffic is the same!
emails
Skype
So why treated equally?...
Whosfirst?
8
PAGE 223
4
10/17/2010
Traffic Engineering as a Solution

Your 1st assignment is identifying needs & solutions:
Dynamic
WWW
What is the BW requirement per service ?

Video requires more than voice
Static
WWW
Multimedia
Data
D t requires
i
lless th
than video
id
FTP requires more than emails
FTP
What is the delay sensitivity of each service?
emails
Delayed Voice is inacceptable

FTP can tolerate delays
Skype
Your 2nd assignment is grouping services into SLAs:
Video & Multimedia Low Services (Best Effort)
FTP Moderate Service
Skype Highest Service
Your 3rd assignment is configuring QoS in your network

9
QoS in IP-10
PAGE 224
5
10/17/2010
IP-10G L2 ETH Switch Ports
The IP-10Gs L2 Switch has 8 ports:
Port #1 GbE (Opt. / Elec.)

Port #2 GbE ((Opt.
p / Elec.))
Port #3 to port #7 FE
Port #8 (Radio port)
11
QoS Process
Q4
Q4
25
10
50
Q1
Q3
Q2
Rate Limit
Queuing
Scheduling
Egress Port (s)
Ingress Port
12
Shaping
PAGE 225
6
10/17/2010
Ingress VS. Egress

Every Switch port applies Ingress Rules and Egress Rules depending on traffic
characteristics (L2 header and applied policies)
Ingress
port
Egress
port
Customer
Network
Provider
Network
Egress
port
Ingress
port
Customer
Network
Provider
Network
13
Ingress VS. Egress: IP-10

Radio port (ETH port #8):
Ingress traffic relates to traffic received from remote IDU
Egress traffic relates to traffic sent to remote IDU
Non-Radio ports (ports 1 to 7*):

Ingress traffic relates to traffic received from customer
Egress traffic relates to traffic sent to customer
Ingress
Egress
P t 1-7*
1 7*
Port
Port 1-7*
Radio
Radio
Egress
Ingress
* Ports 7, 6 & 5 can be used as management or data
14
PAGE 226
7
10/17/2010
Ingress Rate Limiting

Users can configure maximum ingress rate per port
Exceeding traffic will be discarded
Rate limitation can be configured per type of traffic (Policers)
FE Max.
Rate
25
10
50
100Mbps
Discard
Max. Allowed
R
Rate
t
Pass
Actual
Customer
Traffic
Time
Example: Policer assigned to FE interface
15
Using Queues
Every port of the L2 switch examines the ingress traffic and then it sorts it in a
buffer according to classification criteria
This process is called Queuing
Users can configure up to 4 queues where Q4 has the max. priority and Q1
has the lowest priority
Q4
High
Q3
Q2
Q1
16
Low
PAGE 227
8
10/17/2010
Using Queuing
17
Scheduling: Round Robin

Once the queues are filled with information, we need to empty them
Which queue should we empty first?
Pro: no queue starvation

C
Con:
no prioritization
i iti ti
Emptying cycle is fixed all queues are treated equally
Q1
Low
Q1
Q2
Q2
Q3
Q3
Q4
High
Q4
time
t1
18
t2
t3
t4
PAGE 228
9
10/17/2010
Scheduling: Weighted Round Robin

Emptying cycle is configurable every queue can be given specific weight
Q1
Low
Q1
Q2
Q2
Q3
Q3
Q4
High
Q4
time
t1
19
t2
t3
t4
t5
Scheduling: 4th Strict Priority

The switch will empty Q4 as long as it has something
Once empty switch will perform RR on lower queues
If Q4 receives a frame during the Lower-Queues-RR, it will go back to focus
on Q4
Pro: Optimized Prioritization

Con: Queue starvation
20
PAGE 229
10
10/17/2010
Scheduling: All Strict Priority

The switch will empty a queue as long as the higher queue is empty
21
Shaping
Bursts beyond a EIR (Excessive Information Rate) can be buffered and
retransmitted when capacity frees up, and only when shaping buffers are full
will packets be dropped.
22
PAGE 230
11
10/17/2010
Possible Scenarios
f
No need for
Ingress Queuing
Port 1-7*
Port 1-7*
Radio
Ingress
Queuing
Radio
Radio Egress
Scheduler =
Strict Priority
23
No need
g
for Egress
Scheduler
Possible Scenarios
Ingress Queuing is
required in port 8
Port 1-7*
Port 1-7*
Radio
Ingress
Queuing
24
Radio
Radio Egress
Scheduler =
Round Robin
Egress
Scheduler
is required
PAGE 231
12
10/17/2010
ThankYou!
training@ceragon
com
25
PAGE 232
13
3/7/2010

EMS Basic QoS Configuration
Perquisites
End-users must be familiar with the following items prior to taking
this module:
Introduction to Ethernet
802.1p/q
QoS (Concept)
IP-10 Switch Configuration
Trunk VS. Access
2
PAGE 233
3/7/2010
Agenda
Introduction
IP-10 L2 Switch ports
Step #1: Configure the switch
Step #2: Configure the switch ports
Step #3: Configure QoS per port
Process Review
Basic Configurations
Introduction (2)
In this presentation we shall focus on the L2 ETH switch:
Four priority (CoS) queues
Advanced CoS classifier:
VLAN Pbits / VLAN ID (RFC 802.1p,q)
IPv4 (RFC 791) / IPv6 (RFC 2460, RFC 2474)
MAC DA
Advanced ingress traffic policing /
rate-limiting per port/CoS
ADM
L2 ETH
SW
Flexible scheduling:
Strict Priority, WRR or HRR
Traffic shaping
MW
Radio
802.3x flow control (for loss-less) operation
PAGE 234
3/7/2010
IP-10G L2 ETH Switch Ports
The IP-10Gs L2 Switch has 8 ports:

Port #3 to port #7 FE
Port #8 (Radio port)
Step #1: Set your Switch

Configure the switch mode: Pipe / Managed / Metro
Configure VLAN IDs
PAGE 235
3/7/2010
Step #2: Configure Switch Ports

Configure Port Type: Access / Trunk
Configure Port Membership
Step #3: Configure QoS per Port
PAGE 236
3/7/2010
Process Review
Policer per port
25
10
50
Rate Limit
10
PAGE 237
3/7/2010
3 classifiers to audit & queue Ingress Traffic
Queuing
11
Egress port Scheduler
Q4
Q4
Q1
Q3
Q2
Scheduling
12
PAGE 238
3/7/2010
Egress Port Shaper
Shaping
13
Basic Configurations
PAGE 239
3/7/2010
1. Ingress Rate Limiting
Lets say we want to limit Video streams

from customer interface towards the
network
Video streams are characterized with a
UDP protocol & multicast address
Therefore we shall define a Policer to
limit these parameters
15
1. Ingress Rate Limiting Setting a Policer

There are 15 different
traffic types that we
can use
Each Policer can have
up to 5 conditions
16
PAGE 240
3/7/2010
1. Attaching a Policer to a port

To attach a Policer to a port simply type the Policer name
17
2. Queuing according to Ingress P-Bits

Click on the VLAN Pbits to Queue link to open the configuration table
Using this table we can map 8 priority levels to 4

queues or lower number of classes
This table is global and can be used for other tasks
as well
18
PAGE 241
3/7/2010
2. Queuing according to Ingress P-Bits

Select VLAN Pbits as the 3rd classifier as shown below:
Set the Egress Scheduler as required -
19
3. Queuing Ingress Frames according to MAC

Click on the Static MAC link to open the configuration table
In this example, we prioritize 3 frames according to their MAC DA.

The ingress frames are put in a queue according to the Priority settings and VLAN P-Bits to Queue
table. Ingress frames with MAC DA that are not listed in this table will be handled by the next
classifiers .
20
PAGE 242
10
3/7/2010
3. Queuing Ingress Frames according to MAC

Next, select Queue Decision as the 1st criteria
Frames with MAC that do not comply to the table will be classified by the 2nd &
3rd classifiers
21
4. Queuing Ingress Packets according ToS / DSCP
Click on the IP Pbits to Queue

Link to configure ToS /DSCP for IPv4
or IPv6
22
PAGE 243
11
3/7/2010
4. Queuing Ingress Packets according ToS / DSCP

Next, select IP-TOS as the 3rd criteria
23
5. Assigning Port traffic to a specific Queue

Select Port as the 3rd criteria
Select to which queue the port should assign the ingress frames
24
PAGE 244
12
3/7/2010
6. Queuing Ingress frames according to VLAN ID

Click on the VLAN ID to Queue Link to configure the table
25
6. Queuing Ingress frames according to VLAN ID

Select Queue Decision as the 2nd criteria
Frames with VID that do not comply to the table will be classified by the 3rd
classifier
26
PAGE 245
13
3/7/2010
7. Egress Shaper
Reducing the egress rate to a value between 64kbps and 1Mbps requires
setting it in steps of 64kbps
Reducing the egress rate to a value between 1Mbps and 100Mbps requires
setting it in steps of 1Mbps
Reducing the egress rate to a value between 100Mbps and 1Gbps requires
setting it in steps of 10Mbps
27
Thank You !
28
PAGE 246
14
3/7/2010

Advanced QoS Configuration
Agenda
VLAN P-Bit Re-Map Why?
Configuring the Re-Map Table
Queuing without Re-Map
Queuing with next classifier + Re-Map
Queuing + Re-Map
IP ToS over VLAN P-Bits
VLAN P-Bits over IP ToS
Using more than a single Classifier
2
PAGE 247
3/7/2010
P-Bit Re-Map: Why?

Re-Map table is per port (e.g. every port can apply a different map)
Can be used to re-scale Customer CoS
Can be used to guaranty certain Customer priorities are reserved for specific
purposes
Customer
network
P-Bit
Service
P-Bit*
Service
0-2
Video
0-5
Best
Effort
34
Data
56
MNG
MNG
Voice
Voice
L2 Switch
(IP-10)
Provider
network
Configuring the Mapping Table

Click on the VLAN Pbits Remap Table link to configure relevant settings
PAGE 248
3/7/2010
Queuing without Re-Mapping

Ingress
Tagged
frame
VID
P-bit
Ingress
Rate Limit
Queuing
according
to classifier
Egress
Scheduler
Egress
Shaper
VID
P-bit
Skipping to next classifier with Re-Map

Re-Map
Table
Ingress
Tagged
frame
VID
P-bit
Ingress
Rate Limit
Queuing
according
to next
classifier
Egress
Scheduler
Egress
Shaper
VID
P-bit*
PAGE 249
3/7/2010
Queuing and Re-Mapping

Re-Map
Table
Ingress
Tagged
frame
VID
P-bit
Ingress
Rate Limit
Queuing
according
to classifier
Egress
Scheduler
Egress
Shaper
VID
P-bit*
Conditional Classification
PAGE 250
3/7/2010
IP ToS over VLAN P-Bits

In case the ingress frame carries a VLAN and has an IP header Classification is according to IP TOS
Otherwise the switch will apply the Default Configuration (Queue number).
L2 Tagged ETH
L3 IP Header
VLAN P-Bits over IP ToS

In case the ingress frame carries a VLAN and has an IP header Classification is according to VLAN P-Bits
Otherwise the switch will apply the Default Configuration (Queue number).
L2 Tagged ETH
10
L3 IP Header
PAGE 251
3/7/2010

As long as the ingress frames comply to the higher conditions, the system will
not check lower conditions (Classifiers)
If higher condition is not matched, the system will proceed to the lower
condition and so on
11

Audit VID : if VID = 100 than apply High Service
if VID = 200 than apply Low Service
otherwise -
Otherwise
2nd criteria: VLAN ID
If ingress VID does not qualify (100 or 200)
100 or 200
then skip to -
Audit VLAN P-bits
Ingress
frames
VID = ?
100
Highest
100
Highest
100
Highest
100
Highest
200
Lowest
3rd criteria: P-Tag

7
Highest
6
3
Different than
100 or 200
12
2
0
Lowest
PAGE 252
3/7/2010
Thank You !
13
PAGE 253
10/5/2010
FibeAir IP10
Commissioning the Radio Link
Radio Link Parameters

TSL
IDU
ODU
))
RSL
ODU
IDU
To establish a radio link, we need to configure / monitor the following:

1. TX / RX frequencies set on every radio
2. RSL Received Signal [dBm]
3. MSE Mean Square Error [dB] (see MSE PPS)
4. Max. TSL Max. allowed Transmission Signal [dBm]
5. Monitored TSL Actual Transmission level [dBm]
6. IF Interface Enable / Disable
7. Link ID must be the same on both ends
8. ATPC ON / OFF avoiding co-interferences caused by nearby antennas
9. MRMC Modem scripts (ACM or fixed capacity, channel & modulation)
10. Adaptive Power ON / OFF To allow max. transmission signal when ACM is ON
11. Green Mode (RFU-HP) please refer to Green Mode PPS
12. IFC in case of using Dual Receiver Radios
13. MAC Header Compression 45% higher throughput (Ceragon Proprietary)
2
PAGE 254
10/5/2010
Feature Description
(followed later with EMS Configuration Steps)
LINK ID Antenna Alignment Process

To avoid pointing the antenna to a wrong direction (when both links share the
same frequency), LINK ID can be used to alert when such action is take.
# 101
# 101
# 102
Link ID
Mismatch
# 101
Link ID Mismatch
PAGE 255
10/5/2010
LINK ID Antenna Alignment Process

Both IDUs of the same link must use the same Link ID
Otherwise, Link ID Mismatch alarm will appear in Current Alarms Window
# 101
# 101
# 102
Link ID
Mismatch
# 101
Link ID Mismatch
ATPC Adaptive Transmission Power Control

The quality of radio communication between low Power devices varies
significantly with time and environment.
This phenomenon indicates that static transmission power
power, transmission range
range,
and link quality, might not be effective in the physical world.
Static transmission set to max. may reduce lifetime of Transmitter

Side-lobes may affect nearby Receivers (image)
Main Lobe
Side Lobe
PAGE 256
10/5/2010

To address this issue, online transmission power control that adapts to
external changes is necessary.
In ATPC, each node builds a model for each of its neighbors, describing the
correlation between transmission power and link quality.
With this model, we employ a feedback-based transmission power control
algorithm to dynamically maintain individual link quality over time.

1. Enable ATPC on both sites
2. Set reference RSL (min. possible RSL to maintain the radio link)
3. ATPC on both ends establish a Feedback Channel through the radio link (1byte)
4. Transmitters will reduce power to the min. possible level
5. Power reduction stops when RSL in remote receiver reaches Ref. level
TSL Adjustments
ATPC
module
Site A
Monitored RSL
Radio
Transceiver
Radio
Radio
Receiver
Feedback
Radio
Receiver
Signal
Quality
Check
Ref. RSL
RSL
required
change
Site B
PAGE 257
10/5/2010
ATPC OFF = High Power Transmission
ATPC:
Disabled
ATPC:
Disabled
Max. TSL:
10 dBm
Max. TSL:
10 dBm
Monitored TSL:
Monitored RSL:
10 dBm
-53 dBm
Monitored TSL:
Monitored RSL:
8 dBm
-56 dBm
ATPC
module
Radio
Transceiver
Radio
Radio
Receiver
Feedback
Site A
Radio
Receiver
Signal
Quality
Check
Ref. RSL
RSL
required
change
Site B
ATPC ON =
Reduced Power, cost & long-term maintenance
ATPC:
Ref. RSL:
Enabled
-65
65 dBm
ATPC:
Ref RSL:
Ref.
Enabled
- 65 dBm
Max. TSL:
10 dBm
Max. TSL:
10 dBm
Monitored TSL:
2 dBm (before 10)
Monitored TSL:
2 dBm (before 8)
Monitored RSL:
-60 dBm (before 53)
Monitored RSL:
-63 dBm (before 56)
ATPC
module
Site A
10
Radio
Transceiver
Radio
Radio
Receiver
Feedback
Radio
Receiver
Signal
Quality
Check
Ref. RSL
RSL
required
change
Site B
PAGE 258
10/5/2010
MRMC Multi Rate Multi Coding

1. Radio capacity is determined by Channel BW, Modulation and ACM (fixed
or adaptive)
2 Non
2.
N ACM scripts
i t ((old)
ld) are still
till available
il bl tto supportt N
Non-ACM
ACM radios
di
3. ACM TX profile can be different than ACM RX profile.
4. ACM TX profile is determined by remote RX MSE performance.
5. Remote Receiver (RX) initiates ACM profile upgrade or downgrade
6 When MSE is improved above predefined threshold
6.
threshold, RX generates a
request to the remote TX to upgrade its profile.
7. If MSE degrades below a predefined threshold, RX generates a request to
the remote TX to downgrade its profile.
11
MRMC Multi Rate Multi Coding

Each ACM script has 8 profiles.
Profile Modulation
The radio capacity will be dictated by the

channel BW ((see next slide))
The lower the modulation the less sensitive
the receiver is:
QPSK
8QAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
More system gain

Bigger fade margin
128QAM
256QAM(highFEC)
At lower modulation orders the radio link will

tolerate lower RSL
S levels. For example:
256QAM(lowFEC)
With 16QAM the radio will drop at (-78dBm)

whereas with 8QAM the radio will drop at
(-82dBm)
12
PAGE 259
10/5/2010
MRMC Adaptive TX Power

Designed to work with ACM in certain scenarios to allow higher Tx power
available at lower order modulation schemes for a given modulation scheme.
When Adaptive TX is disabled:

Maximum TX power is limited by the highest modulation configured in the MRMC ACM
script.
In other words, when link suffers signal degradation, modulation may change from
256QAM to QPSK. However, Max. power will be limited to the value corresponding as
Max. TX in 256QAM.
When Adaptive TX is Enable:

When link suffers signal degradation, modulation may change from 256QAM to QPSK.
However, Max. power will increase to compensate for the signal degradation.
13
MRMC Adaptive Power = OFF
256QAM @ Monitored TSL = 18 dBm (Max.)

Signal Degradation
= Lower bit/symbol
16QAM @ MAX. TSL = 18 dBm
14
PAGE 260
10/5/2010
MRMC Adaptive Power = ON
256QAM @ Monitored TSL = 18 dBm(Max.)

Signal Degradation
= Lower bit/symbol
16QAM @ Monitored TSL = 24 dBm
15
MRMC Adaptive Power

It is essential that Operators ensure they do not breach any regulator-imposed
EIRP limitations by enabling Adaptive TX.
To better control the EIRP, users can select the required
q
class ((Power VS.
Spectrum):
Class 2
Class 4
Class 5B
Class 6A
FCC
RFU C should
h ld h
i 2.01
2 01 (or
( hi
h ) ffor proper ffunctionality
ti
lit off
RFU-C
have version
higher)
Adaptive TX Power feature.
The Effective Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP) is the apparent power transmitted towards the receiver assuming that the
signal power is radiated equally in all directions
16
PAGE 261
10/5/2010
MRMC Adaptive Power

If enabled, the maximum tx power in lower constellations is limited by the
reference class configured, as listed in the following table.
Reference Class
Reference Modulation
Class 2
Class 4
16
Class 5B
64
Class 6A
256
FCC
The Effective Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP) is the apparent power transmitted towards the receiver assuming that the
signal power is radiated equally in all directions
17
MAC Header Compression

1.
2.
3.
4
4.
No impact on User Traffic

Ceragon proprietary Mechanism
Improves the effective throughput by up to 45%
Effectiveness is reduced as the number of L2 streams is increased
MAC header compression is based on the following:

Dropping the Preamble + SFD + IFG saves 20 bytes
Dropping the Ethernet type saves 2 bytes
Adding a GFP header adds 4 bytes
In addition:
Frequently repeating SA & DA are learned
Learned DA & SA are not transmitted
A short pointer is used instead of the original 12 bytes
18
PAGE 262
10/5/2010
MAC Header Compression
L2ETHFrameSize[bytes]
19
Improved Capacity
64
45%
96
29%
128
22%
256
11%
512
5%
EMS Configuration
PAGE 263
10
10/5/2010
Radio Settings Local Radio - 1

Radio type (displayed when comm. is OK)
Spectrum Mask
FQ spacing (gap) between channels
Monitored transmission power
Monitored received signal
Monitored MSE. Required lower than (-35dB)
Displays the current XPI value
The larger the amount, the poorer the radio link
quality. Required value = zero
Radio frequencies can be set

locally or both RFUs (box
checked) when links is up
21
Radio Settings Local Radio - 2
Enable / Disable : Requires system reset
Enable / Disable
Min. target RSL (local)
Enable = no transmission
Value depends on MRMC settings
Must be identical on both IDUs
Enable on both IDUs to get maximum
throughput (500Mbps @ 56MHz)
22
PAGE 264
11
10/5/2010
Radio Settings Local Radio 3 Disabling IF
As explained in previous slide, enabling or

disabling the IF interface requires a reset
23
Radio Settings 4: IFC

(Dual Receiver Radios for Space Diversity)
Shows current connector
RSL
S Display Selector
S
RSL current monitored level
RSL current monitored level (combined)
You can measure the RSL of:

Main Antenna
Diversity Antenna
Combined signal
To calibrate the distance between both antennas, type the distance in nano0seconds
and click Apply
24
PAGE 265
12
10/5/2010
Radio Settings 5: Remote Radio
When the radio link is up, you can configure the remote radio via the radio frames:
Make sure Remote IP is available (configurable)
Remote RSL can be read
Remote TSL can be set (values depend on MRMC script)
Remote ATPC REF level
Remote Floating IP
Remote TX MUTE can be disabled (see next slide)
25
Radio Settings 5: Un-muting Remote Radio

Simplified scheme
Sit B is
Site
i NOT transmitting
t
itti
but receiver is still ON
Site A is
transmitting
Site B
Site A
26
PAGE 266
13
10/5/2010
Radio Settings 6: Radio Thresholds
These settings determine the sensitivity / tolerance for triggering:

1+1 HSB switchover
Ethernet Shutdown
PM generated alarms
27
Radio Settings 7: MRMC Configuration
We shall review this page using the following slides:

28
PAGE 267
14
10/5/2010

Scroll down to the bottom of the MRMC page to select the required link
capacity by applying one of the enclosed scripts
29

MAX. Capacity
(w/out compression)
ACM Script
CH. BW
Modulation
Spectrum
Mask
ACM is on
Spectrum
Class Type
30
PAGE 268
15
10/5/2010
31

Configure here:
Adaptive
p
Power: Enabled / Disabled
Reference Class
32
PAGE 269
16
10/5/2010
ThankYou!
training@ceragon
com
PAGE 270
17
9/19/2010
FibeAir RFU-HP
Introducing: Green Mode
Green Mode
Adjusting the power consumption is an errorless

process and designed to optimize power
consumption in normal fading environment
which is the case most of the time.
PAGE 271
9/19/2010
The HP Radios
1500HP / RFU-HP / RFU-A:
Radio
No.ofReceivers
ATPC
GreenMode
1500HP
Single RX/
DualRX
RFUHP
SingleRX
RFUA
Single RX/
DualRX
Please note
1. Green Mode is supported with IP-10 IDUs only
2. When ATPC is enabled, Green Mode cannot be enabled
3. When connected to 1500R or any other IDU and operated in lower TX power, there is
considerable reduction in power consumption according to the green scale (see
later~33Watt)
3
ATPCVS.GREENMODE
ATPC:
UsedtoreduceinterferencetootherradiosinadenseMW
Used to reduce interference to other radios in a dense MW
environment
GreenMode:
GreenModeisenvironmentallyfriendly
SavesOPEXandCAPEXthroughlowerpowerconsumption
Oncefadingbecomessevere,actslikeATPC
PAGE 272
9/19/2010
Power Consumption VS. Monitored TSL

The radio operates in fixed and
pre-defined power-consumption
states:
PowerState
MonitoredTX
Power
Consumed
power[W]
HIGH
32dBm
72Watt
MEDIUM
28dBm
45 Watt
LOW
22dBm
33 Watt
Transition between power states is

hitless and errorless !
*X<Y<Z
5
Normal ATPC
Set reference level Remote TX changes accordingly
5 dB
15
10
0
RX:41dBm
Referencelevel:40dBm
When fading occurs, both transmitters try to

compensate for the losses by increasing
transmission power while maintaining RSL as
close as possible to the Ref. level
PAGE 273
9/19/2010
GREEN MODE
Set
Set
GreenMode enable
GreenRSL limit [dBm]
setting the Green RSL to

-50dBm doesnt degrade fade
margin, as the mechanism will
increase TX power if
necessary.
15
10
5
0 dB
RX:52dBm
RX:37dBm
RX:42dBm
RX:47dBm
Green level: 50dBm
Greenlevel:
Greenlevel:
50dBm
When fading occurs, both transmitters
compare the monitored RSL with the Green
Level (Ref.). As long as RSL> Ref. there is no
need to increase the TSL.
7
GREEN MODE
Set
Set
GreenMode enable
GreenRSL limit [dBm]
setting the Green RSL to

-50dBm doesnt degrade fade
margin, as the mechanism will
increase TX power if
necessary.
15 dB
RX:50dBm
RX:52dBm
Green level: -50dBm
50dBm
When RSL drops below the Green Ref. level,
we must increase the TSL to maintain the
fade margin and avoid low sensitivity
8
PAGE 274
9/19/2010
Thank You!
PAGE 275
10/5/2010
FibeAirIP10GSeries
Configuring Interfaces
Agenda
In this presentation we shall

explain the required steps to
configure these interfaces
PAGE 276
10/5/2010
ETH
TDM
STM1
AUX
AIS
SyncE
Configuring ETH ports is discussed in previous modules:

Switch Configuration
Trunk VS. Access
Metro
M t S
Switch
it h C
Configuration
fi
ti
QoS Configuration
Interface
Rate
Functionality
Single Pipe
Managed SW / Metro
ETH 1 (SFP)
GbE
Disabled / Traffic
Disabled / Traffic
ETH 2 (RJ 45)
GbE
Disabled / Traffic
Disabled / Traffic
ETH 3 (RJ 45)
FE 10 / 100
Disabled / Protection
Disabled / Traffic / Protection
ETH 4 (RJ 45)
FE 10 / 100
Disabled / Wayside
Disabled / Traffic / Wayside
ETH 5 (RJ 45)
FE 10 / 100
Disabled / MNG
Disabled / Traffic / MNG
ETH 6 (RJ 45)
FE 10 / 100
Disabled / MNG
ETH 7 (RJ 45)
FE 10 / 100
Disabled / MNG
ETH 8 Radio
(N Type)
According to
Licensed fq.
Disabled / Traffic
Disabled / Traffic
ETH
TDM
STM1
AUX
AIS
SyncE
PAGE 277
10/5/2010
ETH
TDM
STM1
AUX
AIS
SyncE
IP-10G has 16 TDM ports + 16 additional ports when a 2nd T-Card

is installed.
Supported PHYs:
E1
DS1
Dynamic allocation:
Radio bandwidth (which may vary in ACM) is automatically allocated in the
following order:
1. High-priority TDM trails
2. Low-priority TDM trails
3. Ethernet traffic (Data + Management, QoS should be considered)
TDM trails in both sides of a link should have identical priorities.
ETH
TDM
STM1
AUX
AIS
SyncE
Standalone IDU
E1/DS1 port #n will be mapped to
radio VC#n (n=1-16).
When Trails are configured, default
mapping (above) is overwritten by Trail
Mapping.
However, if no trails are configured (all
are deleted) system will revert to the
default setting.
g
When Trail is configured and set to
Operational - TDM port is activated.
When Trail is configured but set to
Reserved - TDM port is disabled.
PAGE 278
10/5/2010
ETH
TDM
STM1
AUX
AIS
SyncE
Node Site
Up to 180 trails can be configured in a
Shelf / node
The number of Trails mapped to a
radio depends on radio capacity
(MRMC).
The maximum number of radio Trails
is 84
ETH
TDM
STM1
AUX
AIS
SyncE
The following configurations are

available:
Admin: Enable / Disable
When interface is disabled:
There is no signal transmission
Received signal is ignored
Trails previously configured to STM-1
interface will get Signal Failure
No alarms will be shown
M
Mute
t TX
TX:
Mutes the outgoing STM-1 signal, but
received signal will be used for traffic
PAGE 279
10/5/2010
ETH
TDM
STM1
AUX
AIS
SyncE
The following configurations

are available:
Clock source:
This is a reference for the outgoing
STM-1 signal:
Internal Clock
Loop
STM VC
Synch VC
Thi
hi h will
ill b
This iis th
the VC Ch
Channell which
be
used to sync the STM-1 interface
ETH
TDM
STM1
AIS Signaling in STM interface (V5)
AUX
AIS
SyncE
The system can be configured to signal

AIS at the VC level (AIS-V) in the V5
byte of the overhead.
This is meant to pro
provide
ide indications to
SDH
multiplexing equipment which may not
have the ability to detect AIS at the
payload level.
For example: signaling in outgoing V5
byte upon AIS detection at payload-level
(E1)
111111111
111111111
AIS @ E1 TS
10
AIS @ STM V5
PAGE 280
10/5/2010
ETH
TDM
STM1
AUX
AIS
SyncE
Line TX Protection Mode
STM-1/OC-3 interface transmission

behavior when in protection mode
11
ETH
TDM
STM1
AUX
AIS
SyncE
J0 trace identifier is fully supported in

both 15-byte and 1-byte modes:
An alarm will be raised when the expected
string differs from the received string (but
traffic will not be affected).
Transmit, Expected and Received strings are
provided.
If a string is defined and user changes the
length from 15 bytes to 1 byte, the first byte
will be analyzed and other bytes ignored.
The string transmitted as J2 trace identifier is
the Trail ID defined for the TDM trail mapped
to the corresponding VC-12 interface.
12
PAGE 281
10/5/2010
ETH
TDM
STM1
AUX
AIS
SyncE
Excessive BER threshold:

Specific for STM-1 interface
Signal degrade threshold:
Specific for STM-1 interface
13
ETH
TDM
STM1
AUX
AIS
SyncE
EOW may be used as a simple solution for on-site

communication between two technicians / installers / etc.
14
PAGE 282
10/5/2010
ETH
TDM
STM1
AUX
AIS
SyncE
WSC Interface
WSC interface is limited to 1628 bytes.
2.048Mbps (Wide) or 64Kbps (Narrow)
Consumes BW from the total link BW
Out of band Management using WSC:

In this case, remote system is managed using Wayside channel.
On both local & remote units, Wayside channel will be connected to management port
(using cross Ethernet cable).
WSC can be configured to "narrow capacity (~64kbps) or "wide" capacity (~2Mbps).
It is recommended to use wide WSC in order to get better management performance,
since narrow WSC might be too slow.
15
ETH
TDM
STM1
AUX
AIS
SyncE
WSC: OOB MNG in a 1+0 standalone link
At least 2 management ports are needed in a local unit:

One port for local management, and 2nd port that will be connected to Wayside port.
On remote unit, Wayside port will be connected to management port.
16
PAGE 283
10/5/2010
ETH
TDM
STM1
AUX
AIS
SyncE
WSC: OOB MNG in a 1+1 standalone IDUs
WSC port will be connected in each unit to other

available management port.
In remote site, each unit's Wayside port should be
connected to management port.
17
Active & Standby MNG

ports have 2 options to be
connected to the Host:
Using Ethernet splitter
cable connected to external
switch.
Using Protection "Patch
Panel".
ETH
TDM
STM1
AUX
AIS
SyncE
OOB MNG in a 1+1 standalone IDUs (P. Panel)
18
PAGE 284
10/5/2010
ETH
TDM
STM1
AUX
AIS
SyncE
This feature allows detection of AIS

signals in TDM traffic arriving from line
interfaces (E1/DS1, STM-1):
In case of detection, the following takes place:

Signal failure is generated at the corresponding trail this will cause the far end not to
receive a signal (including trail ID indications) and the trail status to show signal failure
and trail ID mismatch.
An indication is given to user at the proper interface. Notice that this is not a system
alarm, since the problem originates elsewhere in the Network
19
ETH
TDM
STM1
AUX
AIS
SyncE
AIS Signaling in STM interface (VC 12)

In case of signal failure at the trail outgoing from the STM-1
STM 1 interface,
interface AIS
will be transmitted at the payload of the VC-12.
This table is added automatically to

the STM
STM-1
1 page when AIS is
enabled
20
PAGE 285
10
10/5/2010
ETH
TDM
STM1
AUX
AIS
SyncE
Select Sync on slots you wish to sync the ETH ports to external source
External clock can be taken from:

TDM Line port
STM-1 VC
21
ETH
TDM
STM1
AUX
AIS
SyncE
The ETH ports will sync on this selected port/channel
22
PAGE 286
11
10/5/2010
ETH
TDM
STM1
AUX
AIS
SyncE
Please note
When selecting a Sync Source:
1. Y
1
You cannott sync ETH ports
t with
ith TDM ports
t off the
th same slot
l t
2. You can sync ETH ports with Radio Channels of any slot
23
ThankYou!
training@ceragon
com
24
PAGE 287
12
9/13/2010
FibeAirIP10GSeries
XC / SNCP / Nodal Solution
Introduction
PAGE 288
9/13/2010
SNCP (ITU- G.805)
Ring topologies provide path protection for Ethernet or TDM signals
In some scenarios additional protection is required
The IP-10G Path-Protection is based on SNCP

(Sub-network Connection Protection)
Individual E1/T1 trails will be protected by defining two separate trails, with the same
end-points, which are routed through two different paths in the network
The end-points may be line interfaces or radio VCs, so partial path protection can
provided for a trail in a network where full p
path redundancy
y topology
p gy is not
be p
available
The end-points are also referred to as branching-points
SNCP (ITU- G.805)
With Wireless SNCP, a backup VC trail

can be optionally defined for each
individual VC trail
Main Path
Protective Path
PAGE 289
9/13/2010
FibeAir IP-10 Integrated Nodal Solution

IP-10 IDU can be used as a Standalone unit (1U)
or in as a Nodal Solution
Connecting 2 IDUs requires a nodal enclosure:

Best economical future upgrade
Best flexibility for network designer
Easier to Install / Maintain / expand
The solution is modular and forms a single

unified nodal device:
Common Ethernet Switch
Common E1s Cross Connect
Single IP address
Single element to manage
FibeAir IP-10 Integrated Nodal Solution

Up to 6 units can be stacked to form single nodal device
Additional units can be added in the field as required
Additional Nodal enclosures and units can be added in the field as required without
affecting traffic
Multiple
sites
p nodes can be cascades to support
pp large
g aggregation
gg g
Stacking is done using 2RU Nodal enclosures
Each enclosure has 2 slots for hot-swappable 1RU units
Front
Nodal enclosure
Rear
PAGE 290
9/13/2010
FibeAir IP-10 Nodal Enclosures

Extension nodal enclosure
Main nodal enclosure
FibeAir IP-10 Scalable Nodal Enclosures

Payasyougrow!
PAGE 291
9/13/2010
Integrated nodal solution Main units

Units located in the bottom Nodal enclosure are acting as the main units
The main unit performs the cross-connect, switching and management functions for
all the units in the node
Mandatory active main unit can be located in any of the 2 slots

Optional standby main unit can be installed in other slot
Switchover time <50msecs for all traffic affecting functions
Integrated
g
Ethernet Switching
g
Integrated TDM cross-connect
Main unit
M
E
Native2
1+1 HSB
Expansion unit
Integrated nodal solution Expansion units

Units located in non-bottom Nodal enclosures are acting as expansion units
All interfaces of the expansion units (radio, TDM and Ethernet) are connected to the
main units
Expansion unit is fully managed through the main units
Radios in each pair of main/expansion units can be configured as either:
Dual independent 1+0 links

Single 1+1 HSB link
Single 2+0/XPIC link
Native2
1+0
Integrated
g
Ethernet Switching
g
Integrated TDM cross-connect
Native2
1+0
E
M
Main unit
Expansion unit
Native2
2+0/XPIC
M
M
Native2
1+1 HSB
PAGE 292
9/13/2010
Trail Configuration Guidelines
XC Trails Guidelines (1)

1. XC Trails can be configured only via Main unit
2 All Trails
2.
T il are transported
t
t d through
th
h main
i unit(s)
it( )
3. When Protection is enabled, configure trails to go via the Active unit
(XC Trails are automatically created on the STBY unit)
4. T-Cards (TDM / SDH) are not hot-swappable, do not extract / insert card
when IDU is powered up
5 Radio VCs must be identical on both sides of the radio link
5.
12
PAGE 293
9/13/2010

5. Creating a TDM trail automatically activates the corresponding TDM port,
therefore an alarm will display next to the relevant T-Card accommodating
the activated port(s)
7. XC Trails can be configured between:
Radio to Line
Line to Radio
Radio to Radio
8. Maximum number of Trails (SNCP Protected Ring) = 180

9 Maximum
M i
b off T
il per R
di = 84
9.
number
Trails
Radio
13

Identify Trail interfaces prior to configuration
Note that Trail configuration is Bi-Directional !
IP10
Trail traverses through here:

We shall need to define 2
interfaces
IP10
Bypass
site
Protected Trail
(Automatic)
IP10
Radio Link
14
Trail starts here:

For SNCP we shall
need to define 3
interfaces
Trail starts here:

For SNCP we shall
need to define 3
interfaces
PAGE 294
9/13/2010

Pay attention to the order of configuration:
1
2
The Trail Start/End points should

be configured first (interface #1)
IP10
IP10
3
Bypass
site
Interfaces #2 and #3 can be

configured in a random order
Protected Trail
(Automatic)
2
IP10
1
15
Standalone non-protected Trail Configuration
PAGE 295
9/13/2010
Step #1: Access Trail Page
Click on the Add button
17
Step #2: Configure 1st Interface

Click on the 1st interface connector
In this example we selected the
PDH connector.
Your next step is selecting the PDH
port number.

SDH connector
connector.
Your next step would be selecting
the VC number.
18
PAGE 296
9/13/2010
Step #3: Configure 2nd Interface

Click on the 2nd interface connector
Radio as the next interface
connector.
Your next step would be selecting
the radio channel number.
Alternatively you could choose other combinations as well:

PDH to PDH
PDH to Radio (above)
PDH to SDH
SDH to Radio
SDH to Radio
Radio to SDH
Radio to PDH
19
Step #4: Configure Trail Attributes

Make sure Trail ID is unique and identical on all sites/trails
20
PAGE 297
10
9/13/2010
Step #5: Trail Verification

If your settings are correct, trail alarms should disappear, trail path is ready to be tested
21
SNCP Trail Configuration in a Node
PAGE 298
11
9/13/2010
Selecting Main IDU for Trail Configuration

In the following example we assume every node has 2 IDUs installed in a
Main Enclosure
Make sure your Main unit is selected on every Node-EMS
Enable Protection when you configure the Trails (excluding Bypass Nodes)
Trail ID should unique and identical on all nodes
23
SNCP Trail in Nodal Architecture

PDH interface
Bypass
Node
IP10
IP10
IP10
SDH interface
24
PAGE 299
12
9/13/2010
1st Node
PDH interface
IP10
IP10
Bypass
site
Radio CH #1
Radio CH #26
IP10
SDH iinterface
t f
#1
25
Bypass Node
PDH interface
Radio CH #48
IP10
Bypass
Node
IP10
Radio CH #1
IP10
SDH iinterface
t f
26
PAGE 300
13
9/13/2010
3rd Node
Radio CH #48
PDH interface
IP10
Bypass
site
IP10
Radio CH #26
IP10
SDH interface
27
Radio Capacity Calculation
PAGE 301
14
9/13/2010

Ethernet capacity (a.k.a. Ethernet L1 capacity) - Total bit rate from an
Ethernet user port. Taking into account the full Ethernet frame including the
IFG and
d preamble
bl fifields.
ld Eth
Ethernett capacity
it iis sometimes
ti
referred
f
d tto as ""portt
utilization rate".
Ethernet L2 capacity - Total bit rate of net Ethernet frames running over
the Ethernet user port. Taking into account the Ethernet frame without the
IFG and preamble fields.
Radio throughput
by
g p - Total bit rate supported
pp
y the radio link running
g in a
specific channel/modulation including radio frame overhead, etc.
29

3.5 MHz
P fil
Profile
M d l ti
Modulation
Mi i
Minimum
M # off Ethernet
Max
Eth
t capacity
it
Eth
Ethernet
t L2
(Mbps)
capacity (Mbps)
license
E1s
10
4
13.60
10.36
25
6
20.14
15.35
Frames per
F
seconds
2
4
16 QAM
64 QAM
Minimum
Max # of Ethernet capacity Ethernet L2
(Mbps)
capacity (Mbps)
license
E1s
QPSK
10
4
13 42
13.42
10 23
10.23
8 PSK
25
6
20.18
15.38
16 QAM
25
8
27.87
21.24
32 QAM
25
10
34.48
26.27
64 QAM
25
12
40.44
30.81
128 QAM
50
13
46.60
35.50
256 QAM
50
16
54.53
41.55
256 QAM
50
17
57.38
43.72
Frames per
seconds
20233.77
29974.03
R di
Radio
Throughput
(Mbps)
10.50
15.00
7 MHz
Profile
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
30
Modulation
19976 45
19976.45
30034.94
41475.26
51304.87
60175.21
69339.64
81151.77
85389.21
Radio
Throughput
(Mbps)
10 38
10.38
15.03
20.31
24.85
28.95
33.19
38.64
40.60
PAGE 302
15
9/13/2010

14 MHz
Profile
Modulation
Minimum
Number of Ethernet capacity
Ethernet L2
(Mbps)
capacity (Mbps)
license
25
8
28.90
22.02
25
12
40.90
31.16
50
18
60.36
45.99
50
20
70.35
53.60
50
24
81.78
62.31
100
29
98.43
74.99
100
34
115.15
87.73
100
37
124.52
94.87
Frames per
seconds
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
QPSK
8 PSK
16 QAM
32 QAM
64 QAM
128 QAM
256 QAM
256 QAM
Modulation Minimum required Number of Ethernet capacity

Ethernet L2
capacity
it lilicense supportt E1s
E1
(Mb )
(Mbps)
capacity
it (Mb
(Mbps))
Frames per
seconds
d
43001.18
60857.98
89823.89
104693.80
121693.09
146471.17
171347.98
185297.74
Radio
Throughput
(Mbps)
21.02
29.27
42.65
49.52
57.37
68.82
80.31
86.76
28 MHz
Profile
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
QPSK
8 PSK
16 QAM
32 QAM
64 QAM
128 QAM
256 QAM
256 QAM
50
50
100
100
150
150
200
200
17
23
33
44
55
68
76
80
57.86
77.86
111.32
150.76
187.55
228.81
254.71
268.45
44.08
59.32
84.81
114.87
142.90
174.33
194.07
204.53
86099.43
115860.75
165648.63
224346.79
279093.55
340488.46
379034.79
399476.94
Radio
Throughput
Th
h t
(Mbps)
40.93
54.68
77.68
104.80
130.09
158.46
176.27
185.71
31

40 MHz
Profile
Modulation
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
QPSK
8 PSK
16 QAM
32 QAM
64 QAM
128 QAM
256 QAM
256 QAM
Minimum
(Mbps)
capacity (Mbps)
license
50
23
79 64
79.64
60 68
60.68
100
35
119.11
90.75
100
51
174.14
132.68
150
65
218.49
166.47
150
81
273.67
208.51
200
84
305.49
232.76
200
84
346.84
264.26
300
84
369.96
281.87
Frames per
seconds
Minimum
i d capacity
it supportt E1s
E1
(Mb )
it (Mb
required
(Mbps)
capacity
(Mbps))
license
100
32
108.86
82.94
100
48
163.37
124.48
150
64
216.60
165.03
200
84
288.50
219.81
300
84
358.49
273.14
300
84
430.43
327.95
400
84
489.77
373.16
400
84
531.82
405.20
Frames per
d
seconds
118506 13
118506.13
177239.65
259136.72
325132.27
407254.05
454605.63
516135.41
550529.12
Radio
Throughput
(Mbps)
55 90
55.90
83.04
120.87
151.36
189.30
211.18
239.61
255.50
56 MHz
Profile
Modulation
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
QPSK
8 PSK
16 QAM
32 QAM
64 QAM
128 QAM
256 QAM
256 QAM
32
161994.37
243116.10
322318.52
429314.58
533473.73
640527.34
728824.51
791403.86
Radio
Th
h t
Throughput
(Mbps)
75.99
113.47
150.06
199.50
247.62
297.08
337.87
366.78
PAGE 303
16
9/13/2010
Radio & PDH Capacity VS. Channel - FCC

10MHz
ACM
Point
Modulation
# of
E1s
Ethernet
Capacity
(Mbps)
ACM
Point
Modulation
# of
E1s
Ethernet
Capacity
(Mbps)
QPSK
13 18
QPSK
16
28 - 40
8 PSK
10
19 27
8 PSK
22
39 - 56
57 - 81
16 QAM
16
28 40
16 QAM
32
32 QAM
18
32 46
32 QAM
38
67 - 96
64 QAM
24
42 61
64 QAM
52
93 - 133
128 QAM
28
50 71
128 QAM
58
102 - 146
256 QAM
30
54 78
256 QAM
67
118 - 169
256 QAM
33
60 85
256 QAM
73
129 - 185
30MHz
ACM
Point
20MHz
40MHz
Modulation
# of
E1s
Ethernet
Capacity
(Mbps)
ACM
Point
50MHz
Modulatio
n
# of
E1s
Ethernet
Capacity
(Mbps)
ACM
Point
Modulation
# of
E1s
Ethernet
Capacity
(Mbps)
QPSK
Q
22
39 - 55
QPSK
31
56 - 80
QPSK
37
3
65 - 93
8 PSK
35
62 - 89
8 PSK
46
82 - 117
8 PSK
59
105 - 150
16 QAM
52
93 - 133
16 QAM
69
122 - 174
16 QAM
74
131 - 188
32 QAM
68
120 - 171
32 QAM
84
153 - 219
32 QAM
84
167 - 239
64 QAM
80
142 - 202
64 QAM
84
188 - 269
64 QAM
84
221 - 315
128 QAM
84
164 - 235
128 QAM
84
214 - 305
128 QAM
84
264 - 377
256 QAM
84
185 - 264
256 QAM
84
239 - 342
256 QAM
84
313 - 448
256 QAM
84
204 - 292
256 QAM
84
262 - 374
256 QAM
84
337 - 482
Ethernet capacity depends on average packet size

33
ThankYou!
training@ceragon
com
34
PAGE 304
17
4/30/2010
FibeAir IP-10 Series

Automatic State Propagation
Agenda
Introduction
Interfacing IP-10 with external devices
VS. Functionality
Configuration VS
Dead Lock Example
ASP in Managed / Metro Mode
PAGE 305
4/30/2010
Introduction
Automatic State Propagation ("GigE Tx mute override") enables propagation of radio
failures back to the line, to improve the recovery performance of resiliency protocols
(such as xSTP).
The feature allows the user to configure which criteria will force GbE port (or ports in case
of remote fault) to be muted / shut down, in order to allow the network find alternative
paths.
The feature is not operational in "External Protection".
Radio LOF
Needtofind
alternativepath

When external devices do not support Fault Propagation
Configure the following:
1. Enable Local LOC - to mute local GbE when LOC is raised
2. Enable Remote Fault to mute local transmitter in case of remote LOF / Link ID
mismatch & LOC
3. Enable Local Excessive BER recommended but not necessary
PAGE 306
4/30/2010

When external devices support Fault Propagation (another IP-10)
Configure the following:
1. Disable Local LOC
2. Enable Remote Fault to mute local transmitter in case of remote LOF / Link ID
mismatch & LOC
3. Disable Local Excessive BER - to avoid a dead lock scenario
Example: Avoiding Dead Lock in Single Pipe

Site A
Site B
TX
RX
RX
TX
1. GbE FO breaks down or disconnects at the ingress port of Site A
PAGE 307
4/30/2010

Site A
Site B
TX
RX
RX
TX
LOC

2. LOC alarm is raised

Site A
Site B
TX
RX
RX
LOC
TX

3. LOC alarm triggers Site A to shut down its transmitter (TX Mute)
PAGE 308
4/30/2010

Site A
Site B
TX
LOC
RX
RX
LOC
TX

4. Site B detects silence on ingress port and declares LOC

Site A
Site B
TX
LOC
RX
RX
LOC
TX

4. Site B detects silence on ingress port and declares LOC
5. Site B shuts down its transmitter both sites are in a state of a dead lock
10
PAGE 309
4/30/2010
Automatic State Propagation in Single Pipe
11
Single Pipe - Propagation Criteria

Local and remote IDUs must
have identical settings:
Using Optical GbE (SFP)
1.
2.
3.
LocalCriteria:
Local
Criteria:
LOC(GbE)
RadioLOF
LINKIDMismatch
ExcessiveBER
ACMprofileisbelowthreshold
Actions:
Muteport1(GbESFP)
12
ASP Enabled
ACM profile threshold
Excessive BER enabled
Actions:
Muteport1(GbESFP)
PAGE 310
4/30/2010

Using Electrical GbE (RJ45)
1.
2.
3.
LLocalCriteria:
l C it i
RadioLOF
LINKIDMismatch
ExcessiveBER
Actions:
ShutdownElec.
port
13
ASP Enabled
Actions:
ShutdownElec.
port

Using Electrical GbE (RJ45)
1.
2.
3.
LocalGbE Criteria:
LOC
ASP Enabled
Portt is
P
i logically
l i ll closed
l
db
butt nott
shut down
LOC will not trigger port shut
down (it will not be possible to
enable the port when LOC is
cleared)
14
Remote LOC will not trigger

port shut down (it will not be
possible to enable the port
when LOC is cleared)
PAGE 311
4/30/2010
Automatic State Propagation in Managed / Metro Mode
15
ASP in Managed / Metro Mode

Alarms are never propagated to a GbE port
GbE will never shut down
Alarms will be propagated to the Radio port
In 1+1 external protection, ASP is disabled.
16
PAGE 312
4/30/2010
Managed / Metro - Propagation Criteria

1.
2.
3.
ASP Enabled
LocalCriteria:
RadioLOF
LINKIDMismatch
ExcessiveBER
8
Actions:
ShutdownRadio
17
Managed / Metro - Propagation Criteria

1.
2.
3.
Localcriteria:
GbE LOC
18
ASP Enabled
8
Actions:
Noactiontaken
ShutdownRadio
PAGE 313
4/30/2010
ThankYou!
training@ceragon
com
19
PAGE 314
10
LinkAggregation
(IEEE802.3ad)
Agenda
Agenda
Definition
Advantages
Feature Review
Applications
Load Balance Example
PAGE 315

IEEE Definition:
Link Aggregation allows one or more links to be aggregated

together to form a Link Aggregation Group
Group, such that a MAC
Client can treat the Link Aggregation Group as if it were a
single link
N
The Link Aggregation Group is consisting of N parallel

instances of full duplex point-to-point links operating at the
same data rate
Traffic
T ffi sentt tto th
the ports
t iin such
h a group iis di
distributed
t ib t d th
through
h
a load balancing function
Advantages
g
PAGE 316
Benefits of using Link Aggregation

1. Increased aggregate bandwidth
Link Aggregation allows the establishment of full duplex point-to-point links
that have a higher aggregate bandwidth than the individual links that form the
aggregation.
The capacity of the multiple links is combined into one logical link.
100 Mbps

2. Improved Resiliency
In case of a failed link, remaining links take over utilization of new available BW
Traffic via LAG is distributed according to users policy improved reliability
PAGE 317

3. Reduced Complexity & Administration
When multiple ports are allocated between two ETH switches, broadcast storms are
created due to p
physical
y
loops.
p STP is required
q
to eliminate loops
p by
y blocking
g the redundant
port.
When multiple ports are allocated between 2 Routers, Routing Protocols are required to
control traffic paths.
With LA STP or routing protocols are not needed, therefore, less processing is involved.
STP requires blocking and

path cost calculations

4. Reduced Cost
Instead of utilizing an expensive GbE port(s) to transport 200Mbps
>> we trunk N x FE ports
PAGE 318

5. Improved Network Efficiency / Security
For sites with limited IP address space that nevertheless require large amounts of
bandwidth, you need only one IP address for a large aggregation of interfaces.
For sites that need to hide the existence of internal interfaces, the IP address of
the aggregation hides its interfaces from external applications.
(These examples refer to using L2 topologies as well)
Multiple
Interfaces
Single
Interface
Customer
Network
9
Public
Network
FeatureReview
PAGE 319
LAG Distribution Policy

Traffic sent to ports in a group is distributed through a load balancing function.
Two methods are available for Link Aggregation Group traffic distribution:
1. Simple XOR:
In this method the 3 LSBs of DA and SA are XORed and the result is used to select
one of the ports in the group.
This method can be used for testing & debugging.
2. Hash (default):
In this method the hash function (used by the traffic switch for address table lookups)
is used to select one of the ports in the group.
This provides better statistical load balancing.
11
LAG Distribution: Simple XOR

We can easily demo balanced traffic distribution using the XOR method
(Configure your Traffic Generator with the following MACs)
12
Stream
MAC(HEX)
Last3 bits
XORresult
AssignedLAGPort
SA>
>DA
00:20:8f:0a:02:01
00:20:8f:0a:01:01
001
001
000(0)
Link#1
SA>
>DA
00:20:8f:0a:02:02
00:20:8f:0a:01:02
010
010
000 (0)
Link#1
SA>
>DA
00:20:8f:0a:02:03
00:20:8f:0a:01:03
011
011
000 (0)
Link#1
SA >
SA>
>DA
00:20:8f:0b:e1:03
00:20:8f:0a:e1:04
011
100
111(5)
Link#2
SA>
>DA
00:20:8f:0b:e1:03
00:20:8f:0a:e1:01
011
001
010 (2)
Link#3
SA>
>DA
00:20:8f:0b:e1:07
00:20:8f:0a:e1:04
111
100
011(3)
Link#4
PAGE 320
Static LAG guidelines

1. Only traffic ports (including radio port) can belong to a LAG
2. Management ports / WSC ports cannot be grouped in a LAG
3. LAG is supported in IDUs configured as Managed or Metro switch
4. LAG is not supported in a Single Pipe mode
5. All ports in a LAG must be in the same IDU (same switch)
6. There may be up to 3 LAGs per IDU
7. A LAG may contain from 1 to 5 physical ports
13
Static LAG guidelines (continued)

8. LAGs are virtual ports that do not permanently exist in the system
9 When a LAG is created,
9.
created it will automatically inherit all the ports
ports
characteristics, except for the following:
xSTP role (edge, non-edge)

path cost
10. The LAG will initially receive default values for these parameters
11. Dynamic Link Aggregation (LACP) is not supported
14
PAGE 321
Grouping ports in LAG

Ports 1-2 (GBE ports) and ports 3-7 (FE only ports) cannot be in the same LAG
group even if the GBE ports are configured as 100Mbps.
GbE
FE
GbE
FE
IP-10 IDU
15
IP-10 IDU

Radio port (port 8) may be in a LAG with the GBE ports only
GbE
FE
GbE
FE
IP-10 IDU
16
8
IP-10 IDU
PAGE 322
Applications
pp

Multiple PHYs are grouped together to support a higher capacity PHY.
Grouped ports are known as LAG Link Aggregation Group.
Stackable
(Nodal) Site
Multiple Radio System

implemented with LAG
Standalone Site
Single Pipe
1
GbE
PHY
Multiple FE
ports as a LAG
GbE
PHY
18
Port #2 and Radio

form a LAG
PAGE 323
1+0 LAG
1
Static LAG
3rd party
Switch or Router
Dual (redundant) GbE interfaces facing the Switch/Router

Static Link Aggregation Group (or equivalent) configured on the Switch/Router
interfaces connected to the IP-10
Any failure in the local GbE interfaces will be handled by the link aggregation mechanism
19
1+1 HSB W/O LAG
3rd party
Switch or Router
1+1 HSB or
2+0 Multi-Radio
No need for LAG
Single GE interfacing a 3rd party Switch/Router

O ti l splitter/combiner
Optical
litt /
bi
iis used
d tto connectt tto each
h off th
the IP
IP-10
10 GbE interfaces
i t f
in
i
(1+1) protected configuration
STBY IP-10 GbE interface is disabled
MW Radio link switchovers are transparent to Switch/Router
(traffic interruption <50mSecs)
20
10
PAGE 324
1+1 HSB With LAG
3rd party
Switch or Router
No need for LAG

1+1 HSB or
2+0 Multi-Radio
Static LAG
Dual (redundant) GE interfaces facing the 3rd party Switch/Router
Static Link Aggregation Group (or equivalent) is configured on the Switch/Router
interfaces connected to the IP-10 units
STBY IP-10 disables its Ethernet interface towards the Switch/Router
As a result, the Switch/Router sends all traffic over the Ethernet interface connected to
the active IP-10
Any failure detected in radio link or Ethernet interface will trigger a switch-over to the
back-up unit with <50msecs traffic interruption on the radio link
The Switch/Router detects the switch-over and start sending traffic over the interface
connected to the new active unit only
21
1+1 HSB With dual GbE + LAG

1+1 HSB or
2+0 Multi-Radio
Static LAG
Static LAG
3rd party
Switch or Router
Static LAG
Dual (redundant) GE interface to the Switch/Router

Static Link Aggregation Group (or equivalent) is configured on the Switch/Router
interfaces connected to the IP-10s
Static Link Aggregation Group (or equivalent) is configured on the IP-10
2 optical splitter/combiners are used to connect each of the 2 interfaces on the
Switch/Router to each of the corresponding interfaces on the IP-10s
22
11
PAGE 325
1+1 HSB With dual GbE + LAG (cont.)

1+1 HSB or
2+0 Multi-Radio
Static LAG
Static LAG
3rd party
Switch or Router
Static LAG
STBY IP-10 disables its Ethernet interface towards the Switch/Router

Any failure detected in radio link or equipment will trigger switch-over to the back-up
IP- 10 unit with <50msecs traffic interruption on the radio link
Any failure in the local GbE interfaces will be handled by the link aggregation
mechanism without triggering switch-over to the back-up IP-10 unit!
23
LoadBalanceExample
p
12
PAGE 326
Load balance example

P
GbE
PHY
50%
50%
Port #2 and Radio
form a LAG
IDU #2 is configured as Single Pipe

IDU #1 is configured as Managed Switch to support LAG
Traffic injected via GbE port #1 is distributed evenly between Port #2 & Port #8
Port #2 is linked to a Pipe IDU, hence, a Multi-Radio system is achieved:
GbE port #1 = (50% via Radio #1) + (50% via Radio #2)
25

2) Alarm is
propagated
3) Port 1 is
shut down
P
S
GbE
PHY
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
4) Port 2 is out
of the LAG
Radio #2 encounters a signal degradation

Since ASP is
Si
i enabled,
bl d the
th alarm
l
iis propagated
t d tto portt #1
IDU #1 detects the alarms and shuts down port #2
Port #2 is not part of the LAG
Radio #1 takes full control (100%) of traffic
Enable Automatic State Propagation on both IDUs
26
13
PAGE 327
1) Link
Degradation
X
50%
100%
5) Radio 1
takes 100%

Shut down
64QAM
P
GbE
PHY
X
50%
256QAM
100%
100%
To improve system resiliency, Automatic State Propagation can shut down the
LAG interface when ACM degrades below a pre-determined profile.
27
ThankYou!
28
14
PAGE 328
LinkAggregationGroupConfiguration
(IEEE802.3ad)
Agenda
Agenda
Guidelines Review
EMS Configuration
Using PM (RMON)
PAGE 329
Static LAG guidelines

1. Only traffic ports (including radio port) can belong to a LAG
2. Management ports / WSC ports cannot be grouped in a LAG
3. LAG is supported in IDUs configured as Managed or Metro switch
4. LAG is not supported in a Single Pipe mode
5. All ports in a LAG must be in the same IDU (same switch)
6. There may be up to 3 LAGs per IDU
7. A LAG may contain from 1 to 5 physical ports
Static LAG guidelines (continued)

8. LAGs are virtual ports that do not permanently exist in the system
9 When a LAG is created,
9.
created it will automatically inherit all the ports
ports
characteristics, except for the following:
xSTP role (edge, non-edge)

path cost
10. The LAG will initially receive default values for these parameters
11. Dynamic Link Aggregation (LACP) is not supported
PAGE 330

Ports 1-2 (GBE ports) and ports 3-7 (FE only ports) cannot be in the same LAG
group even if the GBE ports are configured as 100Mbps.
GbE
FE
GbE
FE
IP-10 IDU
IP-10 IDU
Grouping ports in LAG (continued)

Radio port (port 8) may be in a LAG with the GBE ports only
GbE
FE
GbE
FE
IP-10 IDU
8
IP-10 IDU
PAGE 331
Configuring LAG
The following settings must be identical on all LAG ports
(Port(s) with different settings will not be added to the LAG)
QoS configuration (Classification Criteria, Port ReMap table, Egress Scheduler)

Speed (data rate)
Type (access/trunk or CN/PN)
interface (electrical/optical)
Full Duplex
Auto-Negotiation
VLANs
VLAN list must be identical
all is considered a different value (must be equal in all ports)
allow
allow all
Port Learning State
Please note - ports with CFM MEP/MIPs will not be added to a LAG (which may
have its own MEP/MIPs).
Configuring LAG (continued)

The following parameters CANNOT be configured on ports that are already
grouped in a LAG:
Admin status
Flow control
Ingress rate limiting Policer name
Shaper (egress rate limiting)
Peer port parameters
MAC address
IP address
Slot ID
Port number
Description
PAGE 332
Removing a Port from LAG

Ports removed from a LAG will keep the existing port parameters, but will
be initially disabled in order to prevent loops.
In addition, when the last port is removed from a LAG, the LAG will be
deleted.
Therefore it is necessary to remove all MEP/MIPs from a LAG before

removing the last port.
EMSConfiguration
g
PAGE 333
Setting Load Balance Policy

Open page:
Configuration
g
/ Ethernet Switch
Select Simple XOR for demos or
lab test or HASH for real traffic
Create VLAN(s) per service(s) in
the switch DB (if such VID do not
exist yet)
11
Creating LAG
1. Go to Configuration / Interfaces / Ethernet Ports
2. Click on Create LAG
12
PAGE 334
Selecting ports to LAG

Select the LAG ports and group ID
Available ports highlight in blue when selected

Non-available ports (part of an existing LAG) are not configurable
13
Removing ports from existing LAG

1. At the bottom of the Ethernet Ports page you should see the LAG as a
new interface with its members listed as well
2 Click
2.
Cli k on thi
this link
li k to
t modify
dif the
th LAG ((add/remove)
dd/
)
14
PAGE 335
Troubleshooting
1. When adding ports to LAG fails, the reasons might be:
2.
3.
4.
5.
QoS mismatch
VLAN membership mismatch
Physical properties mismatch (auto-neg, speed, flow control etc.)
Service OAM mismatch
Check the Ethernet Ports, QoS & Service OAM pages and compare these
parameters if problem continues
15
Example
1.
2.
3.
4
4.
5.
6.
We generate a data stream through GbE SFP port 1 of both lower IDUs
Port 2 & 8 form a LAG on both sites
Upper IDUs are set as Pipe
Traffic will be evenly distributed among the radio ports
Assign Radio license > Line rate
Clear all PM data
Data stream
Data stream
PAGE 336
Using RMON (PM) to analyze LAG

Make note of received &
transmitted traffic through port 1
Please note:
Slight differences may appear
since EMS is a web based
application and data is
accumulating
Data stream

Check the received & sent
registers of port 1 and LAG
ports:
Data received on Port 1 is
equally distributed through
Port 2 and Port 8
+
=
PAGE 337

Disconnect the ETH cable
connecting lower IDU to
upper IDU (port 2)
LAG p
port 2 does not
transmit data now
Port 8 takes 100% of data
transmission
ThankYou!
20
10
PAGE 338
10/5/2010
IP-10G
XPIC: Introduction & Configuration
Avner Baruch
Guidelines
1. XPIC is supported with IP-10G IDUs in version 6.6.1 and higher
2. XPIC can only be configured in a node:
slots 1+2 and/or slots 3+4 and/or slots 5+6
3. IDU license determines the allowed script and link capacity
4. Identical configuration should be used in all IDUs participating in a link:
XPIC Script
Frequencies
SW version (IDU, ODU)
HW version (IDU, ODU)
Protection is disabled
If any of these conditions is not met, an

alarm will alert user. In addition, events will
inform user of which conditions are not met.
PAGE 339
10/5/2010
Introduction
Introduction
Two data channels are transmitted & received over the same frequency on dual
polarization (H & V)
C
Crosstalk
t lk between
b t
the
th polarizations
l i ti
d
due tto iimperfect
f t antenna
t
iisolation
l ti and
d
channel degradation can be effectively cancelled at the receiver using XPIC Cross Polarization Interference Cancellation/Canceller
* Ideal solution for frequency- crowded areas
PAGE 340
10/5/2010
Decoding the received signal

Both IDUs on each site communicate through the Backplane of the Nodal
Enclosure
Nodal Enclosure
Nodal Enclosure
Decoding the H signal

Each IDU accommodates 2 modems (Master and Slave)
In each site, the Main IDU communicates with the Mate IDU via the backplane
The Master modem (V) sends its signal (V) to the Mate Slave
The Mate Slave pproduces the interference signal
g
((v)) and sends it to its H-Master
Transmitter
H
H+v HMaster
Mate IDU
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
VMaster
V+h VMaster
backplane
Main IDU
backplane
HMaster
Receiver
H
PAGE 341
10/5/2010
Decoding the H signal - continued

By knowing the interference level (v), the Master Modem (H) can demodulate the
received horizontal signal (H)
The vertical channel is decoded similarly
Transmitter
H+v HMaster
Mate IDU
backplane
HMaster
Receiver
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Main IDU
VMaster
7
V+h VMaster
backplane
XPIC Recovery Mechanism

The main purpose of the Recovery Mechanism is to recover link availability
due to hardware problem rather than fading issues
The recovery mechanism maintains a working link while attempting to recover

the faulty polarization
The mechanism applies periodic attempts to mute the problematic remote

transmitter
The time between one attempt and another is exponentially increased to

avoid unnecessary TX Mute when interference is temporary (allowing
sufficient to recover)
At the end of the process, if the problem still exists, the problematic link will
be permanently muted unless the user manually un-mutes it
PAGE 342
10/5/2010
XPIC Recovery Mechanism

The indication to entry the recovery mechanism is a loss of modem
preamble lock, which takes place at SNR~10dB
The number of Mute/Un-mute attempts is user-configurable:

1.Recovery attempt time
2.Initial time between attempts
3.Multiplication factor for attempt time
4.Number of retries
5.Enable / Disable
Users are advised to maintain Factory Defaults
Please Note:
Every recovery attempt will cause a brief traffic hit in the working link
9
2+0 2U Setup
2 IDUs are installed in each node using an enclosure shelf
We assume slot 1 is using Vertical polarization and slot 2 Horizontal polarization
V+h
Each node includes
h/v
2 x RFU-C
Coupler
Dual pole antenna
H+v
10
v
PAGE 343
10/5/2010
6+0 2U Setup
6 IDUs are installed in each node using enclosure shelves
Possible configurations:
Sl
Slott 1 + slot
l t2
slot 3 + slot 4
slot 5 + slot 6
11
EMS Configuration
PAGE 344
10/5/2010
Logging in
Extension
Main
1. Log in to the EMS

2. Execute the following steps to Main IDU and
E t
i IDU on b
th ends
d off th
k
Extension
both
the lilink
3. When configuring an IDU, make sure the relevant

unit is selected (a black line will highlight selected IDU)
13
Versions
Check that your IDUs and ODUs are installed with the required version
(6.6.1 or higher)
14
PAGE 345
10/5/2010
XPIC Script
Apply the required script to both IDUs (Main & Ext.) on both ends:
1. Expand the + icon next to the script in the MRMC Table
2 Click the Apply
2.
Apply button
3. IDU will automatically restart to apply the new script
15
XPIC Script - 2
When IDUs complete the reset process, verify XPIC script is successfully
assigned.
16
PAGE 346
10/5/2010
XPIC Configured
Verify Main View in GUI shows
17
icon next to IDUs
Radio Parameters
1. Verify that no alarms exist in the system.
2. Clear the defected blocks counter and verify that there are no errors in the
system.
3. Read the MSE and XPI and verifyy that theyy fit the link design
g ((if no values
are defined, verify that they are below -34dB and above 25dB, respectively).
18
PAGE 347
10/5/2010
Radio Parameters scroll down to bottom of page

Configure Radio Parameters and verify both links (H+V) are operational
19
Troubleshooting
PAGE 348
10
10/5/2010
Link Commissioning
1. Make sure IF Cables are identical in length (H and V)
2. Commission the H link as a single link system with V channel muted,
verify RSL and MSE are as expected
3. Commission the V link as a single link system with H channel muted,

verify RSL and MSE are as expected
4. Check stability of RSL readings

5. Upon confirming the above steps, proceed to configure XPIC as explained
in previous slides
21
Improving XPI Levels

When XPI levels < 25, antenna feeders need to be re-aligned.
One of the parameters that impacts the XPI is the antenna XPD
(Cross Polarization Discrimination)
In the following steps, we shall measure the antenna XPD to determine the
XPD of each antenna
1.
2.
3.
Mute H transmitters on both ends: H link is irrelevant now

Measure RSL on H receivers: we measure the v interference now
Measure RSL on V receivers calculate the difference between V and H
TX = OFF
In this example, the XPD is
not good enough:
The difference is only 20dB
We need to aim for a bigger
difference (better XPI)
22
TX = OFF
RSL = -70dBm
70dBm
RSL = -50dBm
H
v
H
v
PAGE 349
11
10/5/2010
Improving XPI Levels

4. Re-align the antenna feeders to read a bigger difference:
RSLH RSLV > 25dB

5. Un-mute the H transmitters
6. Repeat steps 1-4 for the V link
TX = OFF
In this example, the XPD is
much better:
The difference 28dB
That means, XPI = 28dB
23
TX = OFF
78dBm
RSL = -78dBm
RSL = -50dBm
H
v
H
v
XPIC Events (EMS Event Log)

During the XPIC mechanism, events are displayed in the EMS Event log to
allow detailed description and effective troubleshooting
Various cases are encoded as a single event with a bitmask code

Event title = Insufficient conditions for XPIC
Bitmask Codes -
24
PAGE 350
12
10/5/2010
XPIC Events (EMS Event Log)

The following events indicate changes in the XPIC state:
25
Remote TX Mute (try # n) was Set by XPIC Recovery on Slot # n

Remote TX Un-mute (try # n ) was Set by XPIC Recovery on Slot # n
XPIC Recovery Started on Slot # n
XPIC Recovery Finished Successfully on Slot # n
XPIC Recovery Finished Unsuccessfully on Slot # n. Remote Mute was Set
XPIC Recovery on Slot # n Stopped Due to an External Event
XPIC Recovery (XRSM) was disabled
XPIC Recoveryy (XRSM)
(
) was enabled
XPIC Events (EMS Event Log) - Example
26
PAGE 351
13
10/5/2010
XPIC Performance Monitoring
27
Thank You!
Should you require further information, please contact us at
PAGE 352
14
8/12/2010
FibeAir IP10G
HSB / 1+1 Protection
Agenda
GeneralGuidelines
Protection Panel
ProtectionPanel
IntroductiontoExternalProtection
IntroductiontoShelfProtection
FloatingIP
EMSGUIConfiguration
ExternalProtectionProcess:1+1fromscratch
ExternalProtectionProcess:Upgrading1+0to1+1
Troubleshooting
Everybody needs Protection

2
PAGE 353
8/12/2010
General Guidelines
1. A Standby IDU is referred to as the Mate
2. When a switchover occurs, the Active IDU becomes Standby and the
Standby
Standby IDU becomes Active
Active
3. Accessing a Mate IDU can only be done via the Active IDU
4. Accessing the "Active" IDUs is achieved via unique IP addresses or via
Floating IP (supported only with IP-10G)
5. Y-Split cables must be used for Ethernet signals (fiber optics)
6. ETH Cross Cable (Protection Cable) is used to connect the protection ports
of both IDUs:
With IP-10 - use ports number 4
With IP-10G in a standalone mode use the dedicated PROT port
Protection Panel
low
high
Active
Active
Coupler
Coupler
Mate
Mate
high
low
A Protection Panel (green) can be installed

between Active & Mate to allow a single
connection to customers DDF.
Active
The Protection Panel has E1/DS1

connectors to support simultaneous
connectivity to IDUs and DDF.
Mate
PAGE 354
8/12/2010
External Protection
Achieved by using two standalone IDUs
The IDUs must be connected by an Ethernet Cross cable (dedicated protection ports)
Each IDU must have a unique IP address
Protection Panel may be in use (supports TDM only)
high
low
Coupler
Coupler
high
low
Shelf Protection
When enabling a Shelf Protection, the following rules should be applied:
Shelf backplane replaces the external Protection Cable
Never insert or extract an IDU while powered up
Always secure IDUs to shelf enclosure with provided screws
Protection can be enabled in each pair (1+2, 3+4, 5+6)
IDU in slot 1 & 2 must have a unique IP address
6 Mate
Standalone
5 Active
Example:
4 Mate
4Mate
Standalone
3 Active
2Mate
Standalone
1Active
Protected node
6
Unprotected site
PAGE 355
8/12/2010
Floating IP
The Floating IP address feature is meant to provide a single IP address that will
always give direct access to the current active main unit.
1.
2
2.
3.
4.
The Floating IP and Unique IDU IPs must be in the same subnet
The Floating IP and Unique IDU IPs are user
user-configurable
configurable
The Floating IP is copied from Active to Mate (following Copy to Mate command)
When Protection is applied, the Floating IP is assigned to the STBY IDU which
becomes the Active
5. The extension IPs are irrelevant (unseen by network)
6. OSS & NMS can access all IDUs (Main and Extension) via SNMP
7. Alternatively, users may access any of the units using their local IP addresses
IDU
IDU
192.168.1.75
192.168.1.100
7
192.168.1.72
192.168.1.71
IDU
Setup Example (Standalone IDUs)
PAGE 356
8/12/2010
EMS GUI
EMS GUI
1. Configure unique IPs to slot 1 and slot 2 (when not in installed in shelf)
2. You may use a floating IP
3. Make sure all IPs are in the same subnet
10
PAGE 357
8/12/2010
EMS GUI
Select Enable and then click Apply

The IDU will block management for 60
seconds to allow setting up the correct mode
(Active or STBY)
This action is not traffic effective.
11
EMS GUI
Protection
modestatus
When2nd IDUis
properly
configuredand
connected,IP
andMACare
displayedhere
12
PAGE 358
8/12/2010
EMS GUI
Clickheretocheck
communication
withSTBYunit
13
EMS GUI
Toforceaswitchover
regardlessto2nd IDU
qualifyingstatus
changetoONandclick
Apply
14
AdminStateLock
PAGE 359
8/12/2010
EMS GUI
Torequestaswitchover
clickhere.
If2nd IDU(Mate)does
notqualifytoActive
state,requestisignored.
15
EMS GUI
Clickheretocopytheconfigurationfrom
ActivetoMate
Pleasenote
Thefollowingparametersarenot copied:
MNGmode(InBand/OOB)
InBandVLAN
Switchmode
license
16
PAGE 360
8/12/2010
Configuring external 1+1 from scratch
Configuring external 1+1 from scratch (1)

1. Set all IDUs to factory defaults
2 When
2.
Wh IDU
IDUs complete
l t th
the b
booting
ti sequence, verify:
if
All IDUs have the same HW version

All IDUs have the same SW version
All IDUs have the same license
Every IDU has unique IP address
Active and STBY have the same SW mode (Pipe / Managed / Metro)
All IDUs have the same Management mode (In band or OOB)
IIn case off IIn-Band,
B d allll IDU
B d VID
IDUs h
have th
the same IIn-Band
Note:
The IDU, which is connected to the ODU fed by the
lower attenuation channel of the RF coupler, is the
IDU that should be selected as "Active.
18
PAGE 361
8/12/2010

3. Install the 1st link (make sure radio is up)
ODU
ODU
4. Enable Protection on both IDUs (management will be lost for 60 sec)

5. Lock Protection on both IDUs (to avoid unnecessary switchover when 2nd IDU
is enabled)
6 Install
6.
I t ll 2ndd IDU iin each
h site
it (no need to configure it)
ODU
ODU
ODU
ODU
19

7. Enable protection in 2nd IDU in each site
8. Connect ETH Cross Cable between both protection ports
ODU
ODU
ODU
ODU
9. Disconnect the MNG cables.

10. Connect the PC to IDUs via ETH Y-Cable:
ODU
ODU
ODU
ODU
PC
20
PAGE 362
10
8/12/2010

11. Verify Active IDU shows Mates IP address
12. Verify there are no Configuration Mismatch alarms
13. Verify there are no Mate Communication failures
14. Complete system setup by configuring Active IDU
15. In Active IDU: click Copy to Mate and verify Mate is restarting
16. Unlock protection on Active IDUs
17. Initiate Manual Switchover / Forced Switchover: verify traffic is OK.
21
Upgrading (1+0) to (1+1)
PAGE 363
11
8/12/2010

1. Assuming 1st link operates well, configure the 2nd IDUs to match
Active IDUs:
2nd IDUs has the same HW version as Active IDU

2nd IDU has the same SW version as Active IDU
2nd IDU has the same license as Active IDU
2nd IDU has unique IP address (different than Actives IP)
2nd IDU has the same switch mode as Active IDU
2nd IDU has the same Management mode (In band or OOB)
In case of In-Band, 2nd IDU has the same In-Band VID as Active IDU
2nd IDU is configured with the same radio parameters as Active IDU
Mute transmission on 2nd IDUs
Active Link:
ODU
ODU
ODU
ODU
Standby Link (not connected)

23

2. Enable Protection on Active IDUs (management will be lost for 60 sec)
3 Lock
3.
L kP
Protection
t ti on b
both
th A
Active
ti IDU
IDUs (to avoid unnecessary switchover
when 2nd IDU is enabled)
4. Install 2nd IDU in each site (verify TX is muted before physical installation)
24
ODU
ODU
ODU
ODU
PAGE 364
12
8/12/2010

5. Enable protection in 2nd IDU in each site
6. Connect ETH Cross Cable between both protection ports
ODU
ODU
ODU
ODU
7. Disconnect the MNG cables.

8. Connect the PC to IDUs via ETH Y-Cable
25

9. Verify Active IDU shows Mates IP address
10. Verify there are no Configuration Mismatch alarms
11. Verify there are no Mate Communication failures
12. Complete system setup by configuring Active IDU
13. In Active IDU: click Copy to Mate and verify Mate is restarting
14. Unlock protection on Active IDUs
15. Initiate Manual Switchover / Forced Switchover: verify traffic is OK.
26
PAGE 365
13
8/12/2010
Troubleshooting Protection
Common issues followed by CLI commands
Troubleshooting
Alarm / Error
Protection LED is on (RED)
Probable Cause / Workaround

1.
2.
3.
Protection cable is not connected

ETH straight cable is connected instead of crosscable
One of the 2 IDUs is not configured in Protection
Current Alarms show Configuration

Mismatch alarm
Check CFG of both IDUs: HW, SW, switch mode,

management mode, In Band VID
Initiate Copy to Mate in Active IDUs
I cannot PING the STBY unit.
This is normal behavior, Mate cannot be accessed

directly, only via Active IDU
Main IDU does not respond to PING
C commands to verify
f this IDU is in S
STBY mode, iff
Use CLI
so, use CLI to recover IDU
Current Alarms shows Mate Comm.

Failure alarm
Check the current alarms of STBY IDU

Report back to Ceragon Support
Replace STBY unit
Replace Active unit
28
PAGE 366
14
8/12/2010
Troubleshooting Useful CLI Commands

General commands:
lsp
ls
cls
prints executable commands in current directory

prints available child
child-directories
directories
clears screen
To execute Protection commands, you will need to change directory:

IP-10:/> cd platform/mate-idu
Then to read current status of IDU
Then,
IDU, type the following (in blue):
IP-10:/platform/mate-idu> get protection-mode
The system return these values:
1. Active
2. Standby
29

To change Protection Admin mode, type the following:
IP-10:/platform/mate-idu> set protection-admin
<enable/disable>
To lock the current protection mode, type the following:

IP-10:/platform/mate-idu> set protection-lockout
30
<on/off>
PAGE 367
15
8/12/2010

To force a switchover, type the following:
IP-10:/platform/mate-idu> set protection-force-switch <on/off>
To request a manual switchover, type the following:

IP-10:/platform/mate-idu> manual-switch-cmd
To initiate a Copy-to-Mate process, type the following:

IP-10:/platform/mate-idu> copy-to-mate-cmd
31
Post-Configuration Changes
1. Changes should be applied to the mate IDU first
2. Initiate a switchover
3. Apply the changes to the new Mate IDU (previously used as Active)
Such changes may include
Setting a new In-Band VLAN
In-Band to OOB or vice versa
Frequencies
Etc.
32
PAGE 368
16
8/12/2010
ThankYou!
training@ceragon
com
33
PAGE 369
17
CFM (OAM IEEE 802.1ag)

Connectivity Fault Management
Module Version V2.0
Perquisites
Prior to this configuration, end-user need to

be familiar with the following modules:
Ethernet Frame Structure

802.1p/q
CFM Theory
Switch Configuration
Interfaces Configuration
PAGE 370
Agenda
CFM: Why?
Preliminary configuration
Setup Review
Configuration Flow
Configuration Review
Manual PING
Manual Linktrace
Automatic Linktrace
CFM: WHY ?
By definition, L3 IP or L2 ETH are Connection-less networks
In connection-less networks we are blind unable to determine packet path

or latency
This makes troubleshooting and maintenance a harder task
Solution: we need to convert our Connection-less network into a

Connection-Oriented network
IN
IN
Connection-Oriented
Connection-Less
4
PAGE 371
CFM: WHY ?
Connection-Oriented networks (ATM, IP/MPLS) enable administrators setting a

pre-defined packet path, reserving BW per service, faster event detection and
thus effective troubleshooting & maintenance
Such technologies are too expensive and sometimes not feasible for Mobile
Operators / Mobile Backhaul solutions
Solution: use a cheaper technology with enhanced features:
Ethernet Core + Operations, Administration & Maintenance support (CFM)
CFM enables L3 operations

such as Traceroute and
PING with a simpler ETH
infrastructure
Connection-Oriented
5
Preliminary Configuration
1. Make sure you define the required VLAN IDs in the Switch DB prior to OAM
configuration
2. Prepare a Network Design Map with required configuration
(MIP / MEP / IDs / MAC per device.)
4. Make sure IP-10 Interfaces are configured according to your Network Criteria
(Trunk / Port VID Membership ).
5. Every CFM interface (including Radio) must be aware of the required VIDs
(Port membership)
6. CFM requires physical connection, therefore make sure your interfaces are
enabled on both sides (DCE and DTE)
PAGE 372
Setup Review (MAIDs):
Domain 1 Services:
D1S1:
MEP 1 to MEP 2, Level 3, VLAN 1000
1
D1S2:
4
2
Domain 2 Services:
D2S2:

MEP
MIP
7
CFM Configuration Flow:

1
Create VLANs in Switch DB

Assign VID membership per port
Create Domains and Services
Assign MIPs
You may use Advanced features to

troubleshoot a L2 problem
All Steps must be configured on both IP-10s

Make sure you follow the same syntax
PAGE 373
Configuration
Switch Configuration Mode and VIDs
10
PAGE 374
Switch Configuration Port Configuration
11
Creating MAIDs
Click on the Add button to add domains
(use the setup diagram as a reference)
You will need to specify:
1.
2.
3.
4.
12
Domain Name
Level (1 to 7)
Association Name
VLAN ID
PAGE 375
Creating MAIDs
Create the domains as depicted in the setup diagram on both IDUs
Settings must be unique and identical
13
Domains defined
You should see the following status on your MAID list page (on both IDUs):
If you point your cursor to the No MEPs indication LED, you will be notified that MEPs
need to created as well
14
PAGE 376
Defining MEPs
Click on the ADD button to add a local MEP on both IDUs
Continue to next slide to observe how
15
Defining MEPs
Port #3
MEP ID: 1
Port #3
MEP ID: 2
16
PAGE 377
RIGHT IP-10
Remote MEPs not defined yet
17
RIGHT IP-10
LEFT IP-10
Enable CCM on both IDUs
18
PAGE 378
CCM enabled > Remote MEP is detected
As you can see, CCM enables auto-learning, hence both MEPs discover each other
(MAC and remote MEP ID are now known)
New alarms indicate that process of creating the remote MEP is not fully complete
19
Creating Remote MEPs
Click on the Add button to add a remote MEP on every IDU
20
10
PAGE 379
Creating Remote MEPs

Port #3
Local MEP ID: 1
Remote MEP: 2
Port #3
Local MEP ID: 2
Remote MEP: 1
21
Service #1 (D1S1) is ready for monitoring!
Click on the PING button to check connectivity to Remote interface

(results on next slide)
22
11
PAGE 380
PING results (MEP1 to MEP2)
23
D1S2 Creating another service

We shall create a new service (S2) using the same Domain (D1) (hence- same level)
To separate the 2 services, we shall assign a new VLAN
MEP1
MEP 3
MEP 4
MEP 2
New Domain: D1S2

MEP 3 to MEP 4
Level 3
VLAN 2000
The new service D1S2 will

monitor the Radio ports
24
12
PAGE 381
D1S2 Creating another service

Using the MAID list, add the new service on both IDUs:
MEP 3
MEP 4
25
D1S2 Creating Local MEPs

Please note - Radio port MEP should be defined as a Downstream MEP
MEP 3
MEP 4
26
13
PAGE 382
D1S2 Enable CCM on both IDUs
MEP 3
MEP 4
27
D1S2 Add Remote MEPs on both IDUs
MEP 3
MEP 4
28
14
PAGE 383
D1S2 Service is now ready for monitoring
29
D2S2 another service on another Domain
D2S2
5
6
30
15
PAGE 384
D2S2 another service on another Domain
31
Adding Local MEPs
Local MEP 5
Remote MEP 6
Local MEP 6
Remote MEP 5
32
16
PAGE 385
Enabling CCMsAdding Remote MEPs

Once you complete these tasks, your 3rd service is ready for monitoring
33
Adding MIPs to enhance Monitoring

The MIPs can be regarded as
Service-free test-points
MIPs provide more segments
regardless of VLANs and
Services
More test-point
More L2 capabilities!
We shall add a MIP point on

every Radio interface
Make sure you set the MIP

level according to the level
of the Parent domain
34
17
PAGE 386

In the MEP & MIP list, we can see the switch ports and there
MACs:
In our example, we need to add a MIP on the Radio port
Therefore, we shall expand the Radio port to configure the
MIP
Add MIPs on both radio ports (both IDUs)
35
Please make a note of the Radio MAC address of each IDU we shall need it later
36
18
PAGE 387
MAC addresses of participating interfaces

00:0A:25:01:8F:AD
00:0A:25:56:27:AC
00:0A:25:56:27:C6
00:0A:25:56:27:C2
Please note the above MACs are an example of given setup

37
Manual PING | Manual Link Trace | Automatic Link Trace
19
PAGE 388
Manual PING
To PING from MEP 1 to MEP 2, you will need to set the following parameters:
Remote interface MAC
Level
VLAN
Successful PING requires setting the correct path
39
Manual Linktrace
To trace an interface , you will need to set the following parameters:
Remote interface MAC
Level
VLAN
Successful Trace requires setting the correct path
Results on next slide
40
20
PAGE 389
Manual Linktrace Results

FDB
MIP informing us that it
received the LTM (link race
message), it is not who we
are looking for but it knows
how to reach the target
interface
We have traced 2 MIPs (on

every Radio port)
Eventually we traced MEP 1

(HIT)
41
Automatic Linktrace
To enable Auto Linktrace select the checkbox next to the target Remote MEP
and then click ADD SELECTED
42
21
PAGE 390
Automatic Linktrace
Click Linktrace SELECTED
43
Thank You !
training.ceragon.com
44
22
PAGE 391
3/7/2010

Loopback Maintenance
Agenda
In this module we shall describe

the various actions we can
perform to properly maintain and
troubleshoot the IP-10G system
PAGE 392
3/7/2010
RFU RF Loopback
RFU RF LB
RFU RF Loopback
Use it to verify communication from Line to ODU is OK (including ODU)
Traffic affecting TX is stopped
Configurable Timer to automatically restore traffic ( 0 = no time limits)
RFU LED is RED when Loopback is ON
LINK LED is GREEN when Loopback is ON
Alarm is displayed in Current Alarms:
and Event log:
PAGE 393
3/7/2010
IF Loopback
IDU IF LB
IF Loopback
Use it to verify communication from Line to IF cable is OK
Traffic affecting TX is stopped
Configurable Timer to automatically restore traffic (0 = no time limits)
LINK LED is GREEN when Loopback is ON
Alarm is displayed in Current Alarms:
and Event log (next slide):
PAGE 394
3/7/2010
IF Loopback Analysis using Event Log

Lets assume radio link is down LINK LED is RED
16:29:01
We enable IF LB, therefore Link alarms clear
16:29:05
Loopback replaces remote unit therefore alarm disappears
16:30:01
Loopback automatically stops, link recovers to original state
16:30:05
Radio link is down (original state)
PDH Line LB towards Line (NE)
LB towards the line
PAGE 395
3/7/2010
PDH Line LB towards Line (Near End)

Use this feature to evaluate connection to customers patch-panel
Alarm is displayed in CAS:
and in Event Log:
PDH Line LB towards Radio (FE)
LB towards the radio
Tester
10
PAGE 396
3/7/2010
PDH Line LB towards Radio Event Log Analysis

Lets assume PDH port #1 is enable but not connected
Therefore, Major alarm is on (RED)
16:59:44
We enable Line LB towards the radio
16:59:46
Loopback replaces end-device therefore alarm disappears
17:06:37
Loopback is OFF
17:06:38
PDH port alarm is ON again..
11
SDH Line LB towards System

Towards System signal (trail) is looped back to
IP-10
12
PAGE 397
3/7/2010
SDH Line LB towards Line

Towards Line signal (trail) is looped back to
customer interface
13
IDU-RFU Interface Monitoring
Before you leave the site, make sure that these registers are elapsed (zero)\
When one of these registers is different than 0 you need to report to
your support representative
In such case, perform the Loopbacks we have just covered to narrow down the
probable causes for the errors
14
PAGE 398
3/7/2010
Thank You !
15
PAGE 399
3/7/2010

EMS Backup Maintenance
Agenda
In this module we shall describe the various

actions we can perform to properly maintain
and troubleshoot the IP-10G system using:
1.
2.
3.
2
Configuration File
Unit Information File
FTP Server
PAGE 400
3/7/2010
Configuration File
The Configuration file stores the following parameters:
License
External Alarms
SNMP Trap Destination
NTP Server Properties
Radio properties: Frequency, RSL, TSL, ATPC, etc.
Switch Mode and database: Port types, VLAN membership, etc.
Interface Configuration: PDH, TDM, Ethernet Switch
Trail Configurations
Service OAM
Security: user accounts, login properties, etc.
Unit Information File

The Unit Information file stores the following parameters:
Date & Time

Daylight Saving Time properties
System name and other ID parameters
Measuring properties (voltage, temperature)
Accumulated Performance Monitoring logs
Serial numbers
PAGE 401
3/7/2010
Local FTP Server

Uploading or Downloading the CFG & Unit files requires an FTP Server
As long as your IP-10G communicates with the server, its location is
irrelevant
EMS PC with local FTP Server installed
Remote FTP Server

You may assign a remote server to host the configuration and unit files
EMS PC
Remote FTP Server
PAGE 402
3/7/2010
FTP Root Directory

Every Server has its own properties. Make sure you are familiar with
your FTP Root Directory: this is where the files are stored (software
versions, CFG & Unit).
Examples for
SW packages
Examples for
CFG & Unit
Files
7
Configure your FTP Server Properties
2
8
PAGE 403
3/7/2010
Upload /
Download using
standalone IP-10G
9
Uploading the CFG File (IP-10G to Server)

Click Create Archive to
allow the IP-10G zipping
all parameters into one file
10
PAGE 404
3/7/2010
Wait till task is

successfully completed
11

Next step:
Click Upload Archive to allow
the IP-10G transferring the
zipped file to your server
12
PAGE 405
3/7/2010

Wait till task is successfully
completed
13
Check your FTP Root Directory
This is your copy of

the configuration file
You may place it now
in the dedicated folder
(Configuration Files)
14
PAGE 406
3/7/2010

Follow the same steps to upload the Unit Information file:
1
15
2
Check your FTP Root Directory
This is a copy of your Unit Information file
16
PAGE 407
3/7/2010
Downloading the CFG File (Server IP-10G)

Follow the same steps to download the CFG file
When download completes successfully, you will need to restart the
system for changes to take place
Please note if the file does not exist in the root directory action will fail !
1
17
2
Upload /
Download in
a shelf
18
PAGE 408
3/7/2010
Shelf Backup: Creating the Nodal Shelf Backup

Uploading CFG files from a shelf is similar to a standalone
process
1. First you need to create the CFG files of all slots
2. After creating the CFG files, you need to upload them to your
FTP directory
19
Shelf Backup: Creating the Nodal Shelf Backup
First you need to create the

CFG files.
To do so, select the unit(s)
and click the relevant
Backup button
20
PAGE 409
10
3/7/2010
Shelf Backup: Upload from IP-10G to Server

Next, click Upload
Archive(s) and the
file(s) will be uploaded
to your FTP root
directory
21
Shelf Backup: Download from Server to IP-10G
To download a file to a
certain slot, select the
unit number and click
this button
22
PAGE 410
11
3/7/2010
Unified Unit Information File
A unified file is created for

all stacked units
Upload & Download
action are identical to a
standalone unit
23
Checking Backup History & Status
Click here to see the

backup history
24
PAGE 411
12
3/7/2010
Checking Backup History & Status
25
Setting the unit back to Factory Defaults
You can restore your system to

factory defaults
You may also set the IP address to
factory default address (192.168.1.1)
26
PAGE 412
13
3/7/2010
Thank You !
27
PAGE 413
14
4/21/2010

EMS Software Upgrade
Agenda
FTP Properties
Standalone SW Download
Standalone SW Upgrade
Nodal IDU SW Download
Nodal IDU SW Upgrade
Rollback VS. Downgrade
PAGE 414
4/21/2010
Local FTP Server

SW files are located on an FTP Server (local or remote)
Configure the FTP properties to point to your local server root directory
(Make sure RD/WR permissions are enabled)
EMS PC with local FTP Server installed
Remote FTP Server

If you do not have an FTP Server installed locally on your PC, you may
configure an IP address of a remote server.
EMS PC
Remote FTP Server

PAGE 415
4/21/2010
FTP Root Directory

Make sure you are familiar with your FTP Root Directory: this is where
the files are stored (software versions, CFG & Unit).
Examples for
SW packages
Configuring FTP Server Properties
PAGE 416
4/21/2010
Configuring FTP Server Properties
Type the location of the software package:

FTP IP address
SW folder (when relevant, in this example 66253)
Type the username & Password
(You may log in using CMD window to verify settings are correct)
SW Upgrade on a
standalone IP-10G
PAGE 417
4/21/2010
Click on the Download button and wait till Succeeded message is
displayed (next slide)
You may view at any time the download

process by clicking on the Log Icon
Download was successfully completed, you may proceed to upgrade
the IDU
10
PAGE 418
4/21/2010
Download completed Upgrade delayed

In case Upgrade is scheduled for later moments, the Version table will
display the following status:
11
Standalone Upgrade
Click on the Upgrade button. When upgrades completes successfully,
the IDU will restart automatically.
You may view at any time the upgrade

12
PAGE 419
4/21/2010
SW Upgrade in a
shelf (Node)
13
Shelf Configuration
1. Make sure your main unit (Slot 1) is upgraded with the latest version
2. If not, it is recommended to upgrade the main unit as a standalone IDU
3. Verify you are familiar with the slot number(s)
Slot 6
Slot 5
Slot 4
Slot 3
Slot 2
Slot 1
14
PAGE 420
4/21/2010
Shelf SW Download
Configure the FTP properties if needed

Click on the Download button and
wait till Succeeded message is
displayed
You may view at any time the download
15
Shelf SW Upgrade
Select the target slot and then click the
Upgrade button
Or click Upgrade All
Please note
1. The number of slots depend on
actual configuration
2. The slot numbers are not according
to physical allocation in the shelf
3. Failures may occur due to wrong
FTP configurations, unstable
network connection or missing files
4. IDU(s) will reset automatically upon
successful upgrade
16
PAGE 421
4/21/2010
Shelf SW Upgrade
Select the target slot and then click the
Upgrade button
Or click Upgrade All
Please note
1. The number of slots depend on
actual configuration
2. The slot numbers are not according
to physical allocation in the shelf
3. Failures may occur due to wrong
FTP configurations, unstable
network connection or missing files
4. IDU(s) will reset automatically upon
successful upgrade
17
Rollback
VS. Downgrade
18
PAGE 422
4/21/2010
Rollback
2.8.25
Upgrade #1
Upgrade #2
2.8.31
2.8.35
2.8.32
Rollback
3
Downgrade
Rollback does not revert previous Downgrade operation !

It rolls back IDU version 1 step back (prior to last Upgrade)
19
Thank You !
20
PAGE 423
10
3/7/2010

EMS Security Configuration
Agenda
SSH
HTTPS
SFTP
Users & Groups
Password
PAGE 424
3/7/2010
Security Configuration
Update first FTP connection
SSH Secured Shell

SHHv1 and SSHv2 are supported.
SSH protocol can be used as a secured alternative to "Telnet".
SSH protocol is always be operational. Admin user can choose whether to
disable
"Telnet" protocol, which will be "enabled" by default. Server authentication

will be based on IP-10s "public key".
Key exchange algorithm is RSA.

Supported Encryptions: aes128-cbc, 3des-cbc, blowfish-cbc, cast128-cbc,
arcfour128, arcfour256, arcfour, aes192-cbc, aes256-cbc, aes128-ctr,

aes192-ctr, aes256-ctr.
MAC (Message Authentication Code): SHA-1-96 (MAC length = 96 bits, key
length = 160 bit). Supported MAC: hmac-md5, hmac-sha1, hmacripemd160, hmac-sha1-96, hmacmd5-96'
The server will authenticate the user based on user name and
password. Number of failed authentication attempts is not limited.
Server timeout for authentication: 10 min. This value cannot be configured.
PAGE 425
3/7/2010
HTTPS
In order to manage the system using HTTPS protocol, user should
follow the following steps:
1. Create the IDU certificate based on IDU's public key.

2. Download the IDU certificate.
3. Using CA certificate (Optional steps)
i. Download the IDU CA's certificate.
ii. Enable WEB CA certificate.
4. Set WEB Protocol parameter to HTTPS
HTTPS Public Key Upload

The public key should be uploaded by the user for generating the IDUs
digital certificate:
The upload will be done by using FTP/SFTP (s

The public key file will be in PEM format.
Click Upload Public Key
The status of the upload operation can be monitored. The returned status
values are: ready (default), in-progress, success, failed. In any case
of failure, an appropriate error message will appear.
PAGE 426
3/7/2010
HTTPS Certificate Download (1)

Download IDU server certificate and/or IDU CA certificate (optional) :
Download is done by using FTP/SFTP.

PEM and DER certificate formats are supported.
For downloading the IDU server certificate and/or IDU's CA certificate to the system, the
following steps must be fulfilled for each file type:
Determine certificate file name (Admin privilege).

Determine the certificate file type (Admin privilege): Target Certificate (for WEB
server digital certificate) or Target CA certificate (for WEB CA digital certificate).
Determine certificate file format (Admin privilege): Format could be PEM (for PEM
formatted file), or DER (for DER formatted file).
Determine whether to include the

CA certificate into the WEB configuration
definitions. This is an optional configuration
and is recommended for adapting the
WEB interface to all the WEB browsers
applications (Admin privilege).
HTTPS Certificate Download (2)

After setting the above configurations, a Download Certificate command
should be issued.
The status of the download operation can be monitored. The returned status
values are: ready, in-progress, success, failed.
It is recommended to refresh the WEB page when certificate download

operation is terminated.
To apply the new certificate, the WEB server should be restarted (Admin
privilege). WEB server will be automatically restarted when it is configured to
HTTPS.
PAGE 427
3/7/2010
HTTPS - Activation
WEB interface protocol can be configured to be HTTP (default) or HTTPS
(cannot be both at the same time).
While switching to HTTPS mode, the following must be fulfilled:
WEB server certificate file exist.
Certificate public key is compatible to IDUs private key.
If one of the above tests fails, the operation will return an appropriate error
indication.
Open WEB Browser and type the URL https:\\<IP of target IDU>.
Note:
This parameter is NOT copied when copy to mate operation is initiated,
for security reasons (unsecured unit should not be able to override security
parameters of secured unit).
SFTP (Secure FTP)
SFTP can be used for the following operations:
Configuration upload/download,
Upload the unit info.
Upload public key.
Download certificate files.
SW download
PAGE 428
3/7/2010
USERS,
GROUPS
&
PASSWORD
Adding Users
To add / edit users & groups click on the

item as shown in the captured imaged (left)
Click Add User to add new users
PAGE 429
3/7/2010
Adding Users
Adding Users
New users will be required to change their

password when they log in for the first time
PAGE 430
3/7/2010
Changing Password
A valid password should be a mix of upper and lower case letters, digits, and other
characters.
You can use an 8 character long password with characters from at least 3 of these 4
classes. An upper case letter that begins the password and a digit that ends it do not
count towards the number of character classes used.
Changing Password
Good example:
L00pBack using capital letters, small letters and digits (zeros instead of O)
Bad example:
Loopback missing digits or other characters
Loopbacks using more than 8 characters
PAGE 431
3/7/2010
Thank You !
17
PAGE 432
Annexes
PAGE 433
FibeAir IP-10
License
Management
Guide
Part ID: BM-0139-0

Doc ID: DOC-00019183 Rev a.00
November 2008
PAGE 434
Notice
This document contains information that is proprietary to Ceragon Networks Ltd.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, modified, or distributed without prior written
authorization of Ceragon Networks Ltd.
This document is provided as is, without warranty of any kind.
Registered TradeMarks
Ceragon Networks is a registered trademark of Ceragon Networks Ltd.
FibeAir is a registered trademark of Ceragon Networks Ltd.
CeraView is a registered trademark of Ceragon Networks Ltd.
Other names mentioned in this publication are owned by their respective holders.
TradeMarks
CeraMapTM, PolyViewTM, EncryptAirTM, ConfigAirTM, CeraMonTM, EtherAirTM, and MicroWave
FiberTM, are trademarks of Ceragon Networks Ltd.
Statement of Conditions
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
Ceragon Networks Ltd. shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or
consequential damage in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this
document or equipment supplied with it.
Information to User
Any changes or modifications of equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer
could void the users authority to operate the equipment and the warranty for such equipment.
Copyright 2008 by Ceragon Networks Ltd. All rights reserved.
Corporate Headquarters:
Ceragon Networks Ltd.
24 Raoul Wallenberg St.
Tel Aviv 69719, Israel
Tel: 972-3-645-5733
Fax: 972-3-645-5499
Email: info@ceragon.com
www.ceragon.com
North American Headquarters:

Ceragon Networks Inc.
10 Forest Avenue,
Paramus, NJ 07652, USA
Tel: 1-201-845-6955
Toll Free: 1-877-FIBEAIR
Fax: 1-201-845-5665
Email: infous@ceragon.com
European Headquarters:
Ceragon Networks (UK) Ltd.
4 Oak Tree Park, Burnt Meadow Road
North Moons Moat, Redditch,
Worcestershire B98 9NZ, UK
Tel: 44-(0)-1527-591900
Fax: 44-(0)-1527-591903
Email: infoeuro@ceragon.com
APAC Headquarters
Ceragon Networks (HK) Ltd.
Singapore RO
Level 34 Centennial Tower
3 Temasek Avenue
Singapore 039190
Tel - + 65 6549 7886
Fax: +65 6549 7011
PAGE 435
Contents
General .......................................................................................................... 1
Getting Started .............................................................................................. 1
How to use the System................................................................................. 5
Managing the License .................................................................................. 6
Working with Devices .......................................................................................... 6
Working with Licenses....................................................................................... 16
Settings ............................................................................................................... 23
Generating Reports ............................................................................................ 25
PAGE 436
General
This guide explains how to work with the FibeAir IP-10 web based License Management System.
The system enables authorised users to obtain license-related information and perform license-related
operations.
Getting Started
To start the management application:
1.
In your web browser, go to the address http://80.74.99.83/LMManage/login.aspx
2.
To log in to the system, enter your user name and password, and then click Login.
Note the following user name rules:
FibeAir IP-10 License Management SystemPAGE
437
For Demo OEM, the first five digits must be 00001. The next four digits after the first five should
be numbered starting with 0001 for end users. For example, the number 000010001 would mean
that Demo OEM end user 0001 is entering the system.
For users other than Demo OEM, the user name must start with 00000. For example, the number
000000001 would mean that non-Demo OEM user 0001 is entering the system.
For OEM Users
3a. If you enter as an OEM user, the following web page appears:
One of two modes can be selected:

Administrator (Demo OEM option) - The administrator can assign licenses and devices to
customers, who can be either another OEM customer or Demo OEM. In this mode of operation,
the OEM admin can assign licenses/devices to end users (including themself) and can generate
license keys for the devices.
End User (Customer option) - The OEM end user, or the OEM itself can generate keys for self
use. In this mode, the user can only generate licenses based on the available device database.
The user can only view his/her own devices (that were assigned to that user) and licenses.
FibeAir IP-10 License Management System
PAGE 438
End users that belong to that channel cannot see devices or licenses that belong to the OEM or other
customers.
After you select the operating mode, the following web page appears:
CeraView User Guide
PAGE 439
For Non-OEM Users

3b. If you enter as a non-OEM user the following web page appears:
Note that a channel or OEM user can also enter as one of their customers. In this case, the system
identifies the user as a channel/OEM user and will display a drop-down list to enable entry under the
user's name. This will be done to allow operations for devices that the user sent to his/her customers.
PAGE 440
How to Use the System

The menus that you can select from are grouped according to their functions. Simply click the item you want
within a menu group (such as the Devices or Settings group).
When you select an item within a group, the relevant web page will open with the details concerning that
item.
At the top of the web page for the item, a line appears with buttons that you can click to perform a particular
operation.
From within an item web page, you do not have to return to the main web page. Instead, use the tabs at the
top (Devices, Licenses, etc.) to obtain a list of items for the particluar group.
Note that in any web page, you can click Print
CeraView User Guide
PAGE 441
to send the contents of the page to the printer.
Managing the License

The following sections describe the system menus and options that you can select to obtain information
concerning your licenses and to perform license-related operations.
Working with Devices

The Devices group includes items that can be selected to perform device-related operations, such as to obtain
information about the devices included in your license, or import a device list from another source.
Device List
To obtain a list of devices:
In the Devices group, select All Devices, or click the Devices tab at the top of the web page (if it appears).
The following web page appears:
PAGE 442
Note that for OEM users, the Generate Keys button is replaced with Assign to Customer
.
The list includes all the devices you purchased from Ceragon.
Click Device ID for a more deatiled description of the device.
In this page, you can assign the current ID to an end user, using the drop-down list in the Assign to
Customer field.
CeraView User Guide
PAGE 443
Search for Devices

In the main device list web page, you can click Search
registered in the system.
to locate a particular device that is
Select the criteria (filters) you want for the search, and then click Search.
To clear the criteria you selected, click Clear.
PAGE 444
Import Devices
In the toolbar, click Import
to import a list of devices from an external source.
You will be prompted to locate the file with the device list. Once you locate and select the file, click Import.
The device list file must be a text file with the following columns:
Device ID Customer
Country
Region /
Network
Link
Side
In the Device ID column, use only upper case letters.
Adding and Deleting Devices

To add a new device, in the toolbar, click New
CeraView User Guide
PAGE 445
Enter a valid device ID in the field and click Save.

The device will be added to your device list.
.
To delete a device, select the device in the list, and click Delete
Exporting a Device List
To export a device list to a file, click Export
The list will be saved in an Excel file with the extension csv (Comma Separated Values).
Generating Keys
To generate license keys for one or more devices, select the devices in the main list by marking the
checkboxes beside them, and click Generate Keys
In this web page, only the devices you selected will appear.
PAGE 446
10
The All Relevant Licenses area shows only the licenses that are common to all devices you selected
(meaning their lowest common denominator).
The current license types include the following:
1 = ACM
2 = Networking
3 = Capacity Upgrade
The following tables list the current license possibilities:
Capacity Upgrade
License
Type
Value
IP10-CAP-010
Feature disabled
IP10-CAP-025
Radio Cap. Upgrade 10->25 Mbps
IP10-CAP-050
IP10-CAP-100
IP10-CAP-150
IP10-CAP-200
Radio Cap Upgrade 10->200 Mbps
IP10-CAP-300
IP10-CAP-400
IP10-UPG-025-050
IP10-UPG-025-100
10
IP10-UPG-025-150
11
IP10-UPG-025-200
12
IP10-UPG-025-300
13
IP10-UPG-025-400
14
IP10-UPG-050-100
15
IP10-UPG-050-150
16
IP10-UPG-050-200
17
IP10-UPG-050-300
18
IP10-UPG-050-400
19
IP10-UPG-100-150
20
IP10-UPG-100-200
21
IP10-UPG-100-300
22
IP10-UPG-100-400
23
IP10-UPG-150-200
24
IP10-UPG-150-300
25
IP10-UPG-150-400
26
IP10-UPG-200-300
27
IP10-UPG-200-400
28
IP10-UPG-300-400
CeraView User Guide
Name in License
Management Site
Description
PAGE 447
11
ACM
License
Type
Value
Name in License
Managament Site
Description
Feature disabled
IP10-ACM
ACM
Networking (Metro Switch Enabled)

License
Type
Value
Name in License
Management Site
Description
Feature disabled
IP10-Metro
Metro Switch
To add a license for which you want to generate a key, select the license in the All Relevant Licenses area
and click Add to add it to the Selected Licenses area.
Important! You can only select one license from each category (ACM, Networking, Capacity Upgrade). If
you select a capacity upgrade license and want to add a different capacity upgrade license, you must first
remove the first capacity upgrade license and then add the other one.
Once you select the licenses you want, click Generate Keys.
After you confirm your selection, the following example web page appears.
PAGE 448
12
Assigning Devices to a Customer

For OEM users, you can assign devices to other users by selecting Assign Devices to a Customer in the
main web page Devices group. Or, you can click Assign to Customer
at the top of the
page.
In the Select Customer field, use the drop-down list to choose the customer you want to assign the devices
to.
Click Show Available Devices for a list of devices you can choose from.
In the available list of devices, click Filter & Sort to customize the device list, as shown in the following
example page.
CeraView User Guide
PAGE 449
13
You can specify the ID of the device you want to include in the list, and select the list sort order (ascending
or descending).
After you click Go to generate the list, in the Available Devices list, select the devices you want to assign to
the user, and click Add to add them to the Assigned Devices list.
When you complete the operation, click Save.
In the confirmation page, click Confirm.
The following example page appears:
PAGE 450
14
Click Continue to go back to the device list page.

The device list page will appear with the updated information.
CeraView User Guide
PAGE 451
15
Working with Licenses

In the Licenses group, select All Licenses, or click the Licenses tab at the top of the web page (if it appears).
The web page displays all the licenses you currently own.
To search for a particular license, click Search, specify the criteria you want, and click Search again.
Click the number in the Qty Assigned column for a list of licenses assigned to customers.
PAGE 452
16
Click the number in the Qty Generated column for a list of licenses used to generate keys.
CeraView User Guide
PAGE 453
17
To generate license keys, select Generate Keys in the Licenses group in the main web page, or click
Generate Keys in the web page that appears when you click the Licenses tab.
To add a license for which you want to generate a key, select the license in the All Available Licenses area
and click Add to add it to the Selected Licenses area.
Click Show Relevant Devices for a list of devices associated with the licenses you chose.
PAGE 454
18
To add a device for which you want to generate a key, select the device in the All Available Devices area
and click Add to add it to the Selected Devices area.
Once you select the devices you want, click Generate Keys.
The keys will be generated, as shown in the following example page, and the database will be updated.
CeraView User Guide
PAGE 455
19
PAGE 456
20
Assigning Licenses to a Customer

For OEM users, you can assign licences to other users by selecting Assign Licenses to a Customer. Or, you
can click the Assign to Customer button
at the top of the page.
In the Select Customer field, use the drop-down list to choose the customer you want to assign the licenses
to.
Click Show Available Licenses for a list of licenses you can choose from.
CeraView User Guide
PAGE 457
21
In the Filter by Type field, click the drop-down list and choose the license type (Capacity, ACM,
Networking).
For License Code, click the drop-down list and choose the license specifications.
For Quantity to Assign, enter the amount of licenses you want to assign to that customer. The maximum
quantity is limited to the available quantity for the license you choose.
After you complete the filter options, click Add to add the licenses to the Assigned Licenses list. You can
repeat this procedure more than once to add other license types.
For Quantity to Return, enter the amount of unused licenses you would like to return (if relevant).
Click Save to save the license assigment information in the database.
In the page that appears, click Confirm to confirm the assignment.
A page will appear informing you that the operation was successful, and the main license list will be updated
with the information.
PAGE 458
22
Settings
In the main web page, the Settings group includes items you can select for system information and
configuration.
Managing Users
Select the Manage Users item to define users and modify their properties. You can also access this item by
clicking the Settings tab at the top of the page (if it appears).
Use the Search button at the top
to locate a particular user.
To define a new user, click New
CeraView User Guide
PAGE 459
The following page appears:
23
In this page, enter the information in the fields, and then click Save.
To delete one or more users, in the user list, mark the checkboxes beside the users you want to delete, and
click Delete
. Confirm your choice(s) in the page that appears and the users will be deleted.
Modifying your Profile

In the main Settings page, select the My Profile item to modify your personal information.
The same page appears as that for a new user. Modify the information as desired and click Save.
PAGE 460
24
Generating Reports
In the main web page, you can select a report to generate: an Orders report, or a Devices and Activations
report.
To generate a report, select Orders Report or Devices & Activations Report in the main web page, or click
the Reports tab at the top of the page (if it appears).
For an Orders Report:

For Order No., you can select All or Between. If you select Between, specify the range of order numbers
you want to include in the report.
For Order Date, you can select All or Between. If you select Between, you will need to specify the range of
dates you want to include in the report.
In the Include field, you can select All for all types of orders, Closed orders only, or Open orders only.
When you are done selecting the report criteria, click Create Report.
CeraView User Guide
PAGE 461
25
For a Devices & Activations Report:

For Devices, you can select All or Between. If you select Between, specify the range of device IDs you want
to include in the report.
For Activation Date, you can select All or Between. If you select Between, specify the range of activation
dates you want to include in the report.
When you are done selecting the report criteria, click Create Report.
PAGE 462
26
FibeAir IP-10G
SW Version I6.6.1
CLI
(Command Line Interface)
User Guide
August 2010
PAGE 463
Notice
This document contains information that is proprietary to Ceragon Networks Ltd.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, modified, or distributed without prior written authorization of
Ceragon Networks Ltd.
This document is provided as is, without warranty of any kind.
Registered TradeMarks
Ceragon Networks is a registered trademark of Ceragon Networks Ltd.
FibeAir is a registered trademark of Ceragon Networks Ltd.
CeraView is a registered trademark of Ceragon Networks Ltd.
TradeMarks
CeraMapTM, PolyViewTM, EncryptAirTM, ConfigAirTM, CeraMonTM, EtherAirTM, and MicroWave FiberTM, are
trademarks of Ceragon Networks Ltd.
Statement of Conditions
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
Ceragon Networks Ltd. shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential
damage in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this document or equipment supplied
with it.
Information to User
Any changes or modifications of equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the
users authority to operate the equipment and the warranty for such equipment.
Copyright 2010 by Ceragon Networks Ltd. All rights reserved.
FibeAir IP-10G CLI User Guide - I6.6.1
PAGE 464
Contents
General ............................................................................................................................................. 5
Getting Started ................................................................................................................................ 6
Command Groups ......................................................................................................................... 13
CLI Commands .............................................................................................................................. 16
CLI Command Parameters ........................................................................................................... 26
CLI Procedures .............................................................................................................................. 67
PAGE 465
General
This guide explains how to work with the FibeAir IP-10 Command Line Interface (CLI).
The CLI is used to perform IP-10 configuration and obtain system statistical and performance information.
Using the CLI, you can perform configuration operations for single IP-10 units, as well as configure several
IP-10 units in a single batch command.
Access Rights
IP-10 CLI access is granted for the following user groups:
Viewer
This user only has read-only access. The user can only view parameters and their values, not
modify them.
Operator
This user has read-write access. The user can read parameters and their values, and modify
them. However, this user cannot add or remove other users.
Admin
This user has read-write access. The user can read parameters and their values, modify them,
and add/remove other users.
Technician
This user has read-write access to the OS CLI.
User access is controlled by the system Administrator and configured via the Management command group
(shown in the Command Groups section).
PAGE 466
Getting Started
To log in to the CLI:
1.
Power on your PC.
2.
Make sure that your PC is connected to the management port on the front panel of the IP-10 unit.
3.
Open telnet application as follows: telnet <IP address of the unit> + Enter
4.
For a first-time login, use the following

User: Admin
Password: Admin
Note: When using the Hyper Terminal, you should set the terminal speed (in your PC terminal
configuration) to 155200 kpbs. In addition, it is recommended to select the VT-100 terminal type and set the
terminal size to 24 rows, 80 columns.
Getting Help
Once you are logged in, you can go to a main command group and its sub groups, type the command you
want, and press Tab twice for a list of possible parameter values.
In addition, you can type a command and then type a question mark (?) for location-specific information for
the command. For example, for the set command, typing set ? and pressing Enter will display a list of
optional parameters and a help line.
Wherever you are in the command tree, you can obtain a list of available commands by typing Help or ?.
The commands that are available are different for each location in the CLI tree and the type of user.
PAGE 467
Basic Commands
The following basic commands are available when you first log in, if you belong to the Operator user group:
ls
get
set
help
cd
exit
logout
cli-ver
cls
write
show-tree
find
lsp
list entities
get parameter
set parameter
help
change directory
exit CLI
logout from CLI
cli version
clear screen
write the current switch configuration to the configuration file
show entity tree
search for a string in the parameter name and information fields
list entity parameters and commands
In addition, you can use the up/down arrow keys, or the q key, when the word END appears at the end of
the screen.
Setting IP Addresses
To define a new IP address, do the following:
1. Log in as follows:
User:
Admin or Operator
Password: Admin
2. At the command prompt, type: cd management\networking\ip-address\, and press Enter.
3. Type: get ip-address, and press Enter.
This will give you the current IP address.
4. Type: set new_ip_address, and press Enter.
For new_ip_address, enter the new address.
PAGE 468
Finding Commands
At any point in the CLI tree, a quick way to find a command is to type find string, and press Enter.
For string you can type any word that you think is relevant for a command.
For example, if you type find user, and press Enter, you would get a list of commands relating to "user", as
follows:
1) management/mng-services/users/add-user
2) management/mng-services/users/delete-user
3) management/mng-services/users/show-users
Add user <name> <group>

Delete user <name>
Show users
Command Example
The following example shows how you can find a command within a sub-group, and then execute the
command. The example starts with the lsp (list parameters) command, and ends with the activation of an
interface loopback test.
----------------------------------------------IP-10:/> cd diagnostics/loopback/radio-loopback/
IP-10:/diagnostics/loopback/radio-loopback> lsp
*********** configuration ********
timeout
rw
Loopback timeout in minutes
*********** statuses *************
counter
ro
Loopback time left
if-loopback
rw
IF loopback activation
rfu-rf-loopback
rw
RFU RF Loopback Enable Command
IP-10:/diagnostics/loopback/radio-loopback> set timeout 2
IP-10:/diagnostics/loopback/radio-loopback> set if-loopback
off on
IP-10:/diagnostics/loopback/radio-loopback> set if-loopback on
Caution: This action affects traffic.
The may cause permanent loss of Ethernet traffic & wayside.
Consider disabling or physically disconnecting the Ethernet ports of the IDM and
Wayside before the loopback activation.
Are you sure? (yes/no):yes
IP-10:/diagnostics/loopback/radio-loopback>
-----------------------------------------------
Important!
Note that bridge related commands need to be followed by a write command to be saved.
Otherwise, the commands will not be saved following a reset in the system.
PAGE 469
Viewing the Command Tree

At any location within the command group structure, you can type show-tree and press Enter for a list of all
the commands in the group you are currently in.
The following list appears when you type show-tree.
IP-10-SLOT-1:/>show-tree
management
mng-services
cfg-service
event-service
event-log
alarm-service
alarm-current
alarm-external
pm-service
time-service
ntp
mng-software
users
networking
ip-address
floating-ip-address
mng-protocols
snmp
platform
inventory
daughter-board
license
idc-board
fpga
mate-idu
all-odu
shelf-manager
remote-idu
remote-co
remote-cl
radio
PAGE 470
xpic
remote-cl
framer
mrmc
tdm-radio-pm[1]
tdm-radio-pm[2]
tdm-radio-pm[3]
tdm-radio-pm[4]
tdm-radio-pm[5]
tdm-radio-pm[6]
tdm-radio-pm[7]
tdm-radio-pm[8]
tdm-radio-pm[9]
tdm-radio-pm[10]
tdm-radio-pm[11]
tdm-radio-pm[12]
tdm-radio-pm[13]
tdm-radio-pm[14]
tdm-radio-pm[15]
tdm-radio-pm[16]
tdm-radio-pm[17]
tdm-radio-pm[18]
tdm-radio-pm[19]
tdm-radio-pm[20]
tdm-radio-pm[21]
tdm-radio-pm[22]
tdm-radio-pm[23]
tdm-radio-pm[24]
tdm-radio-pm[25]
tdm-radio-pm[26]
tdm-radio-pm[27]
tdm-radio-pm[28]
tdm-radio-pm[29]
tdm-radio-pm[30]
tdm-radio-pm[31]
tdm-radio-pm[32]
tdm-radio-pm[33]
PAGE 471
tdm-radio-pm[34]
tdm-radio-pm[35]
tdm-radio-pm[36]
tdm-radio-pm[37]
tdm-radio-pm[38]
tdm-radio-pm[39]
tdm-radio-pm[40]
tdm-radio-pm[41]
tdm-radio-pm[42]
tdm-radio-pm[43]
tdm-radio-pm[44]
tdm-radio-pm[45]
tdm-radio-pm[46]
tdm-radio-pm[47]
tdm-radio-pm[48]
tdm-radio-pm[49]
tdm-radio-pm[50]
tdm-radio-pm[51]
tdm-radio-pm[52]
tdm-radio-pm[53]
tdm-radio-pm[54]
tdm-radio-pm[55]
tdm-radio-pm[56]
tdm-radio-pm[57]
tdm-radio-pm[58]
tdm-radio-pm[59]
tdm-radio-pm[60]
tdm-radio-pm[61]
tdm-radio-pm[62]
tdm-radio-pm[63]
tdm-radio-pm[64]
tdm-radio-pm[65]
tdm-radio-pm[66]
tdm-radio-pm[67]
tdm-radio-pm[68]
tdm-radio-pm[69]
tdm-radio-pm[70]
PAGE 472
10
tdm-radio-pm[71]
tdm-radio-pm[72]
tdm-radio-pm[73]
tdm-radio-pm[74]
tdm-radio-pm[75]
tdm-radio-pm[76]
tdm-radio-pm[77]
tdm-radio-pm[78]
tdm-radio-pm[79]
tdm-radio-pm[80]
tdm-radio-pm[81]
tdm-radio-pm[82]
tdm-radio-pm[83]
tdm-radio-pm[84]
modem
rfu
rfu-sw-upload
rfu-co
rfu-cl
rfic
interfaces
wayside
sync
ethernet
bridge
eth-port[1]
eth-port[3]
eth-port[6]
eth-port[7]
eth-port[8]
service-oam
pdh
port-group
e1t1-port[1]
e1t1-port[2]
e1t1-port[3]
e1t1-port[4]
PAGE 473
11
e1t1-port[5]
e1t1-port[6]
e1t1-port[7]
e1t1-port[8]
e1t1-port[9]
e1t1-port[10]
e1t1-port[11]
e1t1-port[12]
e1t1-port[13]
e1t1-port[14]
e1t1-port[15]
e1t1-port[16]
trails
sdh
stm1
diagnostics
rmon
loopback
line-loopback
radio-loopback
xml-interface
PAGE 474
12
Command Groups
The command groups that appear when you log in include the following:
Management
Platform
Radio
Interfaces
Diagnostics
Some groups include sub groups that enable setup operations relevant to that category.
The following illustrations show the trees of each main group.
Management
Management
PAGE 475
13
Platform
Radio
PAGE 476
14
Interfaces
Diagnostics
PAGE 477
15
CLI Commands
The following table lists the commands you can use in each command group and sub group.
Note that when you enter a group or sub group, you can type a command and then press the Tab key twice
(or type a question mark) for a list of values relevant to that command.
CommandGroup
Command
Description
Privilege
IP-10G
echo
Display a line of text
operator
IP-10G
write
Write the current switch

configuration into
configuration file
operator
IP-10G
show-tree
Show entity tree
rw
IP-10G
find
Search for a string in the

parameter's entity name
and information fields
rw
entity name and

information fields list entity
parameters and
commands
rw
IP-10G
lsp
Mng-services
ping
Ping utility
operator
Mng-services
telnet
Telnet utility
operator
cfg-service
set-to-default
Set to factory default

configuration
operator
Event-log
show
Show log
rw
Event-log
clear
Clear log
operator
alarm-current
show
Show current alarms
rw
pm-service
clear-entire-pm
Clear entire PM
operator
mng-software
versions-idu
Show IDU application

packages set versions
operator
mng-software
versions-rfu
Show supported RFU

version
operator
mng-software
verify-packages
mng-software
download
Download newer
packages from remote
server (without
installation)
operator
mng-software
upgrade
Upgrade all installed

packages or requested
package
operator
Verify installed packages
PAGE 478
operator
16
CommandGroup
Command
Description
Privilege
mng-software
rollback
Rollback recent IDU

application upgrade
transaction (1 step back).
CAUTION:
Admin
mng-software
downgrade
Downgrade application
packages to older version
(downloaded to special
downgrade directory)
Admin
mng-software
kernel-reinstall
Re-install last installed

Linux kernel package
(recommended for corrupt
kernel restoration)
Admin
mng-software
package-download
Download new package

(without existing version
installed) from remote
server
(without
installation). NOTE:
provide
admin
package name without

version, e.g. 'abc', not
'abc-0.0.1'.
mng-software
package-install
Download and install new

package (without existing
version installed). NOTE:
provide package name
without version, e.g. 'rfu',
not 'rfu-0.0.1
admin
mng-software
package-uninstall
Uninstall SW package
(recommended for
independent package
removal)
admin
mng-software
show-packages
Show SW packages
operator
mng-software
cleanup
Clean up disk from old

duplicated (kernel)
packages and repackaged
files,or downgrade files
operator
mng-software
change-serverpassword
Change remote server

password
admin
Users
add-user
Add user into system's

users account.
syntax:add-user <user>
<privilege> <passwd
aging in day amounts>
[account expired YYYYMM-DD]
admin
PAGE 479
17
CommandGroup
Users
Command
delete-user
Description
Delete user from system's
users
Privilege
admin
account. Syntax: deleteuser <user> show-users

Show information about
exist users
account
users
show-users
Show information about

exist users account
admin
users
change-password
Change user's password.

syntax:
rw
change-password
(without parameters)
floating-ip-address
set-fip-lock-timer
Set Floating IP lock timer
operator
mng-protocols
status-show
Show Management
Protocols status
operator
mng-protocols
web-restart
restart the web server
admin
Snmp
status-show
Show SNMP status
operator
snmp
change-user-settings
Change the settings of the

SNMPv3 user (security
level / username /
password)
admin
idc-board
reset-idc-hw
Reset the IDC - cold

(HW) reset
operator
idc-board
create-archive
Create archive file on

target
operator
idc-board
install-archive
Install the requested

archive file on target
admin
idc-board
upload-archive
Upload the archive file to

the PC
operator
(host). Before activating

this command, make sure
to set host-ip, host-path,
user-name and userpassword
idc-board
download-archive
Get the archive file from

the PC (host) onto the
target. Before activating
this command, make sure
to set host-ip, host-path,
user-name and userpassword
PAGE 480
operator
18
CommandGroup
Command
Description
idc-board
change-user-password
Change user password for

the ftp session. When
using default user name
(anonymous), use PC
(host) login as password
operator
idc-board
cli-script
Execute, show or delete a

CLI configuration script
Operator
cfg-mismatch-details
Show configuration
mismatch details
operator
mate-idu
copy-to-mate-cmd
Copy to mate command
operator
mate-idu
manual-switch-cmd
Manual switch command
operator
shelf-manager
logon-unit
Logon other unit's CLI

shell
Rw
shelf-manager
reset-unit
Reset unit
operator
shelf-manager
reset-shelf
Reset shelf
operator
shelf-manager
reset-extensions
Reset extension units
operator
shelf-manager
shelf-versions
Show units SW versions

information
rw
shelf-manager
cfg-backup-show
Show units configuration

backup information
rw
shelf-manager
config-backup
Backup other unit(s)

configuration on this Main
unit's storage device
operator
shelf-manager
config-restore
Restore this and/or

other unit(s) configuration
from this Main unit's
backup file(s)
admin
shelfmanager
shelf-info-create
Create information archive

including snapshot info for
all available units
operator
remote-idu
remote-reset-idc-hw
Reset the remote IDC cold (HW) reset
operator
remote-idu
force-unmute
Force Remote Unmute

Command
operator
remote-co
clear-device-error
clear device error counter
operator
remote-cl
clear -device- error
operator
mrmc
change-script-cmd
Change modem script

command
operator
modem
clear-counters
Clear accumulated
counters
operator
mate-idu
PAGE 481
Privilege
19
CommandGroup
Command
Description
Privilege
Rfu
clear-com-device-error
Clear RFU Com device

error
operator
Rfu
automatic-delaycalibration
RFU Automatic Delay

Calibration Command
operator
rfu-fw-upload
internal-fw-downloadaction
Set Internal FW Download

action
operator
rfu-fw-upload
internal-fw-downloadcancel
Set Internal FW Download

cancel
operator
rfu-sw-upload
internal-sw-downloadaction
Set Internal SW Download

action
operator
rfu-co
clear-device-error
clear IDU device error

counter
operator
rfu-cl
clear-device-error
operator
sync
set-sync-source
set-sync-source trail
<slot> <if-type> <if-num>
operator
sync
view-sync-source
view-sync-source
operator
ethernet
set-gbe-mute-override
Set GbE mute override
operator
ethernet
show-gbe-muteoverride
Show GbE mute override
rw
bridge
show-ports-status
Show status of all ports
rw
bridge
show-eth-statistics
Show Ethernet Statistics
rw
bridge
show-all-traffic-statistic
Show ethernet statistics

for all ports
rw
bridge
show-forwarding-table
Shows the forwarding

table for a
rw
specific VLAN
bridge
qos-copy-prioritiesconfiguration
Copy priority
configuration from one
port to another
operator
bridge
qos-copy-rate-limitingconfiguration
Copy rate limiting

configuration from one
port to another
operator
bridge
qos-set-vlan-tag-pbitval
Set VLAN tag pbits to

queue allocation
operator
bridge
qos-show-vlan-tagpbit-val
Show VLAN tag pbits to

queue allocation
rw
bridge
qos-set-ip-pbit-val
Set IP pbits to queue

allocation
operator
bridge
qos-show-ip-pbit-val
Show IP pbits to queue

allocation
rw
PAGE 482
20
CommandGroup
Command
Description
Privilege
bridge
qos-vlan-to-queue
QoS VLAN to queue

priority
rw
bridge
qos-show-vlan-toqueue
Show QoS VLAN to

queue priorities
rw
bridge
qos-set-scheduler-qweight
Set scheduler queue

weights
operator
bridge
qos-show-scheduler-qweight
Show scheduler queue

weights
rw
bridge
qos-policer
Add/Remove a policer
operator
bridge
qos-policer-class
Add/Remove a policer
class
operator
bridge
qos-show-policers
Show QoS policers
rw
bridge
qos-static-mac-priority
Set/Remove a static MAC

priority
operator
bridge
qos-show-static-macpriorities
Show static MAC priorities
rw
bridge
clear-all-peer-info
Clear all peer's

information
operator
bridge
show-bridge-status
Show the bridge status
rw
bridge
showrunningconfig
Showcurrentswitch
operatingconfiguration
rw
bridge
showvlaninfo
ShowVLANdatabase
rw
bridge
vlan
Add,remove,ormodify
valuesassociatedwitha
singleVLAN
operator
eth-port
show-port-status
Show port status
rw
eth-port
qos-set-vlan-pbits-prioremap
Set VLAN Pbits priority

remap
operator
eth-port
qos-show-vlan-pbitsprio-remap
Show VLAN Pbits priority

remap
rw
eth-port
mep
Add/Remove an MEP
operator
eth-port
show-meps-list
Show MEPs list
operator
eth-port
show-if-table-counters
Show IF table counters
operator
eth-port
clear-rmon
Clear RMON statistics
operator
eth-port
qos-detach-policer
Detach policer map from

the port
operator
eth-port
qos-show-policerclasses
Show policer classes
rw
eth-port
clear-peer-info
Clear all peer's

information
operator
PAGE 483
21
CommandGroup
Command
Description
Privilege
eth-port
show-allowed-vlans
Show allowed VLANs
rw
eth-port
Mip
Add/Remove MIP
operator
eth-port
show-mips-list
Show MIPs list
operator
eth-port
set-allowed-vlans
Set allowed VLANs
operator
service-oam
domain
Add/Modify/Remove a
maintenance domain
operator
service-oam
association
Add/Modify/Remove a
maintenance association
Operator
service-oam
remote-mep
Add/Remove a remote
MEP
operator
service-oam
ccm-Admin
Change continuity check

Admin state
operator
service-oam
ccm-interval
Change continuity check

interval time
operator
service-oam
ping
Ping message to a remote

MEP or MIP
rw
service-oam
linktrace
Traceroute message to a
remote MEP or MIP
rw
service-oam
auto-linktrace
Add/Remove a remote
MEP to the automatic
linktrace list
operator
service-oam
show-auto-linktrace-list
Show the remote MEPs

configured in the
automatic linktrace list
rw
service-oam
show-configured-localmeps
Show all local MEPs info
rw
service-oam
show-configuredremote-meps
Show all remote MEPs

info
rw
service-oam
show-domain-list
Show Maintenance
domain list
rw
service-oam
show-domain-interval
Show domain & VLAN

CCM interval
rw
service-oam
show-auto-linktracemep-status
Show last auto linktrace

result for a remote MEP
rw
service-oam
show-auto-linktracemaid-stat us
Show last auto linktrace

result for all MAID remote
MEPs
rw
service-oam
show-maid-list
Show the MAID list
rw
service-oam
show-local-meps-list
Show the local MEP list
rw
service-oam
show-remote-meps-list
Show the remote MEPs

list
rw
PAGE 484
22
CommandGroup
Command
Description
Privilege
service-oam
show-mips-list
Show domain & VLAN

MIPs list
rw
port-group
disable-all-ports
Disable all E1/DS1 ports
operator
port-group
enable-all-ports
Enable all E1/DS1 ports
operator
lag-port
lag-member
Add/Remove eth-port
to/from aggregation group
rw
lag-port
qos-show-vlan-pbitsprio-remap
Show VLAN Pbits priority

remap
rw
lag-port
show-allowed-vlans
Show allowed VLANs
rw
lag-port
show-port-status
Show port status
rw
aggregate-port
Add/remove port from

aggregation group
operator
clear-peer-info
Clear all peer's

information
operator
lag-port
lag-port
lag-port
lag-clear-rmon
Clear RMON statistics of a

LAG-port
operator
lag-port
lag-port-remove
Remove aggregation
group
operator
lag-port
mep
Add/Remove a MEP
operator
lag-port
mip
Add/Remove MIP
operator
lag-port
qos-set-vlan-pbits-prioremap
Set VLAN Pbits priority

remap
operator
lag-port
set-allowed-vlans
Set allowed VLANs
operator
lag-port
show-if-table-counters
Show IF table counters
operator
lag-port
show-meps-list
Show MEPs list
operator
lag-port
show-mips-list
Show MIPs list
operator
trails
add-trail
Add a Trail: add-trail <id>

<desc> <acm-prio>
<activation> <protected>
<src-slot> <src-type>
<src-num> <dest1-slot>
<dest2-type> <dest3num> ... <dest9-num>
operator
Trails
del-trail-by-src
Delete a Trail by Source:
operator
del-trail-by-src <src-slot>
<src-type> <src-num>
trails
del-trail-by-id
Delete a Trail by ID: deltrail-by-id <id>
PAGE 485
operator
23
CommandGroup
Command
Description
Privilege
trails
act-trail-by-id
Activate(or Reserve) a
Trail by ID: act-trail-by-id
<id> <operatioal/
reserved>
operator
trails
show-trail-by-src
Show a Trail by Source

Edge
show-trail-by-src <src-slotid>
operator
<src-if-type> <src-if-num>
trails
show-trail-by-id
Show a Trail by Trail ID
rw
show-trail-by-id <id
trails
show-all-trails
Show all Trails show-alltrails
operator
trails
show-all-trail-pms
Show all Trails PM showall-trail-pms
operator
trails
show-trail-pms-by-id
Show Trail PM's using a

trail id show-all-trails <id>
operator
trails
show-all-trail-alarms
Show all Trails alarms

show-all-trails-alarms
operator
trails
del-all-trails
Delete all Trails del-alltrails
operator
trails
act-all-trails
Activate (or Reserve) all

Trails
operator
trails
protected-trail-forceactive-by-id
Force active a protected

trail <id> to
operator
by-id some path

trails
protected-trail-forceactive
Force active all protected

trails to some path
operator
trails
protected-trail-switchreset
Reset the switch counter

for all
operator
protected trails <id>

trails
protected-trail-switchreset-by-id
Reset the switch counter

for a
by-id
operator
protected trail <id>
trails
show-trails-statistics
Show the trails statistics

with options [ts|trails]
operator
trails
show-local-trailsstatistics
Show the local trails

statistics with options
[ts|trails]
admin
PAGE 486
24
CommandGroup
trails
Command
dump-hw-tableconfiguration
Description
Dumpt the HW table
configurations for a
Privilege
admin
device <device> with

options [sum|active]
trails
dump-trails-db
Dumpt the trail DB for

[local|global]
database with options
[sum|active]
admin
trails
perform-local-trailconsistency-check
Verify that the local DB

configuration including
HW is valid
admin
trails
add-def-trails
Add default Trails (use on

standalone units with
empty database) add-deftrails
operator
diagnostics
show-files-list
Show downloadable files
operator
rmon
get-statistics
Get RMON statistics
operator
rmon
clear-port

from a specific port
operator
rmon
clear-lag-port
Clear RMON statistics of a

LAG-port
operator
rmon
clear-all

from all ports
Operator
PAGE 487
25
CLICommandParameters
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
Event-log
event-to-syslog
Event to syslog
OPERATOR
Rw
alarmcurrent
most-severe
Most severe alarm
VIEWER
Rw
alarmexternal
external-output.group
External alarm group
OPERATOR
Rw
alarmexternal
external-output.Admin
External alarm
output Admin
OPERATOR
Rw
alarmexternal
external-input.Admin[5]
External input alarm

Admin
OPERATOR
Rw
alarmexternal
external-input.severity[5]

severity
OPERATOR
Rw
alarmexternal
external-input.text[5]

text
OPERATOR
Rw
alarmexternal
external-output
External alarm state
VIEWER
Rw
alarmexternal
External-input[5]
External input state
VIEWER
Rw
timeservice
dst-offset
Daylight Savings
Time offset
OPERATOR
Rw
timeservice
dst-start-month
Daylight Savings
Time starting month
OPERATOR
Rw
timeservice
dst-start-day
Daylight Savings
Time starting day
OPERATOR
Rw
timeservice
dst-end-month
Daylight Savings
Time ending month
OPERATOR
Rw
timeservice
dst-end-day
Daylight Savings
Time ending day
OPERATOR
Rw
timeservice
gmt-offset-hours
NTP offset from

GMT (hours part)
OPERATOR
Rw
timeservice
gmt-offset-minutes
NTP offset from

GMT (minutes part)
OPERATOR
rw
timeservice
time-and-date
OPERATOR
rw
Time and date

format: day-monthyear,
hours:mins:secs
PAGE 488
26
Parameter
Group
ntp
Parameter
Description
server
Privileges
OPERATOR
rw
NTP server with

which the system is
synchronised
ntp
Admin
NTP Administrative
state
OPERATOR
rw
ntp
status
NTP service status
VIEWER
ro
ntp
poll-interval
NTP polling interval
VIEWER
ro
ntp
sync-server
VIEWER
ro
OPERATOR
rw
The NTP server with

which the target is
currently
synchronized.
mngsoftware
server-url
Remote SW update
server URL, where
SW
updates reside
mngsoftware
server-login
Remote server login
OPERATOR
rw
mngsoftware
download-status
Last SW download
status
VIEWER
ro
mngsoftware
install-status
Last SW installation
status
VIEWER
ro
mngsoftware
version-package-name
Common (version
holder) package
name
VIEWER
ro
mngsoftware
common-version-idu
VIEWER
ro
mngsoftware
running-version-idu
VIEWER
ro
VIEWER
ro
Identifies installed
IDU application
package set version
Identifies IDU
application common
package version at
last cold restart
mngsoftware
common-version-rfu
Identifies installed
RFU package
version
PAGE 489
27
Parameter
Group
mngsoftware
Parameter
Description
common-version-rfu-upgrade
Privileges
VIEWER
ro
VIEWER
ro
Identifies RFU
package version for
upgrade
mngsoftware
common-version-rfu-downgrade
Identifies RFU
package version for
downgarde
mngsoftware
status-download
Last SW download
status
VIEWER
ro
mngsoftware
status-install
Last SW installation
status
VIEWER
ro
users
login-fail-threshold
ADMIN
rw
ADMIN
rw
ADMIN
rw
OPERATOR
rw
Threshold of
consecutive fail
logins
which cause to
blocking the user's
login. Optional
values: 0-10 (0 is for
disable the
mechanism)
Users
blocking-fail-login-time
The blocking time (in
minutes) after
threshold of
consecutive fail
logins
exceed. Optional
values: 1-1440
users
idle-login-time
Define the idle login
time (in days)
which after that the
user's account
will be deleted.
Optional values 0-90
(0 is for disable the
mechanism)
networking
number-of-ports
Number of
management ports
PAGE 490
28
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
networking
vlan
In-Band
management VLAN
ID
OPERATOR
rw
networking
type
How management
data is passed
OPERATOR
rw
networking
capacity
Management port
capacity
OPERATOR
rw
networking
auto-negotiation
Management port
auto negotiation
OPERATOR
rw
networking
duplex
Management port
duplex
OPERATOR
rw
networking
ethernet-rate
Management port
Ethernet rate (Mbps)
OPERATOR
rw
ip-address
ip-address
Unit management IP
address
OPERATOR
rw
ip-address
subnet-mask
Unit subnet mask
OPERATOR
rw
ip-address
default-gateway
Default gateway
OPERATOR
rw
ip-address
hw-address
Hw address
VIEWER
ro
floating-ipaddress
floating-ip
Floating IP
OPERATOR
rw
mngprotocols
web-inactivity-timeout
Web inactivity
timeout, in minutes
OPERATOR
rw
mngprotocols
web-protocol
Web protocol type
ADMIN
rw
mngprotocols
web-ca-certificate-Admin
WEB Certificate
Authority (CA) digital
ADMIN
rw
ADMIN
rw
certificate
mngprotocols
web-Admin
HTTP/S channel
Administrative state
for
web and NMS
access
mngprotocols
telnet-Admin
Telnet Administrative
state
ADMIN
rw
mngprotocols
communication-inactivity-time out
define
communication
inactivity timeout of
the the management
interfaces
ADMIN
rw
mngprotocols
web-status
Web service status
VIEWER
ro
PAGE 491
29
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
mngprotocols
telnet-status
Telnet service
status
VIEWER
ro
Snmp
version
SNMP version
ADMIN
rw
Snmp
trap-Admin[4]
Enable/disable
sending SNMP traps
OPERATOR
rw
Snmp
trap-manager[4
IP address of
manager to which
SNMP traps will be
sent
OPERATOR
rw
Snmp
trap-port[4]
Manager port to
which traps are sent
OPERATOR
rw
OPERATOR
rw
(default is 162)
Snmp
trap-severity-filter[4]
Filter for traps sent

to the manager
according to severity
snmp
trap-status-change-filter[4]
Send trap on
operational status
change only
OPERATOR
rw
snmp
trap-heartbeat[4]
How often (in

minutes) a trap
heartbeat is sent to
the manager (0 to
disable)
OPERATOR
rw
snmp
v3-security-mode
SNMPv3 security
mode
VIEWER
ro
Snmp
v3-auth-algorithm
SNMPv3
authentication
algorith
VIEWER
ro
Snmp
Admin
SNMP
Administrative state
ADMIN
rw
Snmp
read-community
SNMP read
community
OPERATOR
rw
Snmp
write-community
SNMP write
community
OPERATOR
rw
Snmp
trap-community[4]
SNMP trap
community
OPERATOR
rw
Snmp
trap-clli[4]
SNMP trap clli
OPERATOR
rw
Snmp
trap-name[4]
Text for manager

name or comment
OPERATOR
rw
Snmp
v3-username
SNMPv3 single user

username
VIEWER
ro
PAGE 492
30
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
Snmp
status
SNMP service status
VIEWER
ro
snmp
mib-version
Private MIB file

version
VIEWER
ro
Platform
system-services
Number of services
as provided by the
VIEWER
ro
system according to
the rfc3418
Platform
lan-id
Lan segment i
OPERATOR
rw
platform
system-name
System name
OPERATOR
rw
Platform
system-contact-person
System contact
person
OPERATOR
rw
Platform
system-location
System location
OPERATOR
rw
platform
system-location-bay
System location bay
OPERATOR
rw
platform
system-location-shelf
System location
shelf
OPERATOR
rw
platform
longitude
Unit's longitude
coordinates
OPERATOR
rw
platform
latitude
Unit's latitude
coordinates
OPERATOR
rw
platform
slot-label
Slot Label
OPERATOR
rw
Platform
max-physical-ports
Max number of
physical PDS ports
VIEWER
ro
Platform
max-physical-sdh-ports
Max number of
physical SDH ports
VIEWER
ro
Platform
system-description
System description
VIEWER
ro
power-supply-1-alarm-admin
power-supply-1alarm-admin
OPERATOR
rw
Inventory
board-type
Board type
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
board-sub-type
Board sub-type
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
firmware
Firmware
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
hardware
Hardware
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
board-modules
Board modules
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
idc-type
The type of IDC
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
idc-sub-type
The sub-type of the

IDC
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
idc-firmware
IDC firmware
VIEWER
ro
Platform
PAGE 493
31
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
Inventory
idc-hardware-features
The hardware
features of the IDC
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
modem-type
The type of modem
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
modem-sub-type
The sub-type of the

modem
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
modem-firmware
The firmware of the

modem
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
modem-system-rate
The frequency of the

clock for the PVG
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
modem-hardware-features
The hardware
features of the
modem
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
mux-type
The type of MUX
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
mux-sub-type
The sub-type of the

MUX
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
mux-firmware
The firmware of the

MUX
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
mux-hardware-features
The hardware
features of the MUX
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
xc-type
The type of XC
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
xc-sub-type
The sub-type of the

XC
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
xc-firmware
The firmware of the

XC
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
xc-hardware-features
The hardware
features of the XC
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
chain-type
Chain type
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
chain-sub-type
Chain sub-type
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
chain-firmware
Chain firmware
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
chain-hardware-features
Chain hardware
features
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
total-num-of-interfaces
Total number of
interface
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
num-of-fe-interfaces
Number of fast
Ethernet interfaces
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
num-of-radio-interfaces
Number of Radio
interfaces
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
num-of-10-100-1000-interfaces
Number of
10/100/1000
interfaces
VIEWER
ro
PAGE 494
32
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
Inventory
num-of-sfp-interfaces
Number of SFP
interfaces
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
num-of-tdm-interfaces
Number of TDM
interfaces
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
type-of-tdm-interfaces
Type of TDM
interfaces
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
hw-supported-bit-bate
HW supported bit
rate
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
date-code
Date of board testing

(number of seconds
from 1/1/1970)
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
hass-number
Number of hass
testing
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
tx-iq-delay-index-in-fdf-table
TX IQ Delay - Tx
index in fdf table
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
tx-iq-delay
TX IQ Delay - TX
Delay
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
rx-master-iq-delay-index-in-f df-table
RX IQ Delay - Rx
Master index in fdf
table
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
rx-master-iq-delay
RX IQ delay - Rx
Master delay
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
rx-slave-iq-delay-index-in-fdf table
RX IQ Delay - Rx
slave index in fdf
table
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
rx-slave-iq-delay
RX IQ delay - Rx
slave delay
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
num-of-working-hours
Counter of working
hours of the board
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
license-demo-timer
Number of hours left

for license demo
mode
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
spare1
Spare1
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
Spare2
Spare2
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
Spare3
Spare3
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
pic-version
The version of the

pic
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
hw-feature
HW features
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
serial-number
The serial number of

the board
VIEWER
ro
PAGE 495
33
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
Inventory
part-number
Part number of the

application in the
board
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
license-register
System license
features
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
company-name
Company name
Admin
rw
Inventory
logo
Company logo
Admin
rw
Inventory
main-view
Company main logo
Admin
rw
Inventory
product-name
Product name
Admin
rw
daughterboard
board-type
VIEWER
ro
daughterboard
board-sub-type
VIEWER
ro
daughterboard
num-of-interfaces
VIEWER
ro
daughterboard
running-firmware-version
VIEWER
ro
daughterboard
firmware
VIEWER
ro
daughterboard
hardware
VIEWER
ro
daughterboard
num-of-working-hours
Counter of working
VIEWER
hours of theDaughter
board
ro
daughterboard
date-code
Date of daughter
board testing
(number of seconds
from 1/1/1970)
VIEWER
ro
daughterboard
hass-number
Number of hass DB
testing
VIEWER
ro
daughterboard
serial-number
The serial number of

the daughter board
VIEWER
ro
daughterboard
part-number
Part number of the

application in the
daughter board
VIEWER
ro
daughterboard
comments
Text description
about the daughter
board
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
comments
Text description of
the board
OPERATOR
rw
PAGE 496
34
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
Inventory
hw-inventory-version
The hw inventory
version
VIEWER
ro
Inventory
production-inventory-version
The production
inventory version
VIEWER
ro
License
demo-Admin
Enable/disable demo
mode
OPERATOR
rw
License
license-code
The user license

code that determines
the user rights
OPERATOR
rw
License
capacity-name
Capacity rights
VIEWER
ro
License
acm-license
ACM rights
VIEWER
ro
License
switch-application-license
Switch application
rights
VIEWER
ro
License
license-type
Type of license
VIEWER
ro
License
demo-timer
Time left for license

demo mode (in
hours)
VIEWER
ro
License
syncu-license
VIEWER
ro
License
network-resiliency-license
VIEWER
ro
License
tdm-capacity-license
VIEWER
ro
License
tdm-capacity-value
VIEWER
ro
license
per-usage-license
VIEWER
ro
idc-board
measurement-system
Measurement
system
OPERATOR
rw
idc-board
host-ip
IP of the HOST
where the archive is
to be stored
ADMIN
rw
idc-board
file-transfer-protocol
Determines whether
the file transfer
protocol is secure
(SFTP) or not (FTP)
ADMIN
rw
idc-board
idc-clli
General CLLI field
OPERATOR
rw
PAGE 497
35
Parameter
Group
idc-board
Parameter
Description
host-path
Relative path (under

the ftp directory)
Privileges
ADMIN
rw
on the HOST where

the archive is to be
stored. For using
default ftp path: set
// for Windows or
set / for Linux.
idc-board
user-name
User name for the ftp ADMIN

session
rw
idc-board
cli-script-file-name
The CLI
configuration script's
file name to be
downloaded
OPERATOR
rw
idc-board
temperature
IDU temperature
VIEWER
ro
idc-board
voltage-input
Voltage-input
VIEWER
ro
idc-board
system-up-time
System up time (in

hundredths of
seconds)
VIEWER
ro
idc-board
warning-banner-download-status
Status of
downloading the
warning banner file
VIEWER
ro
idc-board
security-file-type
ADMIN
rw
idc-board
security-file-format
ADMIN
rw
idc-board
config-creation-status
Status of the archive

creation action
VIEWER
ro
idc-board
config-upload-status
Status of the
archive storage
action
VIEWER
ro
idc-board
config-download-status

download action
VIEWER
ro
idc-board
config-install-status

download action
VIEWER
ro
idc-board
unit-info-creation-status
Status of the unitinfo creation action
VIEWER
ro
idc-board
unit-info-upload-status
Status of the
archive storage
action
VIEWER
ro
idc-board
upload-pub-key-status
Status of the public

key uploading
VIEWER
ro
PAGE 498
36
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
idc-board
download-security-status
Status of security file

download status
VIEWER
ro
idc-board
download-cli-script-status
Status of CLI
configuration script's
VIEWER
ro
file download status

idc-board
slot-id
Slot ID (within the

XC node)
VIEWER
ro
idc-board
hw-mode
Hardware Mode
(standalone or xc)
VIEWER
ro
idc-board
xc-role
XC Role (Main or
Extension)
VIEWER
ro
idc-board
version
IDC version
VIEWER
ro
idc-board
kernel-modules-version
Identifies current
kernel-modules
VIEWER
ro
ADMIN
rw
package set version

idc-board
warning-banner-file-name
The warning banner

file name to be
downloaded
idc-board
security-file-name
The security
filename to be
downloaded
ADMIN
rw
idc-board
status-text-indication[2]
Internal status text

indication array
VIEWER
ro
idc-board
radio-led
Radio LED
VIEWER
ro
idc-board
idu-led
IDU LED
VIEWER
ro
idc-board
rfu-led
RFU LED
VIEWER
ro
idc-board
protection-led
Protection LED
VIEWER
ro
idc-board
remote-led
Remote LED
VIEWER
ro
fpga
main-fpga-running-fw-version
Main FPGA running

FW Version
VIEWER
ro
fpga
secondary-fpga-running-fw-version
Secondary FPGA
running FW Version
VIEWER
ro
fpga
fw-version
FPGA FW Version
VIEWER
ro
mate-idu
protection-Admin
Protection Admin
OPERATOR
rw
mate-idu
excessive-ber-switch-admin
Excessive BER
switch admin
OPERATOR
rw
Protection force
switch
OPERATOR
rw
mate-idu
protection-force-switch
PAGE 499
37
Parameter
Group
mate-idu
Parameter
Description
Privileges
protection-lockout
Protection lockout
OPERATOR
rw
remote-ber-adjustment-time
Remote BER
adjustment time
OPERATOR
rw
remote-lof-adjustment-time
Remote LOF
adjustment time
OPERATOR
rw
copy-to-mate-status
Last copy-to-mateVIEWER
cmd execution status
ro
mate-idu
mate-ip-address
Mate IP address
VIEWER
ro
mate-idu
mate-mac-address
Mate mac address
VIEWER
ro
mate-idu
protection-mode
Protection mode
VIEWER
ro
all-odu
Admin
All ODU Admin
OPERATOR
rw
shelfmanager
slot-population[6]
Slot Population
VIEWER
ro
shelfmanager
alive-slot-population[6]
Alive Slot Population
VIEWER
ro
shelfmanager
shelf-most-severe-alarm[6]
Shelf most severe

alarm status
VIEWER
ro
shelfmanager
TDM-interfaces[6]
TDM Interfaces
VIEWER
ro
shelfmanager
sdh-interfaces[6]
SDH Interfaces
VIEWER
ro
shelfmanager
archives-operation-status
Shelf-wide
[configuration,unitinfo] archives
operation status
VIEWER
ro
shelfmanager
archive-operating-units
Number of units still

being processed by
the last archive
operation command
VIEWER
ro
shelfmanager
extension-units-protection-Admin[6]
Protection Admin of
Extension unit
VIEWER
ro
shelfmanager
radio-interfaces[6]
Radio Interfaces
VIEWER
ro
shelfmanager
available-interfaces
Available Interfaces
VIEWER
ro
shelfmanager
available-sdh-interfaces1
Available SDH
Interfaces
VIEWER
ro
shelfmanager
Available SDH
Interfaces 2
VIEWER
ro
mate-idu
mate-idu
mate-idu
PAGE 500
38
Parameter
Group
Parameter
shelfmanager
remote-idu
Description
Privileges
Available SDH
Interfaces 3
VIEWER
ro
remote-ip-address
Remote IDU IP
address
OPERATOR
rw
remote-idu
remote-floating-ip-address
Remote IDU
Floating IP address
configuration
OPERATOR
rw
remote-idu
remote-subnet-mask
Remote IDU subnet

mask
OPERATOR
rw
remote-idu
remote-default-gateway
Remote IDU default

gateway
OPERATOR
rw
remote-idu
remote-atpc-Admin
Remote IDU ATPC

enable/disable
configuration
OPERATOR
rw
remote-idu
remote-atpc-ref-rx-level
Remote ATPC
reference Rx level
configuration
OPERATOR
rw
remote-idu
remote-management-type
Remote
Management type
status
OPERATOR
rw
remote-idu
remote-link-id
Remote IDU Link ID
OPERATOR
rw
remote-idu
remote-force-mute-tx
Force remote Mute

transmit
configuration
OPERATOR
rw
remote-idu
remote-force-max-tx-level
Force remote Max

transmit level
configuration
OPERATOR
rw
remote-idu
remote-web-protocol
Remote IDU web

protocol type
VIEWER
ro
remote-idu
remote-slot-id
Remote slot id
VIEWER
ro
remote-idu
remote-rx-level
Remote Rx level
status
VIEWER
ro
remote-idu
remote-most-severe-alarm
Remote most
severe alarm status
VIEWER
ro
remote-idu
remote-communication
Remote
Communication
Status
VIEWER
ro
remote-idu
remote-green-mode-admin
Remote IDU
GREEN_MODE
enable/disable
configuration
OPERATOR
rw
PAGE 501
39
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
remote-idu
remote-management-vlan
Remote
Management VLAN
ID configuration
OPERATOR
rw
remote-co
device-error
Device errors
VIEWER
ro
remote-cl
device-error
Device errors
VIEWER
ro
radio
mhc-Admin
MAC header
compression Admin
OPERATOR
rw
radio
radio-if-interface
Radio Admin
OPERATOR
rw
radio
radio-if-interface-operationa l-status
Radio interface
actual current state
VIEWER
ro
radio
interface-alias
Interface alias
OPERATOR
rw
radio
max-available-tdm-cap
Maximal amount of
VC<EF><BF><BD>s
that mi configured by
the radio entity
VIEWER
ro
xpic
xpic-status
XPIC Script has

been loaded
VIEWER
ro
xpic
events-enable
Enable logging of
XPIC events
OPERATOR
rw
xpic
xrsm-cfg-retry-length-mul-fact or
Multiplication factor
of time between
OPERATOR
rw
tor XRSM retries

Configuration
xpic
xrsm-cfg-num-of-retries
Number or XRSM
attempts to reestablish XPIC
communcations
Configuration
OPERATOR
rw
xpic
xrsm-cfg-delay-between-retries
Delay duration
between XRSM
retries to re-establish
XPIC
communcations
Configuration
OPERATOR
rw
xpic
xrsm-cfg-duration-of-retry
Delay duration of
XRSM retry to reestablish XPIC
communcations
OPERATOR
rw
VIEWER
ro
Configuration
xpic
debug-current-config-status
PAGE 502
Current XPIC
Configuration Status
Flag
40
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
xpic
slave-xpic-enable
Allows slave to
update master of
XPIC enable event
VIEWER
ro
xpic
slave-rfu-comm-status
Allows slave to
update master of
RFU comm status
event
VIEWER
ro
xpic
slave-mute-transmitter
Allows slave to
update master of
RFU
VIEWER
ro
mute event
xpic
slave-if-loopback
Allows slave to
update master of IF
loopback event
VIEWER
ro
xpic
user-rfu-mute
Allows master to
read current status if
RFU mute on disk
VIEWER
ro
Allows master to
request slave XPIC
LOP status
VIEWER
ro
slave-xpic-lop
slave-xpi-mute
Allows master to set

slave XPIC MUTE
VIEWER
ro
xpic
xpic
xpic
xrsm-cfg-enable
Enables the
operation of XRSM
when LOP is
detected
Configuration
rw
OPERATOR
framer
link-id
Link ID
OPERATOR
rw
framer
radio-excessive-ber-threshold
Radio Excessive
BER threshold
configuration
OPERATOR
rw
framer
radio-signal-degrade-threshold
Radio Signal
Degrade threshold
configuration
OPERATOR
rw
framer
radio-ber
Radio BER status
VIEWER
ro
framer
oper-status
Operational status
VIEWER
ro
framer
radio-pm-15min-interval[96]
Radio 15 minute
interval performance
monitor
VIEWER
ro
framer
radio-pm-24hour-interval[30]
Radio 24 hour
monitor
VIEWER
ro
PAGE 503
41
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
mrmc
mrmc-script
Radio scheme (Bit

VIEWER
Rate, Occupied BW,
Modulation and
Grade).\n Occupied
BW Vs Channel
Separation are listed
in pairs: (Occupied
BW Range[MHz],
Channel Separation
[MHz]):\n(5-7,7); (810,10); (12-14,13.7515); (25-29,27.5-30);
(33-38,40); (5055,55-56)
ro
mrmc
operation-mode
Operation mode
VIEWER
ro
mrmc
current-tx-profile
Current Tx profile
VIEWER
ro
mrmc
script-package-version
Modem script
package version
VIEWER
ro
mrmc
rfu-chosen-grade
RFU chosen grade
VIEWER
ro
mrmc
connected-rfu-grade
Actual connected
RFU grade
VIEWER
ro
mrmc
occupied-bandwidth
Occupied bandwidth
(MHz)
VIEWER
ro
mrmc
current-tx-qam
Current Tx QAM
VIEWER
ro
mrmc
current-tx-bitrate
Current Tx bitrate
VIEWER
ro
mrmc
max-available-tdm-interfaces
Max available TDM

interface
VIEWER
ro
mrmc
current-rx-profile
Current Rx profile
VIEWER
ro
mrmc
current-rx-qam
Current Rx QAM
VIEWER
ro
mrmc
current-rx-bitrate
Current Rx bitrate
VIEWER
ro
mrmc
current-rx-vc
Current profile Rx
TDM channels
VIEWER
ro
mrmc
current-tx-vc
Current profile Tx
TDM channels
VIEWER
ro
mrmc
min-rx-vc
Min profile Rx VC
VIEWER
ro
mrmc
max-rx-vc
Max profile Rx VC
VIEWER
ro
mrmc
current-script-capacity
current-scriptcapacity
VIEWER
ro
mrmc
current-acm-mode
current-acm-mode
VIEWER
ro
mrmc
loaded-script-version
Modem script
version
VIEWER
ro
PAGE 504
42
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
mrmc
loaded-script-description
Loaded script
description
VIEWER
ro
mrmc
mrmc-pm-15min-interval[96]
MRMC 15 minute
monitor
VIEWER
ro
mrmc
mrmc-pm-24hour-interval[30]
MRMC 24 hour
monitor
VIEWER
ro
Operator
rw
eth-shutdown-threshold-profile
When 'Automatic
State Propagation' is
not 'None', a
GBE/Radio mute (or
shutdown) will be
forced if the radio
profile degrades
below this threshold
adaptive-tx-power-admin
TX maximum power
adaptation admin
VIEWER
ro
TX maximum power
adaptation reference
class
VIEWER
ro
adaptive-tx-power-reference-class
current-acm-adaptive-rx-profile
Current ACM
adaptive Rx profile
VIEWER
ro
current-acm-adaptive-tx-profile
Current ACM
adaptive Tx profile
VIEWER
ro
mrmc
mrmc
mrmc
mrmc
mrmc
mrmc
max-adaptive-acm-rx-profile
Maximum adaptive
ACM Rx profile
VIEWER
ro
mrmc
min-adaptive-acm-rx-profile
Minimum adaptive
ACM Rx profile
VIEWER
ro
Tdm-radiopm
tdm-radio-pm-15min-interval[96]
Tdm radio UAS PM

15 minutes
monitoring
VIEWER
ro
Tdm-radiopm
tdm-radio-pm-24hour-interval[30]
Tdm radio UAS PM

24 hours monitoring
VIEWER
ro
modem
mse-threshold
MSE threshold
OPERATOR
rw
modem
xpi-threshold
XPI threshold
information
OPERATOR
rw
modem
mse
MSE
VIEWER
ro
modem
xpi
XPI level
VIEWER
ro
modem
defected-blocks
Defective blocks
VIEWER
ro
modem
slicer-input-scaling
Slicer input scaling

information
VIEWER
ro
PAGE 505
43
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
modem
ldpc-decoder-stress
LDPC decoder
stress
VIEWER
ro
modem
pm-15min-interval[96]
Modem 15 minute
monitor
VIEWER
ro
modem
pm-24hour-interval[30]
Modem 24 hour
monitor
VIEWER
ro
rfu
pm-rx-level-threshold-1
RFU performance
monitoring Rx level
OPERATOR
rw
OPERATOR
rw
OPERATOR
rw
threshold 1
configuration
rfu
pm-rx-level-threshold-2
RFU performance
monitoring Rx level
threshold 2
configuration
rfu
pm-tx-level-threshold
RFU performance
monitoring Tx level
Threshold
configuration
rfu
atpc-Admin
RFU ATPC
enable/disable
OPERATOR
rw
rfu
tx-freq
RFU Rx frequency
configuration
OPERATOR
rw
rfu
atpc-ref-rx-level
RFU ATPC
reference Rx Level
OPERATOR
rw
rfu
rx-freq
RFU Rx frequency
configuration
OPERATOR
rw
rfu
mute-tx
RFU mute transmitte
OPERATOR
rw
rfu
unfaded-rsl
RFU Unfaded Rx
level configuration
OPERATOR
rw
rfu
max-tx-level
RFU maximum
transmit level
configuration
OPERATOR
rw
rfu
log-interval
RFU log interval

configuration, in
seconds
OPERATOR
rw
rfu
log-Admin
RFU log
enable/disable
configuration
OPERATOR
rw
rfu
rfu-rf-loopback
RFU RF loopback
enable command
OPERATOR
rw
PAGE 506
44
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
rfu
standard-organization
RFU standard
organization
VIEWER
ro
rfu
temp-in-celsius
RFU temperature,
celsius
VIEWER
ro
rfu
temp-in-fahrenheit
RFU temperature,
fahrenheit
VIEWER
ro
rfu
tx-level-status
RFU transmit level
VIEWER
ro
rfu
rx-level
RFU receive level

status
VIEWER
ro
rfu
synthesizer-status
RFU synthesizer
VIEWER
ro
rfu
power-supply-status
RFU power supply

status
VIEWER
ro
rfu
Band
RFU band status
VIEWER
ro
rfu
min-tx-freq
RFU minimum Tx
frequency status
VIEWER
ro
rfu
max-tx-freq
RFU maximum Tx
frequency status
VIEWER
ro
rfu
tx-rx-freq-separation
RFU Tx Rx
frequency separation
VIEWER
ro
rfu
min-bandwidth
RFU minimum
bandwidth status
VIEWER
ro
rfu
max-bandwidth
RFU maximum
bandwidth status
VIEWER
ro
rfu
Pmax
RFU Pmax status
VIEWER
ro
rfu
communication-status
RFU communication
to remote unit status
VIEWER
ro
rfu
min-rx-freq
RFU minimum Rx
frequency status
VIEWER
ro
rfu
max-rx-freq
RFU maximum Rx
frequency status
VIEWER
ro
rfu
internal-download-status
RFU internal
download status
VIEWER
ro
rfu
internal-download-counter
RFU internal
download counter
status
VIEWER
ro
rfu
rfu-type
Type of connected
RFU
VIEWER
ro
rfu
rf-loopback-support
RFU RF loopback
support status
VIEWER
ro
PAGE 507
45
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
rfu
if-loopback-support
RFU IF loopback
support status
VIEWER
ro
rfu
predistortion-support
RFU predistortion
support status
VIEWER
ro
rfu
lo-sense
RFU lo sense status
VIEWER
ro
rfu
cable-tilt
RFU cable tilt status
VIEWER
ro
rfu
ifc-support
RFU IFC support

status
VIEWER
ro
rfu
pmin
RFU Pmin status
VIEWER
ro
rfu
rfu-address
RFU address status
VIEWER
ro
rfu
rfu-installation
RFU installation
status
VIEWER
ro
rfu
rfu-xpic-support
RFU XPIC support
VIEWER
ro
rfu
data-sci-errors
RFU data SCI

number of errors
VIEWER
ro
rfu
tx-freq-local-remote
RFU change Tx
frequency local
remote command
OPERATOR
rw
rfu
rx-freq-local-remote
RFU change Rx
frequency local
remote command
OPERATOR
rw
rfu
mse-forward
RFU MSE forward

command
OPERATOR
rw
rfu
serial-number
RFU serial number
VIEWER
ro
rfu
software-version-number
RFU running
software version
number
VIEWER
ro
with booter version

suffix
rfu
part-number
RFU part number
VIEWER
ro
rfu
pm-15min-interval[96]
RFU 15 minute
monitor
VIEWER
ro
rfu
pm-24hour-interval[30]
RFU 24 hour interval

performance monitor
VIEWER
ro
rfu
pm-15min-interval-diversity[96]
RFU 15 minute
interval diversity
VIEWER
ro
PAGE 508
46
Parameter
Group
rfu
Parameter
Description
pm-24hour-interval-diversity[30]
RFU 24 hour interval

diversity
Privileges
VIEWER
ro
30]
performance monitor
rfu
pm-15min-interval-combined[96]
RFU 15 minute
interval combined
performance monitor
VIEWER
ro
rfu
pm-24hour-interval-combined[30]
RFU 24 hour
interval combined
VIEWER
ro
performance monitor
rfu
rfu
RFU delay
calibration
configuration
operator
rw
delay-calibration
green-mode-admin
Activate Green Mode operator
rw
RFU Green Mode

Reference Rx Level
Configuration
operator
rw
green-mode-ref-rx-level
RFU mode
configuration
operator
rw
RFU RX level
connector source
configuration
operator
rw
rsl-connector-source
automatic-delay-calibration-status
RFU automatic delay

calibration status
VIEWER
ro
fpga-version-number
RFU running FW
version number
VIEWER
ro
ifc-support
RFU IFC support

status
VIEWER
ro
rfu-d-copartner-carrier
RFU-D copartner
carrier
VIEWER
ro
rfu-temp
RFU Temperature
Status
VIEWER
ro
rx-level-combined
RFU Rx level
combined status
VIEWER
ro
rx-level-diversity
RFU Rx level
diversity
VIEWER
ro
VIEWER
ro
internal-fw-download-counter
RFU internal
firmware download
counter status
rfu
rfu
rfu-mode
rfu
rfu
rfu
rfu
rfu
rfu
rfu
rfu
rfu-fwupload
PAGE 509
47
Parameter
Group
rfu-fwupload
Parameter
Description
internal-fw-download-status
Privileges
RFU internal
firmware download
status
VIEWER
ro
rfu-swupload
internal-download-counter
RFU internal
download counter
status
VIEWER
ro
rfu-swupload
internal-download-status
RFU internal
download status
VIEWER
ro
rfu-co
device-error
Device errors
VIEWER
ro
rfu-cl
device-error
Device errors
VIEWER
ro
rfic
if-loopback
IF loopback
activation
OPERATOR
rw
interfaces
ais-line-detection-Admin
Enabling or disabling
detection of AIS on
the interfaces. Upon
enabling, monitoring
is done for all
relevant interfaces,
both on the main
board and
the inserted T-card,
if present.
OPERATOR
rw
wayside
Admin
Enable/disable
Wayside channel
OPERATOR
rw
wayside
capacity
Wayside channel
capacity
OPERATOR
rw
wayside
auto-negotiation
Wayside auto
negotiation
OPERATOR
rw
wayside
duplex
Wayside half/full
duplex
OPERATOR
rw
wayside
ethernet-rate
Wayside Ethernet
port rate (Mbps)
OPERATOR
rw
ethernet
clock-source
clock source
OPERATOR
rw
ethernet
acm-ethernet-threshold
ACM ethernet
threshold
VIEWER
ro
bridge
ethernet-application
Ethernet application
OPERATOR
rw
bridge
qos-ip-tos-tc-pbits-option
IP priority options
bridge
management-type
Management type
VIEWER
ro
bridge
lag-ports-max-number
max number of LAGports in a bridge
VIEWER
ro
PAGE 510
rw
48
Parameter
Group
bridge
bridge
bridge
Parameter
Description
LearnedMACaddress
isremovedfromthe
forwardingtableafter
thisamountoftime
fromthelasttimethis
MACappearedinan
ingressingframe's
SourceAddress
OPERATOR
rw
lag-load-balance
LAGloadbalancing
algorithm
OPERATOR
rw
max-hops
Maximumhopsthe
BPDUwillbevalid
OPERATOR
rw
Bridgepriorityfor
eachdefinedMST
instance
OPERATOR
rw
msti-bridge-priority
Priority
Bridgepriority
OPERATOR
rw
provider-port-ethertype
Providerport
ethertype
OPERATOR
rw
ageing-time
bridge
bridge
bridge
Privileges
bridge
stp-protocol
SpanningTree
protocol
OPERATOR
rw
bridge
bridge-id
BridgeID
VIEWER
RO
bridge
bridge-role
Bridgerole
VIEWER
RO
bridge
root-id
RootID
VIEWER
RO
bridge
root-path-cost
Rootpathcost
VIEWER
RO
eth-port
learning
Learning Admin
OPERATOR
rw
eth-port
connector-type
Connector type
OPERATOR
rw
eth-port
port-connection
Port Physical Usage
OPERATOR
rw
eth-port
peer-ip-address
IP address of the
remote node
OPERATOR
rw
eth-port
peer-slot-id
ID of the remote slot

(0 for standalone
unit)
OPERATOR
rw
eth-port
peer-port-number
Remote port number

(0 for not connected)
OPERATOR
rw
eth-port
Admin
Enable/disable the
port
OPERATOR
rw
eth-port
auto-negotiation
Auto negotiation
OPERATOR
rw
eth-port
duplex
Half/full duplex
OPERATOR
rw
eth-port
ethernet-rate
Ethernet rate (mbps)
OPERATOR
rw
PAGE 511
49
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
eth-port
qos-classify-mac-da-override
First criteria:
classification
according to
destination MAC
address (MAC DA)
OPERATOR
rw
eth-port
qos-classify-initia
Third criteria
classification
OPERATOR
rw
eth-port
qos-classify-default
Priority override port
OPERATOR
rw
eth-port
qos-classify-vid-override
Second criteria:
classification
according to VLAN
ID
OPERATOR
rw
eth-port
qos-scheduling-scheme
Scheduling scheme
OPERATOR
rw
eth-port
flow-control
Flow control
OPERATOR
rw
eth-port
qos-egress-shaper
Egress shaper
OPERATOR
rw
eth-port
qos-egress-shaper-rate
Egress shaper rate.

The value should be
in steps of 64K for
values less than 1
Mbps. 1M steps for
values between 1
Mbps and 100 Mbps.
10M steps for values
between 100 Mbps
and 1000 Mbps
(GbE ports only).
OPERATOR
rw
eth-port
oper-status
Interface alias
OPERATOR
rw
eth-port
peer-mac-address
MAC address of the

remote port
OPERATOR
rw
eth-port
peer-description
Text describing the

remote interface
OPERATOR
rw
eth-port
qos-policer-name
Policer name
associated with this
port
OPERATOR
rw
eth-port
oper-status
Operational status
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
state
Port's state
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
interface-type
Interface type
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
interface-index
Interface index
VIEWER
ro
PAGE 512
50
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
eth-port
if-table-inoctets
The total number of

octets received on
the interface,
including framing
characters.
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
if-table-inucastpkts
The number of
subnetwork-unicast
packets delivered to
a higher-layer
protocol.
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
if-table-innucastpkts
The number of nonVIEWER

unicast packets
delivered to a higherlayer protocol
ro
eth-port
if-table-indiscards
The number of
VIEWER
inbound packets
which
were chosen to be
discarded, even
though no errors had
been detected, to
prevent their being
deliverable to a
higher-layer protocol.
ro
eth-port
if-table-inerrors
The number of
inbound packets that
contained errors
preventing them
from
being delivered to a
higher-layer
protocol
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
if-table-inunknownprotos
The number of
packets received via
the
interface which were
discarded because
of an unknown or
unsupported prot
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
if-table-outoctets
The total number of

octets transmitted
VIEWER
ro
out of the
interface, including
framing characters.
PAGE 513
51
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
eth-port
if-table-outucastpkts
The total number of

packets tha thigherlevel protocols
requested be
transmitted to a
subnetwork-unicast
address, including
those that were
discarded or not sent
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
if-table-outnucastpkts
The total number of

packets thathigherlevel protocols
requested
betransmitted to a
non-unicast address,
including those that
were discarded or
not sent.
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
if-table-outdiscards
The number of
outbound packets
whichwere chosen to
be discarded, even
been detected,
toprevent them from
being transmitted.
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
if-table-outerrors
The number of
outbound packets
that could not be
transmitted because
oferrors.
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
bad-octets-rcv
The sum of lengths

of all bad Ethernet
frames received
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
in-uni-casts
The number of good

frames received that
have Unicast
destination MAC
address.
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
brdc-pkts-rcv
The number of good

have Broadcast
destination MAC
address
VIEWER
ro
PAGE 514
52
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
eth-port
mc-pkts-rcv
The number of good

have Multicast
destination MAC
address.
This does not
include frames
counted in
'Pause frames
received' or frames
counted in
'Broadcast frames
received'.
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
in-pause
The number of good

VIEWER
ro
have Pause
destination MAC
address.
eth-port
undersize-pkts
Total frames
received with a
length of less than
64 octets but with a
valid FCS
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
fragments-pkts
Total frames
received with a
length of less than
64 octets but with an
invalid FCS.
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
oversize-pkts
Total frames
received with a
length of
more than 1632
octets but with a
valid
FCS.
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
jabber-pkts
Total frames
received with a
length of more than
1632 octets but with
an
invalid FCS.
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
in-rx-err
Total frames
received with error
signal from PHY
VIEWER
ro
PAGE 515
53
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
eth-port
in-fcs-err
Total frames
received with a CRC
error not counted in
'Fragments frames
received', 'Jabber
frames received' or
'Rx error frames
received'.
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
pkts-64-octets
Total frames
received with length
of
exactly 64 octets,
including those with
errors.
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
pkts-65-127-octets
Total frames
of between 65 and
127 octets inclusive,
including those with
errors.
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
pkts-128-255-octets
Total frames
of between 128 and
255 octets inclusive
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
pkts-256-511-octets
Total frames
of between 256 and
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
pkts-512-1023-octets
Total frames
of between 512 and
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
pkts-1024-max-octets
Total frames
of
above 1024 octets
inclusive, including
those with errors.
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
out-uni-casts
The number of
frames sent that
have a
Unicast destination
MAC address
VIEWER
ro
PAGE 516
54
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
eth-port
brdc-pkts-sent
The number of
good frames sent
that have a
Broadcast
destination MAC
address
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
mc-pkts-sent
The number of good

frames sent that
have a Multicast
destination MAC
address. This does
not include frames
counted in 'Pause
frames sent' or
frames counted in
'Broadcast frames
sent'.
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
out-pause
The number of Flow

Control frames sent
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
deferred
The total number of

VIEWER
successfully
transmitted frames
that experienced no
collisions but are
delayed because the
medium was busy
during the first
attempt. This counter
is applicable in
half-duplex only.
ro
eth-port
collisions
The number of
VIEWER
collision events seen
by
the MAC not
including those
counted in
'Single', 'Multiple',
'Excessive', or
'Late'. This counter is
applicable in
half-duplex only.
ro
PAGE 517
55
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
eth-port
single-collision-frame
The total number of

successfully
transmitted frames
that experienced
exactly one collision.
This counter is
applicable in halfduplex only.
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
multiple-collision-frame
The total number of

frames that have
been successfully
transmitted and have
also experienced
more than one
collision. This
counter is applicable
in half-duplex only
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
late-collision-detect
The number of
times a collision is
detected later than
512 bit-times into the
transmission of a
frame. This
in half-duplex
only.
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
out-fcs-err
The number of
frames transmitted
with
an invalid FCS
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
in-discards
A 32 bit counter that

counts the number
of good, non-filtered
frames that
normally would have
been forwarded, but
could not be due to a
lack of buffer
space
VIEWER
ro
PAGE 518
56
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
eth-port
in-filtered
A 16 bit counter that VIEWER

counts the number of
good frames that
were filtered due to
ingress policy rules.
The rules
include frames that
are dropped due to
802.1Q security
checks.
ro
eth-port
out-filtered
A 16 bit counter
that counts the
number of good
frames that were
filtered due
to egress policy
rules. The rules
include frames that
passed the ingress
port's policy but are
dropped due to
the egress policy of
this port, including
802.1Q security
checks.
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
actual-duplex
Actual duplex
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
actual-ethernet-rate
Actual Ethernet rate
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
mac-address
MAC address
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
good-octets-rcv
The sum of lengths

of all good Ethernet
frames received, that
are not bad
frames.
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
good-octets-sent
The sum of lengths

of all Ethernet
frames sent from this
MAC.
VIEWER
ro
eth-port
functionality-led
Functionality LED
VIEWER
ro
capacity-threshold
Capacity threshold
[Mbps]
Operator
clear-peer-info
Clear all peer's

information
Operator
clear-rmon
Clear RMON
statistics
Operator
connector-type
Connector type
Operator
eth-port
eth-port
eth-port
eth-port
PAGE 519
rw
rw
rw
rw
57
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
eth-port
duplex
Half/full duplex
Operator
rw
eth-port
edge-port
Enable as edge port
Operator
rw
eth-port
ethernet-rate
Operator
rw
eth-port
evc-name
EVC name
Operator
rw
eth-port
flow-control
Flow control
Operator
rw
eth-port
priority
Port's priority
Operator
throughput-threshold
Throughput
threshold [Mbps]
Operator
type
Port's type
Operator
utilization-threshold
Utilization threshold
[%]
Operator
eth-port
vlan
Default VLAN ID
Operator
eth-port
designated-path-cost
Designated path cost VIEWER
RO
VIEWER
excess-collision-drop
The number of
frames dropped in
the transmit MAC
because the frame
experienced 16
consecutive
collisions. This
in half-duplex only.
RO
management-auto-negotiation
Management port
auto negotiation
VIEWER
management-capacity
Management port
capacity
VIEWER
management-duplex
Management port
duplex
VIEWER
management-ethernet-rate
Management port
Ethernet rate (Mbps)
VIEWER
eth-port
management-only
Management only
VIEWER
RO
eth-port
management-port-admin
Port's admin
VIEWER
RO
management-vlan
Management VLAN
id
VIEWER
pm-15
15 Minute PM
minutes monitoring
VIEWER
pm-24
24 Hour PM hours
monitoring
VIEWER
eth-port
eth-port
eth-port
eth-port
eth-port
eth-port
eth-port
eth-port
eth-port
eth-port
eth-port
PAGE 520
rw
rw
rw
rw
rw
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
58
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
eth-port
protection-only
Protection only
VIEWER
RO
eth-port
protection-port-admin
Port's admin
VIEWER
RO
eth-port
role
Port's role
VIEWER
RO
wayside-auto-negotiation
Wayside auto
negotiation
VIEWER
wayside-capacity
Wayside port
capacity
VIEWER
wayside-duplex
Wayside half/full
duplex
VIEWER
wayside-ethernet-rate
Wayside Ethernet
port rate (Mbps)
VIEWER
eth-port
wayside-only
Wayside only
VIEWER
RO
eth-port
wayside-port-admin
Port's admin
VIEWER
RO
serviceoam
auto-linktrace-interval
Automatic linktrace
periodic time
[seconds]
OPERATOR
rw
serviceoam
remote-meps-learning-time
Remote MEPs
learning time (for
learned remote
MEPs) (seconds)
OPERATOR
rw
lag-port
Admin
Port's admin
Operator
rw
lag-port
auto-negotiation
Auto negotiation
Operator
rw
lag-port
duplex
Half/Full duplex
Operator
rw
lag-port
edge-port
Enable as edge port
Operator
rw
lag-port
ethernet-rate
Operator
rw
lag-port
evc-name
EVC name
Operator
rw
lag-port
flow-control
Flow control
Operator
rw
lag-port
interface-alias
Interface alias
Operator
rw
lag-port
Learning
Learning admin
Operator
rw
msti-port-path-cost
Path cost for each

defined MST
instance
Operator
msti-port-priority
Interface priority for

each defined MST
instance
Operator
path-cost
Path cost
Operator
peer-description
Text describing the

remote interface
Operator
eth-port
eth-port
eth-port
eth-port
lag-port
lag-port
lag-port
lag-port
PAGE 521
RO
RO
RO
RO
rw
rw
rw
rw
59
Parameter
Group
lag-port
Parameter
Description
Privileges
peer-ip-address
IP address of the
remote node
Operator
peer-mac-address
MAC address of the

remote port
Operator
peer-port-number
Remote port number

(0 for not connected)
Operator
peer-slot-id
ID of the remote slot

(0 for standalone
unit)
Operator
lag-port
priority
Port's priority
Operator
rw
lag-port
qos-classify-default
Priority override port
Operator
rw
qos-classify-initial
Classifying initial
criteria
Operator
qos-classify-mac-da-override
Classifier DA priority
override
Operator
qos-classify-vid-override
Classifier VID
override priority
Operator
lag-port
qos-scheduling-scheme
Scheduling scheme
Operator
rw
lag-port
type
Port's type
Operator
rw
lag-port
vlan
Default VLAN ID
Operator
rw
lag-port
designated-path-cost
Designated path cost VIEWER
RO
if-table-indiscards
The number of
VIEWER
inbound packets
which were chosen
to be discarded even
been detected to
prevent their being
deliverable to a
RO
if-table-inerrors
The number of
VIEWER
inbound packets that
contained errors
preventing them
from being
deliverable to a
RO
if-table-innucastpkts
The number of nonVIEWER

unicast packets
delivered to a higherlayer protocol.
RO
lag-port
lag-port
lag-port
lag-port
lag-port
lag-port
lag-port
lag-port
lag-port
PAGE 522
rw
rw
rw
rw
rw
rw
rw
60
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
lag-port
Privileges
VIEWER
if-table-inoctets
The total number of

octets received on
the interface,
including framing
characters.
VIEWER
if-table-inucastpkts
The number of
subnetwork-unicast
packets delivered to
a higher-layer
protocol.
VIEWER
if-table-inunknownprotos
The number of
packets received via
the interface which
were discarded
because of an
unknown or
unsupported
protocol.
VIEWER
if-table-outdiscards
The number of
outbound packets
which were chosen
to be discarded even
been detected to
prevent their being
transmitted.
VIEWER
if-table-outerrors
The number of
outbound packets
that could not be
transmitted because
of errors.
VIEWER
if-table-outnucastpkts
The total number of

packets that higherlevel protocols
requested be
transmitted to a nonunicast address,
including those that
were discarded or
not sent.
VIEWER
if-table-outoctets
The total number of

octets transmitted
out of the interface,
including framing
characters.
lag-port
lag-port
lag-port
lag-port
lag-port
lag-port
PAGE 523
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
61
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
lag-port
Privileges
VIEWER
if-table-outucastpkts
The total number of

packets that higherlevel protocols
requested be
transmitted to a
subnetwork-unicast
address, including
those that were
discarded or not
sent.
lag-port
interface-index
Interface index
VIEWER
RO
lag-port
interface-type
Interface type
VIEWER
RO
list of LAG members

which are associated
with the LAG-port
VIEWER
lag-members-list
max number of
members in a LAGport
VIEWER
lag-members-max-number
lag-port
mac-address
MAC address
VIEWER
RO
lag-port
management-only
Management only
VIEWER
RO
lag-port
oper-status
Operational status
VIEWER
RO
lag-port
protection-only
Protection only
VIEWER
RO
lag-port
role
Port's role
VIEWER
RO
lag-port
state
Port's state
VIEWER
RO
lag-port
wayside-only
Wayside only
VIEWER
RO
port-group
line-code-1-8
Line coding for T1

interfaces 1-8
OPERATOR
rw
port-group
line-code-9-16
Line coding for T1

interfaces 9-16
OPERATOR
rw
port-group
exber-threshold
Excessive BER
threshold
OPERATOR
rw
port-group
sd-threshold
Signal degrade
threshold
OPERATOR
rw
port-group
pdh-led[2]
PDH LED color
VIEWER
ro
port-group
line-code
Line code
OPERATOR
rw
line-code-17-24
Line coding for T1

interfaces 17-24
OPERATOR
rw
lag-port
lag-port
port-group
RO
RO
RO
port-group
line-code-25-32
Line coding for T1

interfaces 25-32
OPERATOR
rw
e1t1-port
line-loopback
Line loopback
OPERATOR
rw
PAGE 524
62
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
e1t1-port
interface-alias
Interface alias
e1t1-port
oper-status
Operational status
VIEWER
ro
e1t1-port
Admin
Enable/disable the
port
OPERATOR
ro
e1t1-port
e1t1-priority
Dynamic E1/DS1
allocation priority
OPERATOR
ro
e1t1-port
interface-type
Interface type
VIEWER
ro
e1t1-port
port-curr-ber
E1/DS1 port current

BER
VIEWER
ro
e1t1-port
ais-detection-status
Status of AIS
detection on the port
VIEWER
ro
e1t1-port
line-pm-15[96]
Line PM 15 minute
monitoring
VIEWER
ro
e1t1-port
line-pm-24[30]
Line PM 24 hour
monitoring
VIEWER
ro
e1t1-port
cable-length
DS1 cable length
OPERATOR
rw
trails
available-tdm-interfaces
Available TDM
Interfaces
VIEWER
ro
Available SDH
Interfaces
VIEWER
ro
trails
available-sdh-interfaces
rw
trails
available-radio-interfaces
Available RADIO
Interfaces
VIEWER
ro
trails
available-sync-tdm-interfaces
available-sync-tdminterface
VIEWER
ro
trails
available-sync-sdh-interfaces
available-sync-sdhinterface
VIEWER
ro
trails
available-sync-radio-interfaces
available-sync-radiointerface
VIEWER
ro
trails
trails-level-trail-trap-admin
trail level trail trap

admin
(enable/disable)
rw
Admin
stm1
admin
Enable/disable
receiving and
transmitting traffic
through the STM-1
interface
OPERATOR
rw
stm1
line-tx-protection-mode
STM-1 interface
transmission
behavior under
protection mode
OPERATOR
rw
PAGE 525
63
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
stm1
clock-source
The clock source

used as a reference
for the outgoing
STM-1 signal.
OPERATOR
rw
stm1
sync-vc
The VC channel
which will be used to
synchronize the
STM-1 interface.
OPERATOR
rw
stm1
force-mute
STM-1 mute override OPERATOR
rw
stm1
trace-identifier-string-length
Length of the STM-1 OPERATOR

signal J0 trace
identifier
rw
stm1
excessive-ber-threshold
STM-1 excessive
BER threshold
OPERATOR
rw
configuration
stm1
signal-degrade-threshold
STM-1 signal
degrade threshold
configuration
OPERATOR
rw
stm1
loopback-timeout
Loopback timeout in
minutes (0 for
unlimited)
OPERATOR
rw
stm1
node-to-node-connection
The indication
whether the STM-1
interface connects
IP-10 nodes in a
network
OPERATOR
rw
stm1
peer-ip-address
IP address of the
remote STM1
element
OPERATOR
rw
stm1
peer-port-number
Remote STM-1 port

number
OPERATOR
rw
stm1
peer-slot-id
Slot ID of the remote

STM1 port
OPERATOR
rw
stm1
ais-vc-signaling-admin
Enabling or disabling
the signaling of AIS
upon receiving such
from
OPERATOR
rw
stm1
line-loopback
Type of loopback in
the STM-1 interface
OPERATOR
rw
PAGE 526
64
Parameter
Group
Parameter
Description
Privileges
stm1
transmit-trace-identifier
String used as the

transmitted STM-1
signal J0 trace
identifier
OPERATOR
rw
stm1
expected-trace-identifier
String expected to
be received as the
STM-1 signal J0
trace identifier
OPERATOR
rw
stm1
peer-description
Description of the
remote STM1
element
OPERATOR
rw
stm1
oper-status
Operational status
VIEWER
ro
stm1
interface-type
Type of Interface
VIEWER
ro
stm1
max-num-of-vc
Maximum number of
VC in STM
VIEWER
ro
stm1
clock-source-status
The clock source

that is set at the
moment
VIEWER
ro
stm1
loopback-counter
Loopback time left

(in seconds)
VIEWER
ro
stm1
ais-detection-status-on-vc[63]
Status of AIS
detection on a
specific VC
VIEWER
ro
stm1
received-trace-identifier
STM-1 signal J0
trace identifier
actually received
from the interface
VIEWER
ro
stm1
pm-15[96]
15 Minutes PM
monitoring
VIEWER
ro
stm1
pm-24[30]
24 Hours PM
monitoring
VIEWER
ro
stm1
stm1-led
STM-1 SFP led
VIEWER
ro
stm1
ds1-standard-klm-mapping
Allows choosing
between standard
and proprietary KLM
mapping
lineloopback
timeout
lineloopback
line-loopback[16]
oopback timeout in
minutes (0 for
unlimited)
Line loopback
PAGE 527
rw
Operator
OPERATOR
rw
OPERATOR
rw
65
Parameter
Group
lineloopback
lineloopback
lineloopback
Parameter
Description
Privileges
counter
Loopback time left
VIEWER
stm1-line-loopback
STM-1/OC-3 Line
loopback
stm1-timeout
STM-1/OC-3
Loopback timeout in
minutes (0 for
unlimited)
Operator
STM-1/OC-3
Loopback counter in
seconds
VIEWER
Operator
ro
rw
rw
lineloopback
stm1-counter
radioloopback
timeout
Loopback timeout in
minutes
OPERATOR
rw
radioloopback
if-loopback[16]
IF loopback activatio
OPERATOR
rw
radioloopback
rfu-rf-loopback
RFU RF Loopback
Enable Command
OPERATOR
rw
radioloopback
counter
Loopback time left
VIEWER
ro
eow
Admin
Engineering order
wire admin
VIEWER
userchannel
admin
User channel admin
Operator
userchannel
type
User channel type
Operator
PAGE 528
ro
ro
rw
rw
66
CLI Procedures
This guide provides instructions for specific FibeAir IP-10 CLI based operations. It is updated up to
software release 6.6.1.
CLI (Command Line Interface) is used to perform IP-10 configuration and obtain system statistical and
performance information.
Using the CLI, you can perform configuration operations for stand-alone IP-10 units or units connected in a
stacked configuration, as well as configure several IP-10 units in a single batch command.
In a stacked configuration, all commands are available both in the main and extension units unless otherwise
stated.
Basic Commands
The following basic commands are available when you first log in, if you belong to the Operator
user group:
ls
List entities
get
Get parameter
set
Set parameter
help
Help
cd
Change directory
exit
Exit CLI
logout
Logout from CLI
cli-ver
CLI version
cls
Clear screen
shell
Enter secondary shell
write
Write the current switch configuration to the configuration file
show-tree
Show entity tree
find
Search for a string in the parameter's entity name and information fields
lsp
List entity parameters and commands
echo
echoing free text to the console
In order to get help on a specific command, add a question mark or the parameter --help after
the command.
In addition, you can use the up and down arrow keys, or the q key, when the word END
appears at the end of the screen.
PAGE 529
67
Note: To perform the operations in this guide, you should log in as follows:
User: admin or operator
Password: admin
Basic System Configuration

Setting IP Addresses
To define a new IP address, do the following at the main unit:
1. Log in as follows:
User: admin or operator
Password: admin
2. At the command prompt, type: cd management/networking/ip-address/, and press Enter.
3. Type: get ip-address, and press Enter. This will give you the current IP address.
4. Type: set ip-address <ip> (the new IP address), and press Enter.
Adding Users
To define a new user, do the following:
1. Log in.
2. At the command prompt, type: cd management/mng-services/users/, and press Enter.
3. Type: add-user <name> <group> <password aging days> <expiration date>, and press
Enter.
4. Type the password for the new user.
Navigating between Stacked Units

Going from the main unit to a different unit
After log-in, prompt is always given at the main unit. In order to change the prompt to a different
unit do the following:
1. Log in.
2. At the command prompt, type: cd /platform/shelf-manager/, and press Enter.
PAGE 530
68
3. Type: logon-unit <slot number>, and press Enter.

The prompt will change according to the relevant slot ID. For example, the prompt for a unit
located in slot 3 will show:
IP-10-SLOT-3:/>
Returning to Main Unit

In order to go back to the main unit, type
1. Log in.
Adding Users
To define a new user, do the following:
1. Log in.
2. At the command prompt, type: cd management/mng-services/users/, and press Enter.
3. Type: add-user <name> <group>, and press Enter.
4. Type the password for the new user.
Performing Resets
In Stacked Configuration
In order to reset a specific unit in the shelf, do the following at the main unit:
1. Log in.
3.
Type: reset-unit <slot ID> , and press Enter.
Arguments description:
Slot ID: slot of the IDU to be reset (1 6)
In order to reset all extension units (but not the main unit), do the following at the main unit:
1. Log in.
PAGE 531
69
3.
Type: reset-extensions <slot ID>
In order to reset all units (including the main unit), do the following at the main unit:
1. Log in.
3.
Type: reset-shelf <slot ID>
In any IDU (stand-alone or shelf)

In order to reset an IDU locally (stand-alone or in extension prompt in the shelf), do the following:
1. Log in.
2. At the command prompt, type: cd /platform/idc-board/, and press Enter.
3.
Type: reset-unit <slot ID> , and press Enter.
TDM Trail Management

Defining a TDM Trail
In order to define a TDM trail, do the following at the main unit:
1. Log in.
2. At the command prompt, type: cd /interfaces/pdh/trails/, and press Enter.
3.
Type: add-trail <trail ID> <trail desctiption> <ACM priority> <operational/reserved>

<protected/unprotected> <interface 1 slot #> <interface 1 type> <interface 1 number>
<interface 2 slot #> <interface 2 type> <interface 2 number> , and press Enter.
Trail-ID: up to 16 alphanumeric characters
Trail description: string up to 32 characters
ACM priority: high or low
Operational/reserved: reserved trails are introduced in the database and the bandwidth
wont be used for TDM traffic (it may be used for ethernet traffic) but traffic does not flow.
For operational trails bandwidth is fully allocated and traffic flows
PAGE 532
70
Protected/unprotected: unprotected trails are mappings between two interfaces only.

Protected trails are mappings between an end-point interfaces and two other interfaces, the
first of which is the primary path and the second of which is the secondary path (see SNCP
section below).
Interface slot: slot number of the IDU containing the interface (from 1 to 6)
Interface type: line (E1/T1) or radio
Interface number: the number of the E1/T1 interface or radio VC to be used.

o
For E1/T1 it can be 1 to 32 (1 to 16 if no extra 16 E1 T-card is installed)
For radio, the maximum number depends on the radio script being used
Unprotected trail example:

add-trail id1 desc1 high operational unprotected 1 line 1 1 radio 1.
See Trails Defined in the System

In order to see all the defined trails, do the following:
1. Log in.
3. To show all trails type: show-all-trails, and press Enter.
4. To show a specific trail by its ID type: show-trail-by-id <trail ID>, and press Enter.
5. To show a specific trail by its source interface type: show-trail-by-src <interface 1 slot #>
<interface 1 type> <interface 1 number>, and press Enter.
The trails will be shown in a table as follows (this is an example of a trail from E1#1 in slot 2 to
radio VC#1 in slot 3:
================================================================
Legend: s/i/n/- 's'=slot-id 'i'=if-type 'n'=if-num '-'=Empty
s(0..6) i(l=line/r=radio/s=stm-1/c=chain/s=sync_ethernet) n(1..180)
================================================================
Source Dest1 Dest2 Dest3 Dest4
Dest5 Dest6 Dest7 Dest8 Dest9
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------IndexInDb = 1, ID = t1, Desc = d1, Prio = high

Act = operational, TS = (0)
PAGE 533
71
2/l/ 1 3/r/ 1
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Where 2/l/1 denotes slot 2/line/interface 1.
Deleting Trails
There are several ways to delete trails:
1. Log in.
3. To delete all trails type: del-all-trails, and press Enter.
4. To delete a specific trail by its ID type: del-trail-by-id <trail ID>, and press Enter.
4. To delete a specific trail by its source interface type: del-trail-by-src <interface 1 slot #>
<interface 1 type> <interface 1 number>, and press Enter.
Activating/Deactivating Trails
Trails mode can be toggled between active and reserved, as follows:
1. Log in.
3. To activate/reserve all trails type: act-all-trails, and press Enter.
4. To activate/reserve a specific trail by its ID type: act-trail-by-id <trail ID>, and press Enter.
TDM Protected Trails (SNCP)

All operations for unprotected trails are available for protected trails as well. The additional
operations for protected trails are described in this section.
PAGE 534
72
Defining a Protected TDM Trail

In order to define a TDM trail, do the following at the main unit:
1. Log in.
3.
Type: add-trail <trail ID> <trail desctiption> <ACM priority> <operational/reserved>

<protected/unprotected> <end-point interface slot #> < end-point interface type> < endpoint interface number> <primary path slot #> < primary path type> < primary path
number> <secondary path slot #> < secondary path type> < secondary path number>,
and press Enter.
Trail-ID: up to 16 alphanumeric characters
Trail description: string up to 32 characters
ACM priority: high or low
Operational/reserved: reserved trails are introduced in the database and the bandwidth
wont be used for TDM traffic (it may be used for ethernet traffic) but traffic does not flow.
For operational trails bandwidth is fully allocated and traffic flows
Protected/unprotected: unprotected trails are mappings between two interfaces only.

Protected trails are mappings between an end-point interfaces and two other interfaces, the
first of which is the primary path and the second of which is the secondary path
Interface slot: slot number of the IDU containing the interface (from 1 to 6)
Interface type: line (E1/T1) or radio
Interface number: the number of the E1/T1 interface or radio VC to be used.

o
For E1/T1 it can be 1 to 32 (1 to 16 if no extra 16 E1 T-card is installed)
For radio, the maximum number depends on the radio script being used
Protected trail example:

add-trail id1 desc1 high operational protected 1 line 1 2 radio 1 3 radio 1.
PAGE 535
73
Forcing Trails to Active/Standby

Each protected trail can be forced to make either one of its paths active (or none of them) as
follows:
1. Log in.
3. To force all trails to one of their paths type: protected-trail-force-active <Id> <path>, and
press Enter.
4. To force a specific trail by its ID type to one of its paths type: protected-trail-force-active-byid <Id> <path>, and press Enter.
<Id> - trail ID
<path> - primary, secondary or none
Showing TDM Trail PMs and Status

Showing TDM Trail PM Measurements
In order to see the TDM trails end-to-end PM measurements (as measured from this systems
interface), do the following:
1. Log in.
3. To show PMs of all trails type: show-all-trail-pms, and press Enter.
4. To show a specific trails PMs by its ID type: show-trail-pms-by-id <trail ID> <15 min
interval> <24h interval>, and press Enter.
<15min/24h interval> is the interval number to be shown, where 0 is the current interval, 1 is
the previous one and so on. If no interval is selected, the current one will be shown.
Showing TDM Trail Status

In order to see the TDM trails end-to-end PM measurements (as measured from this systems
interface), do the following:
1. Log in.
3. To show PMs of all trails type: show-all-trail-alarms and press Enter.
PAGE 536
74
Ethernet Switch Application Configuration

The Ethernet Switch menu includes the Switch Configuration, STP Protocol, STP Configuration,
and QoS & Rate Limiting items.
The Ethernet switching methods include:

Single Pipe - Ethernet switching is disabled, whereby only a single Ethernet interface is used for
traffic and the unit operates as a point-to-point microwave Ethernet radio.
Managed Switch - For Layer 2 802.1Q switching.
Metro switch - Ethernet Q-in-Q provider switch is enabled.
To set the Ethernet switching method, do the following:
1. Log in.
2. At the command prompt, type: cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/, and press Enter.
3. Type: set ethernet-application <Ethernet application type> (Single pipe, Managed switch,
or Metro switch), and press Enter.
4. The system will reset (automatically).
Management Ports
Setting the Number of Management Ports
1. At the command prompt, type: cd /management/networking/, and press Enter.
2. Type: set number-of-ports <no. of ports> (0-3), and press Enter.
Setting the Management Type (inband, outband, VLAN)
1. At the command prompt, type: cd /management/networking/, and press Enter.
2. Type set type < in-band or out-of-band >, and press Enter.
If you choose in-band, you should configure management VLAN id as follows:
a) At the command prompt, type: cd /management/networking/, and press Enter.
b) Type set vlan <no. of VLAN> (1-4090), and press Enter.
Port Configuration
Flow Control (Single Pipe only)
To enable or disable flow control, do the following
PAGE 537
75
1. At the command prompt, type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.]/, and press

Enter.
2. Type set flow-control <on/off>, and press Enter.
Managed Switch Ethernet Ports
To enable or disable port admin, do the following:

Enter.
2. Type set admin <enable/disable>, and press Enter.
To set port speed rate, do the following:
Enter.
2. Type set ethernet-rate <Rate> (10, 100 or 1000 Mbps), and press Enter.
To set port duplex, do the following:
Enter.
2. Type set duplex < full-duplex / half-duplex > ,and press Enter.
To set auto negotiation on/off, do the following:
Enter.
2. Type set auto-negotiation <on/off>, and press Enter.
To set the port type, do the following:
Enter.
2. Type set type <access or trunk>, and press Enter.
To set the default VLAN ID, do the following:
Enter.
2. Type set vlan <VLAN no.> (1-4090), and press Enter.
PAGE 538
76
To enable or disable port learning, do the following:

Enter.
2. Type set learning <enable/disable>, and press Enter.
To add, remove, accept VLANS, do the following:
1. The port type must be trunk.
2. At the command prompt, type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port [port no.]/, and press
Enter.
3. Type set-allowed-vlans <add, except, remove> <VLAN no.>, and press Enter.
4. Type set-allowed-vlans < all, no-vlans>, and press Enter.
PAGE 539
77
VLAN Configuration
To add, remove, enable, or disable VLANs, do the following:
1. At the command prompt, type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/, and press Enter.
2. Type vlan <VLAN no.> <add, remove, enable, disable>, and press Enter.
To add or change the VLAN name, do the following:
1. At the command prompt, type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/, and press Enter.
2. Type vlan <VLAN no.> name <VLAN name>, and press Enter.
QoS Configuration
Ingress Classifier
To set classify initial, do the following:

Enter.
2. Type set qos-classify-initial < ip-tos, ip-tos-over-vlan-pbits, port, vlan-pbits, vlan-pbitsover-ip-tos>, and press Enter.
To set classify vid override, do the following:
Enter.
2. Type set qos-classify-vid-override <disable, pbit-override, queue-and-pbit-override,
queue-override>, and press Enter.
To set classify mac da override, do the following:
Enter.
2. Type set qos-classify-mac-da-override <disable, pbit-override, queue-and-pbit-override,
queue-override>, and press Enter.
To set classify default, do the following:
PAGE 540
78

Enter.
2. Type set qos-classify-default<1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th>, and press Enter.
Egress Scheduler
To set Egress scheduler, do the following:

Enter.
2. Type: set qos-scheduling-scheme < all-queues-hrr, all-queues-strict, fourth-and-thirdqueues-strict, fourth-queue-strict >, and press Enter.
Egress Shaper
To set egress shaper, do the following:

1. At the command prompt, type: cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.]/, and press
Enter.
2. Type: set qos-egress-shaper on/off, and press Enter.
3. Type: set qos-egress-shaper-rate <rate>, and press Enter.
Policer
To add/remove Policer, do the following:

2. Type: qos-policer <add, remove> <policer name>, and press Enter.
To add a class to the Policer, do the following:
2. Type: qos-policer-class <add, remove> <policer class name> <policer name> <matching
type: all, arp, first-queue, second-queue, third-queue, fourth-queue, broadcast,
multicast, non-tcp-udp, tcp-control, tcp-data, udp, unicast, unknown-unicast, unknownmulticast> <rate> <CBS> <exceed action: drop>, and press Enter.
3. Type: qos-show-policers to verify the data, and press Enter.
QoS Tables
To set VLAN Pbits Priority Remap Table, do the following:

1. At the command prompt, type: cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port [port no.]/, and press
Enter.
PAGE 541
79
2. Type: qos-set-vlan-pbits-prio-remap <original Pbit> <Remapped Pbit>, and press Enter.

To set VLAN ID to Queue Table, do the following:
2. Type: qos-vlan-to-queue set/remove <VID> <queue ID: 1st-queue, 2nd-queue, 3rd-queue,
4th-queue >, and press Enter.
To set VLAN Pbits to Queue Table, do the following:
2. Type: qos-set-vlan-tag-pbit-val <VLAN_Pbit> <queue ID: 1st-queue, 2nd-queue, 3rdqueue, 4th-queue >, and press Enter.
To set IP Pbits to Queue Table, do the following:
2. Type: qos-set-ip-pbit-val <IP_Pbit> <queue ID: 1st-queue, 2nd-queue, 3rd-queue, 4thqueue>, and press Enter.
To set IP priority options, do the following:
2. Type: set qos-ip-tos-tc-pbits-option <diffserv, ip-precedence>, and press Enter.
To set static MAC table, do the following:
2. Type: qos-static-mac-priority set/remove <MAC address> <dest.port no.[1-8]> <priority
[0-7]> <VLAN ID [1-4090]> , and press Enter.
To set Queue Weights table, do the following:
2. Type: qos-set-scheduler-q-weight <queue ID: 1st-queue, 2nd-queue, 3rd-queue, 4thqueue > <weight:1-32>, and press Enter.
PAGE 542
80
Auxiliary Channels
Wayside Channel
At the command prompt, type: cd interfaces/wayside/, and press Enter.

To set port admin, do the following:
1. Type: set admin <enable/disable>, and press Enter.
To set port rate:
1. Type: set ethernet-rate <10mbps or 100mbps>, and press Enter.
To set auto negotiation on/off:
1. Type: set auto-negotiation <on/off>, and press Enter.
To set port duplex:
1. Type: set duplex <full-duplex or half-duplex>, and press Enter.
User Channel
1. At the command prompt, type: cd interfaces/auxiliary/user-channel/, and press Enter

To set port admin:
1. Type: set admin <enable/disable>, and press Enter.
To set port type:
1. Type: set type asynchronous-<rs232 or v-11>, and press Enter.
PAGE 543
81
Automatic State Propagation, 1+0 Configuration Only

At the command prompt, type: cd interfaces/ethernet/, and press Enter.
To set Automatic state Propagation (also called GBE-mute-override) in Single Pipe application:
1. Type: set-gbe-mute-override <criteria: none, lof-loc, lof-loc-excber, lof-loc-remote, lofloc-excber-remote >, and press Enter.
To set Automatic state Propagation (also called GBE-mute-override) in Managed/Metro
application:
1. Type: set-gbe-mute-override <criteria: none, lof, lof-excber, lof-remote, lof-excberremote >, and press Enter.
Ethernet Shutdown (Rx) Profile Threshold (when ACM is enabled)
At the command prompt, type: cd radio/mrmc/, and press Enter

To set Ethernet shutdown (Rx) profile threshold:
1. Type: set eth-shutdown-threshold-profile < profile-0 to profile-7 >, and press Enter.
Metro Switch and Port Type Configuration

To set Metro Switch:
1. At the prompt (IP-10:/>), type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/, and press Enter.
2. At the new prompt, type set ethernet-application metro-switch, and press Enter.
3. Confirm by typing yes, and press Enter.
The system will restart automatically.
PAGE 544
82
To set the port type (CN/PN):

1. At the prompt (IP-10:/>), type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[port no.], and press
Enter.
2. At the new prompt, type set type customer-network (or provider-network), and press Enter.
To set Default VLAN on CN ports:
Enter.
2. At the new prompt, type set vlan <VLAN ID>, and press Enter.
To set Allowed VLANs on PN ports:
Enter.
2. At the new prompt, type set-allowed-vlans <add,all,except,no-vlans,remove> <VLAN ID>,
and press Enter.
To set provider port ether type:
1. At the prompt (IP-10:/>), type cd interfaces/ethernet/bridge/, and press Enter.
2. At the new prompt, type set provider-port-ethertype <0x88a8, 0x8100, 0x9100, 0x9200>,
and press Enter.
PAGE 545
83
Radio Script Configuration

To set the radio script:
1. At the prompt (IP-10:/>), type cd radio/mrmc/, then press Enter.
2. At the new prompt, type change-script-cmd < Script's name> < Operational mode>
<Maximum profile> disable-adaptive-power, then press Enter.
Parameter values for the radio script include:
Script Name
10Mbps-6.5MHz-4QAM-Grade-1
155Mbps-26MHz-128QAM-Grade-1
ACM_181Mbps-26MHz-256QAM-Grade-1
ACM_367Mbps-52MHz-256QAM-Grade-1
ACM_42Mbps-6.5MHz-256QAM-Grade-1
ACM_87Mbps-12.5MHz-256QAM-Grade-1
Operational Mode
acm-adaptive-mode
acm-fixed-mode
regular-mode (for non ACM scripts)
Maximum Profile
Note: For ,choose a specific profile for ACM fixed mode . In regular mode only profile-0 is
available.
profile-0
profile-1
profile-2
profile-3
profile-4
profile-5
profile-6
profile-7
PAGE 546
84
Configuration Backup
The configuration backup file must be transferred between the main unit and an external site by
FTP. Configuration files may be transferred between the extension units and the main unit.
Setting External FTP Client Site Parameters

To define the FTP settings, do the following at the main unit:
1. At the command prompt, type: /platform/idc-board, and press Enter.
2. Type: set set host-ip <ip> (the clients IP address), and press Enter.
3. Type: set host-path <path> (the site to the desired file location at the client), and press Enter.
4. Type: set set user-name <user-name> (the user name expected from client), and press
Enter.
5. Type: change-user-password and press Enter; upon prompt write the password expected
from client, and press Enter.
Creating Backup Files of Existing Configuration

1. At the command prompt, type: cd /platform/shelf-manager/
2. In order to create the backup file for a certain slot, type: config-backup --unit <slot number>,
and press Enter.
2. In order to create the backup file for a all the slots in the shelf, type: config-backup --all, and
press Enter.
Saving Configuration Files in External Site

1. At the command prompt, type: cd /platform/idc-board/
2. In order to upload the file to the FTP client, type: upload-archive configuration, and press
Enter.
3. In order to see the upload status, type: get config-upload-status, and press Enter.
"ready" means "no action was taken, ready to continue"
A successful result will give "succeeded"
Downloading Saved Configuration Files

1. At the command prompt, type: cd /platform/idc-board/
2. In order to download the file from the FTP client, type: download-archive configuration, and
press Enter.
PAGE 547
85
3. In order to see the upload status, type: get config-download-status, and press Enter.
Restoring Configuration from Files

1. At the command prompt, type: cd /platform/shelf-manager/
2. In order to create the backup file:
For a certain slot, type: config-restore --unit <slot number>, and press Enter.
For all the slots in the shelf, type: config-restore --all, and press Enter.
3. In order to reset the relevant units: reset-extensions reset-shelf
reset-unit
For a certain slot, type: reset-unit <slot number>, and press Enter.
For all the slots in the shelf, type: reset-shelf, and press Enter.
For all the extension slots in the shelf, type: reset-extensions, and press Enter.
Software Version Management

The software version files must be transferred between the main unit and an external site by FTP.
Form the main unit they can be deployed to the extension units.

1. At the command prompt, type: /management/mng-service/mng-software, and press Enter.
2. Type: set server-url <ip/path> (the clients IP address and files path), and press Enter.
3. Type: set server-login <user-name> (the user name expected from client), and press Enter.
5. Type: change-server-password and press Enter; upon prompt write the password expected
Upgrading to a more Advanced Version

1. Type: download, and press Enter. This will download the new package.
2. In order to install the downloaded file:
PAGE 548
86
For a certain slot, type: upgrade --unit <slot number>, and press Enter.
For all the slots in the shelf, type: upgrade --all, and press Enter.
Downgrading to a Previous Version

1. Type: download --downgrade, and press Enter. This will download the package.
2. In order to install the downloaded file:
For a certain slot, type: downgrade --unit <slot number>, and press Enter.
For all the slots in the shelf, type: downgrade --all, and press Enter.
Rollback Procedure
In order to rollback to the previously installed version:
For a certain slot, type: rollback --unit <slot number>, and press Enter.
For all the slots in the shelf, type: rollback --all, and press Enter.
PAGE 549
87
Using CLI scripts

CLI scripts are text files containing CLI commands which can be downloaded and run in the main
unit only.

1. At the command prompt, type: /platform/idc-board, and press Enter.
2. Type: set set host-ip <ip> (the clients IP address), and press Enter.
3. Type: set host-path <path> (the site to the desired file location at the client), and press Enter.
4. Type: set set user-name <user-name> (the user name expected from client), and press
Enter.
5. Type: change-user-password and press Enter; upon prompt write the password expected
Downloading CLI Scripts from FTP Client

1. At the command prompt, type: cd /platform/idc-board/, and press Enter.
2. Type: set cli-script-file-name<file name> (the scripts file name), and press Enter.
3. In order to download the file from the FTP client, type: download-archive cli-script, and press
Enter.
4. In order to see the upload status, type: get download-cli-script-status, and press Enter.
Managing and Executing Scripts

1. In order to see the contents of the currently loaded script, type: cli-script show, and press
Enter.
2. In order to execute the currently loaded script, type: cli-script execute, and press Enter.
3. In order to delete the currently loaded script, type: cli-script delete, and press Enter.
PAGE 550
88
Radio Parameter Configurations

To set TX frequency:
1. Type cd /radio/rfu/ set tx-freq <frequency in KHz>, then press Enter.
To set RX frequency:
1. Type cd /radio/rfu/ set rx-freq <frequency in KHz>, then press Enter.
To set TX power level:
1. Type cd /radio/rfu/max-tx-level <TX level in dBm>, then press Enter.
To mute/unmute the TX:
1. Type cd /radio/rfu/ set mute-tx <disable/enable>, then press Enter.
To set ATPC reference level:
1. Type cd /radio/rfu/ set atpc-ref-rx-level <reference level in dBm>, then press Enter.
To enable ATPC:
1. Type cd /radio/rfu/ set atpc-admin <enable/disable>, then press Enter.
To set RX level PM threshold1:
1. Type cd /radio/rfu/ set pm-rx-level-threshold-1 <threshold in dBm>, then press Enter.
To set RX level PM threshold2:
1. Type cd /radio/rfu/ set pm-rx-level-threshold-2 <threshold in dBm>, then press Enter.
PAGE 551
89
To set TX level PMs threshold:

1. Type cd /radio/rfu/ set pm-tx-level-threshold <threshold in dBm>, then press Enter.
To enable/disale MAC header compression:
1. Type cd /radio/ set mhc-admin <enable/disable>, then press Enter.
To set Link-ID:
1. Type cd /radio/framer/ set link-id <Link-ID number>, then press Enter.
To set radio excessive BER threshold:
1. Type cd /radio/framer/ set radio-excessive-ber-threshold <BER: 1e-3, 1e-4, 1e-5>, then
press Enter.
To set radio signal degrade threshold:
1. Type cd /radio/framer/ set radio-signal-degrade-threshold <BER: 1e-6, 1e-7, 1e-8, 1e-9>,
then press Enter.
To set MSE PMs threshold:
1. Type cd /radio/modem/set mse-threshold <Threshold in dB>, then press Enter.
NTP
To set NTP service enable/disable:
1. At the command prompt, type: cd /management/mng-services/time-service/ntp, and press
Enter.
2. Type set server 192.168.1.100, and press Enter.
3. Type set admin <enable/disable>, and press Enter.
To set NTP offset from GMT:
1. At the command prompt, type: cd management/mng-services/time-service/, and press
Enter.
2. Type set gmt-offset-hours 2, and press Enter.
3. Type set gmt-offset-minutes 0, and press Enter.
PAGE 552
90
To set Daylight Saving Time:

1. At the command prompt, type: cd /management/mng-services/time-service, and press
Enter.
2. Type set dst-start-month Apr, and press Enter.
3. Type set dst-start-day 1, and press Enter.
4. Type set dst-end-month Nov, and press Enter.
5. Type set dst-end-day 1, and press Enter.
To set Date and Time, whereby the time and date format are day-month-year,hours:mins:secs:
1. At the command prompt, type : cd /management/mng-services/time-service, and press
Enter.
2. Type set time-and-date 10-3-2009,15:00:00, and press Enter.
SNMP
To set SNMP enable/disable:
1. At the command prompt, type: cd /management/mng-protocols/snmp, and press Enter.
2. Type set admin <enable /disable>, and press Enter.
To set the SNMP version:
2. Type set version v3 (or v1 for SNMP version 1), and press Enter.
SNMP Parameters for SNMP Version 3
To set the security mode to authentication, and the authentication algorithm to sha:
2. Type change-user-settings user_name_example authentication sha, and press Enter.
3. Enter the SNMPv3 Password: user_password_example, and press Enter.
To set the security mode to authentication-privacy, and the Authentication algorithm to md5:
PAGE 553
91
2. Type change-user-settings user_name_example authentication-privacy md5, and press

Enter.
3. Enter the SNMPv3 Password: user_password_example, and press Enter.
To set the security mode to no-security, and the authentication algorithm to no authentication:
2. Type change-user-settings no-se-user no-security no-auth, and press Enter.
To set the telnet protocol to enable/disable:
1. At the command prompt, type: cd /management/mng-protocols, and press Enter.
2. Type set telnet-admin <enable/disable>, and press Enter.
To set web GUI to enable/disable:
2. Type set web-admin <enable/disable>, and press Enter.
The following steps are used to define the web protocol that will work with HTTPS
It is important to note the order!
Step 1: Create the NE certificate based on the NE's public key. The public key receives the public
key file through upload.
1. At the command prompt, type: cd /platform/idc-board, and press Enter.
2. Type upload-archive public-key, and press Enter.
You can find your public_key file (such as 192.168.1.18_pub_key) in your host path directory.
Step 2: Download the NE certificate.
Note: Before you download the certificate, copy your NE certificate to your ftp host path directory.
2. Type set security-file-format <pem/der>, and press Enter.
3. Type set security-file-type <target-certificate>, and press Enter.
4. Type set security-file-name <MYCERT.crt> (your certificate file name), and press Enter.
5. Type download-archive security-file, and press Enter.
PAGE 554
92
Step 3: (Optional) Download the NE CA's certificate.

2. Type set security-file-format <pem/der>, and press Enter.
3. Type set security-file-type <target-ca-certificate>, and press Enter.
4. Type set security-file-name <EssentialSSLCA_2.crt> (your CA-certificate file name), and
press Enter.
5. Type download-archive security-file, and press Enter.
Step 4: (Optional) Set the web-ca-certificate-admin parameter to enable.
2. Type set web-ca-certificate-admin <enable> /<disable>, and press Enter.
Step 5: Set the web-protocol parameter to https.
2. Type set web-protocol <https> /<http>, and press Enter.
Note: Enter the URL in the WEB GUI, such as https://192.168.1.1 to use the https protocol.
PAGE 555
93
CFM
Domain
Under service-oam level
Creation:
IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/service-oam> domain add <Domain name> <Domain level [1-7]>
, and press Enter.
Deletion:
IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/service-oam> domain remove <Domain name> <Domain level
[1-7]> , and press Enter.
Domain & Association
Creation:
IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/service-oam> domain add <Domain name> <Domain level [1-7]>
<Association name> <VLAN ID [1-4090]> , and press Enter.
Deletion:
IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/service-oam> domain remove <Domain name> <Domain level
[1-7]> <Association name> <VLAN ID [1-4090]> , and press Enter.
Association
Under service-oam level:
Creation
IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/service-oam> association add <Association name> <Domain
name> <VLAN ID [1-4090]> , and press Enter.
Deletion
IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/service-oam> association remove <Association name>
<Domain name> <VLAN ID [1-4090]> , and press Enter.
CCM
On
IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/service-oam> ccm-admin enable <Domain level [1-7]> <VLAN
ID [1-4090]> , and press Enter.
Off
IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/service-oam> ccm-admin disable <Domain level [1-7]> <VLAN
ID [1-4090]> , and press Enter.
PAGE 556
94
Local MEP
Under interfaces level
Creation
1. IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port [x]> mep set < MEP ID [1-8191]> < Domain level [17]> <VLAN ID [1-4090]> < Direction [up/down]> <CCM VLAN Pbit priority [0-7]> , and press
Enter.
2. IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port [x]> mep set < MEP ID [1-8191]> < Domain level [17]> <VLAN ID [1-4090]> < Direction [up/down]> , and press Enter.
Deletion
IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port [x]> mep remove < MEP ID [1-8191]> < Domain level [17]> <VLAN ID [1-4090]> < Direction [up/down]> , and press Enter.
Remote MEP
Creation
1. IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/service-oam> remote-mep set <Remote MEP ID [1-8191]>
<Domain name> <VLAN ID [1-4090]> <MAC address [xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx]> , and press Enter.
2. IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/service-oam> remote-mep set <Remote MEP ID [1-8191]>
Deletion
IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/service-oam> remote-mep remove <Remote MEP ID [1-8191]>
MIP
Under interfaces level
Creation
IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[x]> mip add <Domain level [1-7]> , and press Enter.
Deletion
IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/eth-port[x]> mip remove <Domain level [1-7]> , and press Enter.
Loopback (Ping)
1. IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/service-oam> ping mac-address <MAC address
[xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx]> md-name <Domain name> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> <VLAN Pbit priority[0-7]> ,
and press Enter.
[xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx]> md-name <Domain name> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> , and press Enter.
PAGE 557
95

[xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx]> md-level <Domain level[1-7]> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> <VLAN Pbit priority[07]> , and press Enter.
[xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx]> md-level <Domain level[1-7]> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> , and press Enter.
5. IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/service-oam> ping mep-id <Remote MEP ID[1-8191]> mdname <Domain name> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> <VLAN Pbit priority[0-7]> , and press Enter.
6. IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/service-oam> ping mep-id <Remote MEP ID[1-8191]> mdname <Domain name> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> , and press Enter.
7. IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/service-oam> ping mep-id <Remote MEP ID[1-8191]> mdlevel <Domain level[1-7]> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> <VLAN Pbit priority[0-7]> , and press Enter.
8. IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/service-oam> ping mep-id <Remote MEP ID[1-8191]> mdlevel <Domain level[1-7]> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> , and press Enter.
Link Trace
1. IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/service-oam> linktrace mac-address <MAC address
[xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx]> md-name <Domain name> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> <VLAN Pbit priority[0-7]> ,
and press Enter.
[xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx]> md-name <Domain name> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> , and press Enter.
[xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx]> md-level <Domain level[1-7]> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> <VLAN Pbit priority[07]> , and press Enter.
[xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx]> md-level <Domain level[1-7]> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> , and press Enter.
5. IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/service-oam> linktrace mep-id <Remote MEP ID[1-8191]>
md-name <Domain name> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> <VLAN Pbit priority[0-7]> , and press Enter.
md-name <Domain name> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> , and press Enter.
md-level <Domain level[1-7]> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> <VLAN Pbit priority[0-7]> , and press Enter.
md-level <Domain level[1-7]> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> , and press Enter.
Auto Link Trace
Under service-oam level:
Creation
1. IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/service-oam> auto-linktrace add <Remote MEP ID [1-8191]>
md-name <Domain name> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> <VLAN Pbit priority[0-7]> , and press Enter.
md-name <Domain name> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> , and press Enter.
PAGE 558
96

md-level <Domain level[1-7]> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> <VLAN Pbit priority[0-7]> , and press Enter.
md-level <Domain level[1-7]> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> , and press Enter.
Deletion
1. IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/service-oam> auto-linktrace remove <Remote MEP ID [18191]> md-name <Domain name> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> , and press Enter.
2. IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/service-oam> auto-linktrace remove <Remote MEP ID [18191]> md-level <Domain level[1-7]> <VLAN ID[1-4090]> , and press Enter.
CCM Interval
Modification
IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/service-oam> ccm-interval <interval time: 1-sec, 10-sec, 1-min,
10-min> <Domain level [1-7]> <VLAN ID [1-4090]> , and press Enter.
Auto Link Trace Interval
Modification
IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/service-oam> set auto-linktrace-interval [seconds: range 603600] , and press Enter.
Remote MEP Learning Time
Modification
IP-10:/interfaces/ethernet/bridge/service-oam> set remote-meps-learning-time [seconds: range
60-3600] , and press Enter.
Ring RSTP
To enable Ring RSTP:
1. Type cd /interfaces/ethernet/bridge/ set stp-protocol ring-rstp, and press Enter.
To set bridge priority:
Type cd /interfaces/ethernet/bridge/ set priority <priority no: range 0-61440, steps of 4096>,
and press Enter.
PAGE 559
97
To set interfaces priority:

Type cd /interfaces/ethernet/bridge/ethe-port[port no.]/ set priority <interface priority no:
range:0-240, steps of 16>, and press Enter.
To set interfaces patch cost:
Type cd /interfaces/ethernet/bridge/ethe-port[port no.]/ set path-cost <patch cost>, and press
Enter.
To set if interface is an edge port or ring port (non-edge port):
Type cd /interfaces/ethernet/bridge/ethe-port[port no.]/ set edge-port <yes/no>, and press
Enter.
PAGE 560
98
9/26/2010
FibeAir IP-10 Cables & Adapters
Preliminary Questions
Whatistherequiredlength?
________[m/ft]
Terminationtype
Openend/RJ45Male/RJ45Female/75Ohm/BNC
IDUConnector
Rightangled/Leftangled?
NumberofE1ports
4/8/16
ProtectionPanelrequired?
YES/NO
PDH(E1/DS1)
Adaptersrequired?
YES/NO
________[m/ft]
Pinlayout
Crosscable/Straightcable
Wh t i th
i dl
th?
[ /ft]
________[m/ft]
Core/Mode
MultiMode/SingleMode
LongReach?
YES/NO
Mode
Synchronous/Asynchronous
ETHERNET
FiberOptics
UserChannel
PAGE 561
9/26/2010
ETHERNET CABLES
Protection Cable
X-WSC-E1 WA-0242-0
X-WSC-T1 WA-0242-0
Cross Ethernet CAT 5 cable (Male - Male)

Used in order to connect two IDUs in hot standby mode (Protected) when
working without enclosure
Length 0.2 M
PAGE 562
9/26/2010
Connection Cables
X-2FE-CON WA-0235-0
Cross Ethernet Cable CAT 5 (Male - Male).

Same as pprevious cable,, onlyy longer
g
Used for cross connection between devices
Length 2M
ETH Y-Cables
15P-PROT-CBL WA-0244-0
Ethernet CAT-5 Y Cable (2xMale 1xFemale)

Used in hot standby (protected) configurations in order to provide single
input/output from the two IDUs
Length 0.3 M
Uses extension X-2FE-CON (in order to convert the common port to Male)
15PPROTCBL
X2FECON
PAGE 563
9/26/2010
PDH CABLES
E1 Extension Cable
IP10-CBL-16E1-OE-3M WA-0400-0
In use to connect to the IP-10 16E1 connector on one end and have open
ends for the 16E1 on the other side ((on 120 ohm))
A male SCSI68 Left angle120 OHM cable

When conversion to 75 ohm is required a special adaptation panel is
needed
Length 3M
Additional Optional length (5, 10, 15 meter):
IP10-CBL-16IO-10M
IP10-CBL-16IO-25M
IP10-CBL-16IO-5M
PAGE 564
9/26/2010
T1 Extension Cable
IP10-CBL-16T1-OE-3M WA-0413-0
In use to connect to the IP-10 16E1 connector on one end and have open
ends for the 16T1 on the other side ((on 100 ohm))
A male SCSI68 Left angle100 OHM cable
Length 3M
Additional Optional length (5, 10, 15 meter):
IP10-CBL-16T1-10M
IP10-CBL-16T1-25M
IP10-CBL-16T1-5M
E1 Y-Cable
IP10-CBL-16E1-PROT-Y WA-0391-0
16E1 Y-Splitter 120 OHM cable

2 x Male connectors connect to IP
IP-10s
10s
1 x Female SCSI68 Left-angled connector
Use in protected mode 1+1 or 2+2 to connect the 2x16T1 ports of the IDUs
to external single source
Length 0.6 M
IP10CBL16E1OE3M
10
PAGE 565
9/26/2010
T1 Y-Cable
IP10-CBL-16T1-PROT-Y WA-0398-0
16T1 Y-Splitter 100 OHM cable

2 x Male connectors connect to IP
IP-10s
10s
1 x Female SCSI68 Left-angled connector
Use in protected mode 1+1 or 2+2 to connect the 2x16T1 ports of the IDUs
to external single source
Length 0.6 M
IP10CBL16T1OE3M
11
PDH Expansion Panels
The panels act as distribution frames for E1/T1 cables

Orders need to include: Cables + Adapters + Frames
Adapters support 75Ohm or 120 Ohm
12
PAGE 566
9/26/2010
E1 Expansion Panel with RJ45 Female Sockets

IP10-CBL-16E1MDRLA-RJ45-XD1.5m WA-0407-1
IP10-ADAP-RJ45F-E1/T1-XED x8 NM-0153-0
IP10-PANEL-32E1/T1-RJ45
EN-0268-0
cable
kits of 8 female-female adaptors order 2

to connect 16 E1s
Chassis/frame only
13
A male SCSI68 Left angled 120 OHM cable with

RJ 45 Adaptors
2 kits of 8 female-female adaptors should be
ordered for 16T1 (optional)
Length 1.5M
Optional length
IP10-CBL-16T1-MDRLA-RJ45-XD1.5m
IP10-CBL-16T1-MDRLA-RJ45-XD3m
T1 Expansion Panel with RJ45 Female Sockets

IP10-CBL-16T1MDRLA-RJ45-XD1.5m WA-0411-1
IP10-ADAP-RJ45F-E1/T1-XED x8 NM-0153-0
IP10-PANEL-32E1/T1-RJ45 EN-0268-0
cable
kits of 8 female-female adaptors

order 2 to connect 16 E1s
Chassis/frame only
14
A male SCSI68 Left angled100 OHM cable with

RJ 45 Adaptors
2 kits of 8 female-female adaptors should be
ordered for 16T1 (optional)
Length 1.5M
Optional length
IP10-CBL-16T1-MDRLA-RJ45-XD1.5m
IP10-CBL-16T1-MDRLA-RJ45-XD3m
PAGE 567
9/26/2010
E1 Expansion Panel with 75 Ohms Sockets

IP10-CBL-16E1-MDR-MDR-06.m WA-0402-0
cable
IP10-16E1-ADAP-PANEL-75ohm-BNC EN-0313-0
Chassis/frame only
Use for 16E1 expansion to unbalanced 75

ohm connectors with BNC
A two way male SCSI68 cable
Length 0.6M
Optional length
IP10-CBL-16E1-MDR-MDR-1.5m
IP10
CBL 16E1 MDR MDR 1.5m
IP10-CBL-16E1-MDR-MDR-5m
No. in Diagram
Model
Description
IP10CBL16E1MDRMDR0.6m/1.5m/5m
IP1016E1portscablestraight0.6/1.5m/5m
IP10PANEL16E1ADAP75ohmBNC
IP1016E1panelw/75ohmadapter,BNC
15
E1 Extension Cable with RJ45 Female

IP10-CBL-4E1-RJ45F-0.3m
WA-0383-0
A male SCSI68 Left angle120 OHM cable with RJ 45 Adaptors

In use for 16E1 connector separation to 4 single E1s (on 120 ohm)
Length 0.3M
16
PAGE 568
9/26/2010
T1 Extension Cable with RJ45 Female

IP10-CBL-4T1-RJ45F-0.3m WA-0433-0
A male SCSI68 Left angle100 OHM cable with RJ 45 Female Adaptors

In use for 16T1 connector separation to 4 single T1s
Length 0.3M
17
E1 Extension Cable with RJ45 Male to Male

IP10-CBL-8E1-MDR-RJ45-1.5m WA-0431-0
A male SCSI68 Left angle120 OHM cable with RJ 45 Female Adaptors

In use for 16E1 separation to 8 single E1s (on 120 ohm)
When conversion to 75 ohm is required a special adaptation panel is
needed
Length 1.5M
Optional length and number of E1s:
IP10-CBL-4E1-MDR-RJ45-XED-0.3m
IP10-CBL-8E1-MDR-RJ45-XED-0.3m
P10-CBL-8E1-MDR-RJ45-XED-1.5m
18
PAGE 569
9/26/2010
T1 Extension Cable with RJ45 Male to Male

IP10-16T1-MDR-RJ45-XED-1.5m
WA-0373-0
A male SCSI68 Left angle100 OHM cable with RJ 45 Adaptors

In use for 16E1 separation to 16 single T1 (on 100 ohm)
Length 1.5M
Optional length
IP10-CBL-16T1-MDR-RJ45-XED-3m
19
OPTICAL CABLES
20
PAGE 570
10
9/26/2010
Single Mode Transceiver (OTR/GBIC)

SFP-GE-LX ER-1002-0
SFP Optical interface for Gigabit Ethernet (plug-in)

Used when an Optical connection is needed up to 10KM
21
Optical Y-Splitter Single Mode

GBE-SPL-SM AO-0038-0
Optical Y Splitter for protected 1+1 mode (3x Male)

2 cables should be ordered: 1 for RX and 1 for TX
22
PAGE 571
11
9/26/2010
Optical Adapter Interface Single Mode

OP-SM-LC-LC-ADPT-DPLX AO-0043-0
Optical adaptor (Female/Female)

Used as an adaptor between the Y cable to the extension cable
2 adaptors should be ordered: 1 for RX and 1 for TX Y cables
23
Optical Extension Cable Single Mode

OP-SM-CBL-LC-LC-DPLX 3M
AO-0071-0
Used as an extension cable to the Y cable, connected via an adaptor

Length
g 3M
24
Optional length
PAGE 572
12
9/26/2010
Optical H-Cable Single Mode / Multi Mode

OP-SM-HSPL-LC-LC 0.5M/0.5M AO-0087-0
OP-MM-HSPL-LC-LC 0.5M/0.5M AO-0089-0
H Optical cable
Used to interconnect between two protected terminals (logically equivalent to two

Y splitters connected to each other via their common port)
2 cables should be ordered

TX of 1 device should be connected to RX of the other
25
Optical H-Cable Single Mode / Multi Mode

SFP-STM-1-S1.1
AO-0072-0
SFP for channelized STM-1 / OC-3 T-Card

Single Mode
Mode, Short Haul 1310nm
All cables and adaptors from slides 12-15 and 17 are also relevant in
the STM-1/OC-3 case
26
PAGE 573
13
9/26/2010
ALARMS CABLES
27
Alarm Cable with Protection

IP10-EXT-ALARMS-CBL-2.5M-PROT
WA-0369-0
Used for connecting 1+1 alarms with Y cable

2nd end - Open
p Cable
Length 2.5M
28
PAGE 574
14
9/26/2010
Alarm Cable without Protection

IP10-EXT-ALARMS-CBL-2.5M WA-0374-0
Used for connecting 1+0 alarms

2nd end - Open
p Cable
Length 2.5M
29
USER CHANNEL CABLES
30
PAGE 575
15
9/26/2010
User Channel Asynchronous Cable

15R-USER-CHAN-ASYNC-CBL-2.5M
WA-0288-0
Asynchronous, open cable

Used when working on 1+0 for the user channel connection
Length 2.5 M
31
User Channel Asynchronous Cable - Protection

WA-0288-0
Asynchronous, open cable

Used when working on 1+0 for the user channel connection
Length 2.5 M
Used when working on 1+1 or 2+2 for the user channel connection
Y cable 15P-PROT-CBL (WA-0244-0) is required
15P-PROT-CB
32
PAGE 576
16
9/26/2010
User Channel Synchronous Cable

15R-USER-CHAN-SYNC-CBL-2.5M WA-0289-0
SYNC Cable
Used when working on 1+0 user channel connection
Length 2.5 M
33
User Channel Synchronous Cable - Protection

15R-USER-CHAN-SYNC-CBL-2.5M WA-0289-0
34
SYNC Cable
Used when working on 1+1 or 2+2 for the user channel connection
Length 2.5 M
Uses the Y cable 15P-PROT-CBL
Two Y cables should be ordered to support protection mode
PAGE 577
17
9/26/2010
IF CABLES
35
IDU-ODU IF CABLE
IDU_ODU_CBL WA-0098-0
N_TYPE WA-0037-0
RG8 Cable for IF (without connectors)

IDU_ODU_CBL (Should be ordered per meter)
Optional length (pre-defined):
IDU_ODU_CBL_100Meter
IDU_ODU_CBL_200m
IDU_ODU_CBL_500m
BNC Connector
N
N-Type
Type
Needs two per cable
36
PAGE 578
18
9/26/2010
PART NUMBERS
37
E1
E1 Open End Termination Cables
Ceragon PN
Marketing Model
Marketing Description
Item Description
WA-0277-0
IP10-CBL-16IO-5M
IP-10 16 I/O ports cable open 5M
CABLE,SCSI68 LEFT ANGLE TO

OE,5M,120 OHM
WA-0278-0
IP10-CBL-16IO-10M

OE,10M,120 OHM
WA-0309-0
IP10-CBL-16IO-25M

OE,25M,120 OHM
WA-0400-0
IP10-CBL-16E1-OE-3M
IP-10 16E1 cable open-end, 3M
WA-0404-0
IP10-CBL-8E1-OE-3M
IP-10 8E1 cable open-end, 3M
E1RJ45female(socket)terminationcables
Ceragon P/N
Marketing Model
WA-0383-0
IP10-CBL-4E1-RJ45F-0.3M
IP-10 4E1 ports RJ45 socket (female), 0.3M
38
PAGE 579
19
9/26/2010
E1
E1RJ45maleterminationcables/panels
CeragonP/N
MarketingModel
MarketingDescription
Itemdescription
WA03960
IP10CBL4E1MDRRJ45XED0.3m
IP104E1cableMDR68RJ450.3M,cross
WA 0395 0
WA03950
IP10 CBL 8E1 MDR RJ45 XED 0 3

IP 10 8E1 bl MDR68 RJ45 0 3M

WA03921
WA03941
IP10CBL8E1MDRRJ45XED3m
IP108E1cableMDR68RJ453M,cross
WA04091
IP10CBL16E1MDRLARJ45XD3m
IP1016E1cableMDR68RJ453M,LA,cross
WA04071
IP10CBL16E1MDRLARJ45XD1.5m
IP1016E1cableMDR68RJ451.5M,LA,crs
WA04440
IP10CBL16E1MDRLARJ45XD1.25m
IP1016E1cableMDR68RJ45,Cross,1.25M
WA04290
IP10CBL4E1MDRRJ450.3m
IP104E1cableMDR68RJ450.3M
WA04300
WA04311
CABLE,SCSI68MaleTO4xRJ45Male
CROSS,0.3M,120OHM
,S S 68 a e O 8
5 ae
CROSS,0.3M,120OHM
CROSS,1.5M,120OHM
CROSS,3M,120OHM
CABLE,SCSI68PINTO16*RJ45,1.5M,120
Ohm,LEFT ANGLE,CROSS
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
CABLE,SCSI68PINTO8*RJ45,3M,120
Ohm
WA04321
IP10CBL8E1MDRRJ453m
IP108E1cableMDR68RJ453M
WA04011
IP10CBL16E1MDRLARJ451.5m
IP1016E1cableMDR68RJ451.5M,L.Ang.
WA04351
IP10CBL16E1MDRLARJ453m
IP1016E1cableMDR68RJ453M,L.Angle
CABLE,SCSI68PINTO16*RJ45,3M,120
Ohm,LEFT ANGLE
39
E1
E1 RJ45 couplers/panels
Status
Ceragon P/N
Marketing Model
NPI
EN-0268-0
IP10-PANEL-32E1/T1-RJ45
IP-10 32E1/T1 panel, for RJ45F adapters
Released
NM-0153-0
IP10-ADAP-RJ45F-E1/T1-XED x8
IP-10 RJ45F/RJ45F adapter,E1/T1,cross x8
Released
NM-0154-0
IP10-ADAP-RJ45F-RJ45F x8
IP-10 RJ45F/RJ45F adapter, straight x8
E1 RJ45 - RJ45 cables

Ceragon P/N
WA-0417-0
WA-0418-0
WA-0419-0
WA-0414-0
WA-0415-0
WA 0415 0
Marketing Model
IP10-CBL-E1-RJ45-RJ45-0.6m
IP10-CBL-E1-RJ45-RJ45-1m
IP10-CBL-E1-RJ45-RJ45-2m
IP10-CBL-E1-RJ45-RJ45-XED-0.6m
IP10-CBL-E1-RJ45-RJ45-XED-1m
IP10 CBL E1 RJ45 RJ45 XED 1m
IP-10 E1 RJ45 cable 0.6m, str. (green)
IP-10 E1 RJ45 cable 1m, straight (green)
IP-10 E1 RJ45 cable 2m, straight (green)
IP-10 E1 RJ45 cable 0.6m, cross (blue)
IP-10
IP
10 E1 RJ45 cable 1m, cross (blue)
WA-0416-0
IP10-CBL-E1-RJ45-RJ45-XED-2m
IP-10 E1 RJ45 cable 2m, cross (blue)
E1 75ohm termination cables/panels (with optional integrated protection)

Ceragon P/N
Marketing Model
EN-0313-0
IP10-PANEL-16E1-ADAP-75ohm-BNC
IP-10 16E1 panel w/ 75ohm adap , BNC
EN-0315-0
IP10-PANEL-16E1-PROT-75ohm-BNC
IP-10 16E1 panel w/ 75ohm adap&prot, BNC
40
PAGE 580
20
9/26/2010
E1
E1Protectionpanels/cables
CeragonP/N
WA03910
MarketingModel
IP10CBL16E1PROTY
IP1016E1protectionYcable,MDR68
E1MDR69 MDR69crosscables(forchainingapplications)
CeragonP/N
MarketingModel
WA03820
IP10CBL16E1MDRMDRXED2m
IP1016E1portscrossedcable2m
CeragonP/N
MarketingModel
WA03750
IP10CBL16E1MDR2xDTYPE1.5m
/
IP1016E1cableMDR68/2xDB371.5m
E1specialcables/panels(notforpricelist)
WA04081
IP10CBL16E1MDRRARJ45XD1.5m
IP1016E1cableMDR68RJ451.5M,RA,crs
WA03700
WA03770
WA03930
IP10CBL16E1MDRRJ45XED3m
IP1016E1cableMDR68RJ453M,cross
WA04030
IP10CBLE1RJ45RJ45FXED0.3m
IP10E1RJ45toRJ45Fcable0.3m,cross
WA04340
IP10CBL16E1MDRMDREXT0.6m
IP1016E1Extensioncable 0.6m, MDR68
WA03870
IP10CBL16E1OEPROT5M
IP1016E1scableopenend,5Mw/prot.
41
T1
T1"openend"terminationcables
CeragonP/N
MarketingModel
WA03580
IP10CBL16T15M
IP1016T1portscableopen5M CABLE,SCSI68LEFTANGLETOOE,25M,100OHM
WA03590
IP10CBL16T110M
WA03600
IP10CBL16T125M
WA 0413 0
WA04130
IP10 CBL 16T1 OE 3M

IP10CBL16T1OE3M
IP1016T1cableopenend,
p
,
3M
Itemdescription
CABLE SCSI68 LEFT ANGLE TO OE 3M 100 OHM

CABLE,SCSI68LEFTANGLETOOE,3M,100OHM
42
PAGE 581
21
9/26/2010
T1
T1RJ45maletermination cables/panels
CeragonP/N
MarketingModel
WA04121
IP10CBL16T1MDRLARJ45XD3m
IP1016T1cable MDR68RJ453M,LA,cross
WA04101
IP10CBL16T1MDRLARJ451.5m
IP1016T1cable MDR68RJ451.5M,L.Ang.
WA04111
IP10CBL16T1MDRLARJ45XD1.5m
IP1016T1cable MDR68RJ451.5M,LA,crs
CeragonP/N
MarketingModel
WA03980
IP10CBL16T1PROTY
IP1016T1protectionYcable,MDR68
CeragonP/N
MarketingModel
WA04330
IP10CBL4T1RJ45F0.3M
T1Protectionpanels/cables
T1RJ45female (socket)termination cables

IP104T1portsRJ45socket(female),0.3M
43
T1
T1MDR69 MDR69crosscables(forchainingapplications)
CeragonP/N
MarketingModel
Itemdescription
IP1016T1portscrossedcable2m
CABLE,SCSI68TOSCSI68CROSS,2M,100
OHM,30AWG
WA04280
IP10CBL16T1MDRMDRXED2m
CeragonP/N
MarketingModel
IP10CBL16T1MDRRJ45XED3m
IP1016T1cable MDR68RJ453M,cross
WA03730
IP10CBL16T1MDRRJ45XED1.5m
IP1016T1cableMDR68RJ451.5M,cross
IP1016T1CROSSCABLEMDR68RJ45
1.5M
WA03370
IP10CBL16T1MDRRJ451.5m
IP1016T1cableMDR68RJ451.5M
IP1016T1CABLE,MDR68Pinto
RJ45,1.5M
T1specialcables/panels(notforpricelist)
Itemdescription
44
PAGE 582
22
9/26/2010
OPTICAL
STM1SFPs/patches/splitters multimode(optical)
CeragonP/N
MarketingModel
ER 8000 0
ER80000
SFP GE SX*RoHS
SFPGESX*RoHS
SFP optical interface 1000Base SX

SFPopticalinterface1000BaseSX
ER80030
SFPGEELC
SFPelectricalinterface1000BaseT
Itemdescription
SFPMultimode850nm1.0625Gbit/sFibreChannel
1.25GigabitEthernetTransceiver,withpackingRoHS
1
25 Gigabit Ethernet Transcei er ith packing RoHS
compliance
SFP1000BASET1.25GBdSmallFormPluggableLow
Voltage(3.3V)ElectricalTransceiveroverCategory5
Cablewithpackage
AO00580
SFPGEZX
SFPopticalinterface1000BaseZX
AO00480
OPMMCBLLCLCDPLX0.5M
DuplexOpticalCableLCLCMM0.5M
CABLE,FO,DUALLCTOLC,0.5M,MM,D=2MM
AO00660
AO00670
OPMMCBLLCLCDPLX3M
OPMMCBLLCLCDPLX6M
DuplexOpticalCableLCLCMM3M
DuplexOpticalCableLCLCMM6M
CABLE,FO,DUALLCTOLC,3M,MM,D=2MM
CABLE,FO,DUALLCTOLC,6M,MM,D=2MM
CABLE,FO,1X2SPLITTERLCTO
LC,1M,MM,W.COUPLER50/50850NM,D=2MM
LC,0.5M,MM,W.COUPLER50/50850NM,D=2MM
LC,0.3M,MM,W.COUPLER50/50850NM,D=2MM
COUPLER,2X2,850NM,lCTO
lC,1M,MM,50/50,D=2MM
AO00390
GBESPLMM2M
MM/LCOpticalsplitter62.5/1252M
AO00590
GBESPLMM1M
MM/LCOpticalsplitter62.5/1251M
AO00600
GBESPLMM0.6M
MM/LCOpticalsplitter62.5/1250.6M
AO00890
OPMMHSPLLCLC0.5M/0.5M
Opt.HspltMM850nm,LC/LC,0.5M/0.5M
AO00900
OPMMHSPLLCLC1M/1M
Opt.HspltMM850nm,LC/LC,1M/1M
COUPLER,2X2,850NM,lCTO
lC,2M,MM,50/50,D=2MM
45
ETHERNET
Ethernetcables/splitters(copper)
CeragonP/N
MarketingModel
Itemdescription
WA03340
IP10CBLFE0.5M
IP10FEProtcablestraight0.5m
CABLE,RJ45TORJ45,0.5M,CAT5E
WA02421
XWSCE1/T1
E1/T1WSCxedcable
CABLE,RJ45TORJ45CROSS,0.5M,CAT5E
WA02350
X2FECON
DualchannelEthernetxedcable
CABLE,RJ45TORJ45DUALCROSS,2M,CAT
5E,100OHM
WA02440
15PPROTCBL
E1/T1/Ethernetprotectioncable
CABLE,RJ45TO2XRJ45F,1.34M,CAT5E
46
PAGE 583
23
9/26/2010
ETHERNET
EthernetRJ45 RJ45cables
CeragonP/N
MarketingModel
WA04170
IP10CBLETHRJ450.6m
IP10ETHRJ45cable0.6m,str.
WA04180
IP10CBLETHRJ451m
IP10ETHRJ45cable1m,str.
WA04190
IP10CBLETHRJ452m
IP10ETHRJ45cable2m,str.
WA04140
IP10CBLETHRJ45XED0.6m
IP10ETHRJ45cable0.6m,cross
WA04150
IP10CBLETHRJ45XED1m
IP10ETHRJ45cable1m,cross
WA04160
IP10CBLETHRJ45XED2m
IP10ETHRJ45cable2m,cross
47
AUXILARY USER CHANNEL & ALARMS
ExternalAlarms
CeragonP/N
MarketingModel
Itemdescription
WA03740
IP10EXTALARMSCBL2.5m
IP10Ext.Alarmsopencable2.5m
CABLE,D9FTOOE,2.5M,EXT
ALARMS
WA03690
IP10EXTALARMSCBL2.5mPROT
Ext.Alarmscable2.5m withprotection
CABLE,D9Fx2TO
OE,2.5M,EXTALARMS
CeragonP/N
MarketingModel
WA02880
15RUSERCHANASYNCCBL2.5M
1500RAsync UserChannelsopencable2.5
WA02890
WA02720
15RUSERCHANSYNCCBL2.5M
PWRCBL2.2M
1500RSync UserChannels opencable 2.5m

48VDC2.2mPWRCABLERoHS
MB09650
IDUMountears1RUW19inD50mm
IDUmount.ears,1RU,W:19in,D:50mm
WB00050
IP10CBLPWR48VExtendedProt
IP10extend.prot.48Vpowercable
Userchannelandothers
Itemdescription
IP10IDU19INCHDEEP
MOUNTEDEAR
48
PAGE 584
24
9/26/2010
Thank You
Should you require further information, please contact us at
PAGE 585
25

Ceragon - IP10G - Advanced - Course Handbook - V4.2

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Ceragon - IP10G - Advanced - Course Handbook - V4.2

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

IP-10G Advanced

Visit our Customer Training Portal at Training.Ceragon.Com

Introduction to Mean Square Error

Introduction Adaptive Coding & Modulation

IP-10G Front Panel Description

Setting IP to Chassis (CLI)

General Parameters (In-Band, OOB, License, NTP, Versions & more)

L2 Switch Configuration: Single Pipe, Managed Mode, VLANs

L2 Switch Configuration: Trunk Port VS. Access Port

Configuring Quality of Service (Part 1 - Basic)

Commissioning the Radio Link

Interface Configuration (ETH, TDM, STM, Auxiliary, SyncE, AIS)

Automatic State Propagation (ASP)

Introduction to Link Aggregation

Configuring Link Aggregation

Service Operation, Administration & Maintenance (CFM)

Loopbacks (IF, Radio, Line)

Ceragon - Company Presentation

Leaders in High-Capacity Wireless Backhaul

Proprietary and Confidential

Segment Breakdown H1 2009

Proprietary and Confidential

Short Haul Links: Rapid Growth

From 0.8% market share in 2005 to 6.3% market share in 2009

Source: SLR, EJL, Ceragon

Proprietary and Confidential

Rural and WiMAX Backhaul

Proprietary and Confidential

Private, Utility, State &

Any service: Voice, data, personal broadband

Proprietary and Confidential

Strategic Partnerships for Growth

Opportunity to participate in large network deployments

Proprietary and Confidential

Global, Diversified Customer Base

Proprietary and Confidential

Ceragon Product Portfolio

PDH & Ethernet Access

PDH/SONET & Ethernet

Trunk (Long Haul, High Power)

OC-3 Aggregation (N+1)

Comprehensive mounting Portfolio

Proprietary and Confidential

Faster & easier network

Quick and easy network

Greater network availability

Smooth platform integration

Ceragon's Architecture Management Concept

Proprietary and Confidential

Ceragon Complete Offering

Network design, Service design, Radio

Project Management, Site Survey,

Full Training Program, Expert on Site

Remote Technical Support 24/7, S/W Repair,

Proprietary and Confidential

Proprietary and Confidential

Mobile Backhaul Case Studies

Installing 700 links a month, from planning to commissioning

Proprietary and Confidential

Proprietary and Confidential

Converged, 3G and Rural Broadband IP backhaul

Proprietary and Confidential

For network simplicity

5 layers of protection to sustain high capacity mobile